HD6433661XXXH [ETC]
Microcontroller ; 微控制器\n
| 型号： | HD6433661XXXH |
| 厂家： | 
ETC |
| 描述： | Microcontroller
|
| 文件： | 总427页 (文件大小：2260K) |
| 中文： | 中文翻译 | 下载： | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
Hitachi Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8/3664 Series
H8/3664N
HD64N3664
H8/3664F
HD64F3664
H8/3664
HD6433664
H8/3663
HD6433663
H8/3662
HD6433662
H8/3661
HD6433661
H8/3660
HD6433660
Hardware Manual
ADE-602-202C
Rev. 4.0
03/20/02
Hitachi, Ltd.
Cautions
1. Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi’s or any third party’s
patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in
this document. Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party’s
rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information
contained in this document.
2. Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. Confirm that you
have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or
use.
3. Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability.
However, contact Hitachi’s sales office before using the product in an application that
demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly
threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear
power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for
life support.
4. Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi
particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics,
installation conditions and other characteristics. Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or
damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. Even within the guaranteed ranges,
consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and
employ systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi
product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of
the Hitachi product.
5. This product is not designed to be radiation resistant.
6. No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document
without written approval from Hitachi.
7. Contact Hitachi’s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi
semiconductor products.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page ii of xxvi
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a pass-
through current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined.
The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the
chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are
undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design
your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this
undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately
after the power supply has been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system’s
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page iii of xxvi
Configuration of This Manual
This manual comprises the following items:
1. General Precautions on Handling of Product
2. Configuration of This Manual
3. Preface
4. Contents
5. Overview
6. Description of Functional Modules
•
•
CPU and System-Control Modules
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the
module. However, the generic style includes the following items:
i) Feature
ii) Input/Output Pin
iii) Register Description
iv) Operation
v) Usage Note
When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section
includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the
final part of each section.
7. List of Registers
8. Electrical Characteristics
9. Appendix
10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions)
The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.
This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this
manual.
11. Index
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page iv of xxvi
Preface
The H8/3664 Series are single-chip microcomputers made up of the high-speed H8/300H CPU
employing Hitachi’s original architecture as their cores, and the peripheral functions required to
configure a system. The H8/300H CPU has an instruction set that is compatible with the H8/300
CPU.
Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8/3664 Series in the
design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the
fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcomputers.
Objective:
This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8/3664 Series to the target users.
Refer to the H8/300H Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the
instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
•
In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.
•
•
In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions
Read the H8/300H Series Programming Manual.
In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the
register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 19,
List of Registers.
Example:
Bit order:
The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
Notes:
When using an on-chip emulator (E10T) for H8/3664 program development and debugging, the
following restrictions must be noted.
1. The NMI pin is reserved for the E10T, and cannot be used.
2. Pins P85, P86, and P87 cannot be used. In order to use these pins, additional hardware must be
provided on the user board.
3. Area H’7000 to H’7FFF is used by the E10T, and is not available to the user.
4. Area H’F780 to H’FB7F must on no account be accessed.
5. When the E10T is used, address breaks can be set as either available to the user or for use by
the E10T. If address breaks are set as being used by the E10T, the address break control
registers must not be accessed.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page v of xxvi
6. When the E10T is used, NMI is an input/output pin (open-drain in output mode), P85 and P87
are input pins, and P86 is an output pin.
Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.
http://www.hitachisemiconductor.com/
H8/3664 Series manuals:
Manual Title
ADE No.
H8/3664 Series Hardware Manual
H8/300H Series Programming Manual
This manual
ADE-602-053
User's manuals for development tools:
Manual Title
ADE No.
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor
User's Manual
ADE-702-247
H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual
ADE-702-282
ADE-702-231
H8S, H8/300 Series Hitachi Embedded Workshop, Hitachi Debugging
Interface Tutorial
Hitachi Embedded Workshop User's Manual
ADE-702-201
Application notes:
Manual Title
ADE No.
Single Power Supply F-ZTATTM On-Board Programming
ADE-502-055
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page vi of xxvi
Contents
Section 1 Overview........................................................................................... 1
1.1 Features.............................................................................................................................1
1.2 Internal Block Diagram.....................................................................................................2
1.3 Pin Arrangement ...............................................................................................................4
1.4 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................................8
Section 2 CPU................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Address Space and Memory Map .....................................................................................12
2.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................................15
2.2.1 General Registers.................................................................................................16
2.2.2 Program Counter (PC) .........................................................................................17
2.2.3 Condition-Code Register (CCR)..........................................................................17
2.3 Data Formats.....................................................................................................................19
2.3.1 General Register Data Formats............................................................................19
2.3.2 Memory Data Formats .........................................................................................21
2.4 Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................22
2.4.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................22
2.4.2 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................31
2.5 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation.....................................................33
2.5.1 Addressing Modes ...............................................................................................33
2.5.2 Effective Address Calculation .............................................................................36
2.6 Basic Bus Cycle ................................................................................................................38
2.6.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM).........................................................38
2.6.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules ...............................................................................39
2.7 CPU States ........................................................................................................................40
2.8 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................41
2.8.1 Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas ................................................................41
2.8.2 EEPMOV Instruction...........................................................................................41
2.8.3 Bit Manipulation Instruction................................................................................41
Section 3 Exception Handling .......................................................................... 47
3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address ............................................................................47
3.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................49
3.2.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1) ...........................................................49
3.2.2 Interrupt Edge Select Register 2 (IEGR2) ...........................................................50
3.2.3 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1) ...................................................................51
3.2.4 Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1)..........................................................................52
3.2.5 Wakeup Interrupt Flag Register (IWPR) .............................................................53
3.3 Reset Exception Handling.................................................................................................54
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page vii of xxvi
3.4 Interrupt Exception Handling............................................................................................54
3.4.1 External Interrupts ...............................................................................................54
3.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................55
3.4.3 Interrupt Handling Sequence ...............................................................................56
3.4.4 Interrupt Response Time......................................................................................57
3.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................59
3.5.1 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................59
3.5.2 Notes on Stack Area Use .....................................................................................59
3.5.3 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers.............................................................59
Section 4 Address Break....................................................................................61
4.1 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................61
4.1.1 Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR).......................................................62
4.1.2 Address Break Status Register (ABRKSR) .........................................................63
4.1.3 Break Address Registers (BARH, BARL)...........................................................63
4.1.4 Break Data Registers (BDRH, BDRL) ................................................................63
4.2 Operation ..........................................................................................................................64
4.3 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................65
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators .....................................................................67
5.1 System Clock Generator ...................................................................................................68
5.1.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator .............................................................................68
5.1.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator ...........................................................................69
5.1.3 External Clock Input Method...............................................................................69
5.2 Subclock Generator...........................................................................................................70
5.2.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator..........................................................70
5.2.2 Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock..........................................................71
5.3 Prescalers ..........................................................................................................................71
5.3.1 Prescaler S............................................................................................................71
5.3.2 Prescaler W..........................................................................................................71
5.4 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................71
5.4.1 Note on Resonators..............................................................................................71
5.4.2 Notes on Board Design........................................................................................73
Section 6 Power-Down Modes..........................................................................75
6.1 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................76
6.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1).................................................................76
6.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2).................................................................79
6.1.3 Module Standby Control Register 1 (MSTCR1) .................................................80
6.2 Mode Transitions and States of LSI..................................................................................81
6.2.1 Sleep Mode ..........................................................................................................83
6.2.2 Standby Mode......................................................................................................84
6.2.3 Subsleep Mode.....................................................................................................84
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page viii of xxvi
6.2.4 Subactive Mode ...................................................................................................85
6.3 Operating Frequency in Active Mode...............................................................................85
6.4 Direct Transition ...............................................................................................................85
6.4.1 Direct Transition from Active Mode to Subactive Mode.....................................85
6.4.2 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active Mode.....................................86
6.5 Module Standby Function.................................................................................................86
6.6 Usage Note........................................................................................................................86
Section 7 ROM ................................................................................................. 87
7.1 Block Configuration..........................................................................................................87
7.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................88
7.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1).....................................................89
7.2.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2).....................................................90
7.2.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)............................................................................90
7.2.4 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR) ............................................91
7.2.5 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)..............................................................91
7.3 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................91
7.3.1 Boot Mode ...........................................................................................................92
7.3.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode.....................................................95
7.4 Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ...............................................................................96
7.4.1 Program/Program-Verify .....................................................................................96
7.4.2 Erase/Erase-Verify...............................................................................................98
7.4.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory..........................99
7.5 Program/Erase Protection .................................................................................................101
7.5.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................101
7.5.2 Software Protection..............................................................................................101
7.5.3 Error Protection....................................................................................................101
7.6 Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................102
7.7 Power-Down States for Flash Memory.............................................................................102
Section 8 RAM ................................................................................................. 103
Section 9 I/O Ports............................................................................................ 105
9.1 Port 1.................................................................................................................................105
9.1.1 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) .............................................................................106
9.1.2 Port Control Register 1 (PCR1) ...........................................................................107
9.1.3 Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)................................................................................107
9.1.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)...........................................................108
9.1.5 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................108
9.2 Port 2.................................................................................................................................110
9.2.1 Port Control Register 2 (PCR2) ...........................................................................111
9.2.2 Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)................................................................................111
9.2.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................112
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page ix of xxvi
9.3 Port 5.................................................................................................................................113
9.3.1 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5) .............................................................................114
9.3.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5) ...........................................................................115
9.3.3 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)................................................................................115
9.3.4 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)...........................................................116
9.3.5 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................116
9.4 Port 7.................................................................................................................................118
9.4.1 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7) ...........................................................................119
9.4.2 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)................................................................................119
9.4.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................120
9.5 Port 8.................................................................................................................................121
9.5.1 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8) ...........................................................................121
9.5.2 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)................................................................................122
9.5.3 Pin Functions .......................................................................................................122
9.6 Port B................................................................................................................................124
9.6.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB) ..............................................................................125
Section 10 Timer A............................................................................................127
10.1 Features.............................................................................................................................127
10.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................128
10.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................128
10.3.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA)...........................................................................129
10.3.2 Timer Counter A (TCA) ......................................................................................130
10.4 Operation ..........................................................................................................................130
10.4.1 Interval Timer Operation .....................................................................................130
10.4.2 Clock Time Base Operation.................................................................................131
10.4.3 Clock Output........................................................................................................131
10.5 Usage Note........................................................................................................................131
Section 11 Timer V............................................................................................133
11.1 Features.............................................................................................................................133
11.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................134
11.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................135
11.3.1 Timer Counter V (TCNTV).................................................................................135
11.3.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA, TCORB)........................................135
11.3.3 Timer Control Register V0 (TCRV0) ..................................................................136
11.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register V (TCSRV) .........................................................138
11.3.5 Timer Control Register V1 (TCRV1) ..................................................................139
11.4 Operation ..........................................................................................................................140
11.4.1 Timer V Operation...............................................................................................140
11.5 Timer V Application Examples ........................................................................................143
11.5.1 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Duty Cycle..............................................................143
11.5.2 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Pulse Width and Delay from TRGV Input .............144
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page x of xxvi
11.6 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................145
Section 12 Timer W.......................................................................................... 147
12.1 Features.............................................................................................................................147
12.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................149
12.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................150
12.3.1 Timer Mode Register W (TMRW) ......................................................................151
12.3.2 Timer Control Register W (TCRW) ....................................................................151
12.3.3 Timer Interrupt Enable Register W (TIERW)......................................................153
12.3.4 Timer Status Register W (TSRW) .......................................................................153
12.3.5 Timer I/O Control Register 0 (TIOR0) ................................................................155
12.3.6 Timer I/O Control Register 1 (TIOR1) ................................................................156
12.3.7 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................157
12.3.8 General Registers A to D (GRA to GRD)............................................................157
12.4 Operation...........................................................................................................................158
12.4.1 Normal Operation ................................................................................................158
12.4.2 PWM Operation...................................................................................................162
12.5 Operation Timing..............................................................................................................166
12.5.1 TCNT Count Timing............................................................................................166
12.5.2 Output Compare Output Timing..........................................................................166
12.5.3 Input Capture Timing...........................................................................................167
12.5.4 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match .................................................168
12.5.5 Buffer Operation Timing .....................................................................................168
12.5.6 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match.................................169
12.5.7 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Setting at Input Capture ............................................170
12.5.8 Timing of Status Flag Clearing............................................................................170
12.6 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................171
Section 13 Watchdog Timer ............................................................................. 173
13.1 Features.............................................................................................................................173
13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................173
13.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD (TCSRWD)..................................................174
13.2.2 Timer Counter WD (TCWD)...............................................................................175
13.2.3 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD) ...................................................................175
13.3 Operation...........................................................................................................................176
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface3 (SCI3) ....................................... 177
14.1 Features.............................................................................................................................177
14.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................179
14.3 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................179
14.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR)...............................................................................180
14.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)..............................................................................180
14.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................180
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xi of xxvi
14.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................180
14.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR)................................................................................181
14.3.6 Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3).........................................................................182
14.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................184
14.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ......................................................................................186
14.4 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................................191
14.4.1 Clock....................................................................................................................191
14.4.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................192
14.4.3 Data Transmission ...............................................................................................193
14.4.4 Serial Data Reception ..........................................................................................195
14.5 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode ........................................................................199
14.5.1 Clock....................................................................................................................199
14.5.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................199
14.5.3 Serial Data Transmission .....................................................................................200
14.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)..........................................202
14.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception.......................................204
14.6 Multiprocessor Communication Function.........................................................................206
14.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission............................................................208
14.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................209
14.7 Interrupts...........................................................................................................................213
14.8 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................214
14.8.1 Break Detection and Processing ..........................................................................214
14.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending ............................................................................214
14.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)......................................................................214
14.8.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in
Asynchronous Mode ............................................................................................215
Section 15 I2C Bus Interface (IIC).....................................................................217
15.1 Features.............................................................................................................................217
15.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................219
15.3 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................219
15.3.1 I2C bus data register(ICDR) .................................................................................220
15.3.2 Slave address register(SAR) ................................................................................222
15.3.3 Second slave address register(SARX) .................................................................222
15.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register(ICMR)............................................................................223
15.3.5 I2C Bus Control Register(ICCR)..........................................................................225
15.3.6 I2C Bus Status Register(ICSR).............................................................................228
15.3.7 Timer Serial Control Register(TSCR) .................................................................230
15.4 Operation ..........................................................................................................................231
15.4.1 I2C Bus Data Format ............................................................................................231
15.4.2 Master Transmit Operation..................................................................................233
15.4.3 Master Receive Operation....................................................................................234
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xii of xxvi
15.4.4 Slave Receive Operation......................................................................................237
15.4.5 Slave Transmit Operation ....................................................................................239
15.4.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Format .......................................................................241
15.4.7 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................241
15.4.8 Noise Canceler.....................................................................................................243
15.4.9 Sample Flowcharts...............................................................................................243
15.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................248
Section 16 A/D Converter................................................................................. 253
16.1 Features.............................................................................................................................253
16.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................255
16.3 Register Description..........................................................................................................256
16.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)..............................................256
16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)................................................................257
16.3.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR).............................................................................258
16.4 Operation...........................................................................................................................259
16.4.1 Single Mode.........................................................................................................259
16.4.2 Scan Mode ...........................................................................................................259
16.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time .........................................................260
16.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................261
16.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions .............................................................................262
16.6 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................263
16.6.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .................................................................263
16.6.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ........................................................................263
Section 17 EEPROM ........................................................................................ 265
17.1 Features.............................................................................................................................265
17.2 Input/Output Pins..............................................................................................................267
17.3 Register Description..........................................................................................................267
17.3.1 EEPROM Key Register (EKR)............................................................................267
17.4 Operation...........................................................................................................................268
17.4.1 EEPROM Interface ..............................................................................................268
17.4.2 Bus Format and Timing .......................................................................................268
17.4.3 Start Condition.....................................................................................................268
17.4.4 Stop Condition .....................................................................................................268
17.4.5 Acknowledge .......................................................................................................269
17.4.6 Slave Addressing .................................................................................................269
17.4.7 Write Operations..................................................................................................270
17.4.8 Acknowledge Polling...........................................................................................271
17.4.9 Read Operation ....................................................................................................272
17.5 Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................274
17.5.1 Data Protection at VCC On/Off..............................................................................274
17.5.2 Write/Erase Endurance ........................................................................................274
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xiii of xxvi
17.5.3 Noise Suppression Time ......................................................................................274
Section 18 Power Supply Circuit ......................................................................275
18.1 When Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit...................................................275
18.2 When Not Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit............................................276
Section 19 List of Registers...............................................................................277
19.1 Register Addresses (Address Order).................................................................................278
19.2 Register Bits......................................................................................................................281
19.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode ..........................................................................284
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics.................................................................287
20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .............................................................................................287
20.2 Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTAT™ Version, F-ZTAT™ Version with EEPROM)......287
20.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges.....................................................287
20.2.2 DC Characteristics ...............................................................................................289
20.2.3 AC Characteristics ...............................................................................................295
20.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics.............................................................................299
20.2.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics..........................................................................300
20.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................301
20.2.7 EEPROM Characteristics (Preliminary) ..............................................................303
20.3 Electrical Characteristics (Mask ROM Version)...............................................................304
20.3.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges.....................................................304
20.3.2 DC Characteristics ...............................................................................................305
20.3.3 AC Characteristics ...............................................................................................311
20.3.4 A/D Converter Characteristics.............................................................................315
20.3.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics..........................................................................316
20.4 Operation Timing..............................................................................................................316
20.5 Output Load Condition .....................................................................................................319
Appendix A Instruction Set...............................................................................321
A.1 Instruction List..................................................................................................................321
A.2 Operation Code Map.........................................................................................................336
A.3 Number of Execution States .............................................................................................339
A.4 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes ......................................................350
Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams...............................................................351
B.1 I/O Port Block...................................................................................................................351
B.2 Port States in Each Operating State ..................................................................................367
Appendix C Product Code Lineup.....................................................................368
Appendix D Package Dimensions.....................................................................370
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xiv of xxvi
Appendix E Laminated-Structure Cross Section .............................................. 375
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition.................................................... 377
Index
......................................................................................................... 397
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xv of xxvi
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xvi of xxvi
Figures
Section 1 Overview
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions .............2
Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8/3664N of F-ZTATTM Version with EEPROM..............3
Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions
(FP-64E, FP-64A)..........................................................................................................4
Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions
(FP-48F, FP-48B) ..........................................................................................................5
Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions (DS-42S) .......6
Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664N of F-ZTATTM Version with EEPROM (FP-64E) ........7
Section 2 CPU
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (1) .........................................................................................................12
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (2) .........................................................................................................13
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (3) .........................................................................................................14
Figure 2.2 CPU Registers .............................................................................................................15
Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers .........................................................................................16
Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area...................................................17
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1)..............................................................................19
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2)..............................................................................20
Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats.................................................................................................21
Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats......................................................................................................32
Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ...........................................35
Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle..................................................................................38
Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access).....................................39
Figure 2.11 CPU Operation States................................................................................................40
Figure 2.12 State Transitions ........................................................................................................41
Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to
Same Address.............................................................................................................42
Section 3 Exception Handling
Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence............................................................................................................55
Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................57
Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence.......................................................................................................58
Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure ..............59
Section 4 Address Break
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Address Break................................................................................61
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1).........................................................64
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2).........................................................65
Figure 4.3 Operation when Condition is not Satisfied in Branch Instruction ...............................65
Figure 4.4 Operation when Another Interrupt is Accepted at
Address Break Setting Instruction ...............................................................................66
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xvii of xxvi
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators..................................................................67
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of System Clock Generator................................................................68
Figure 5.3 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator....................................................................68
Figure 5.4 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator......................................................................68
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator..................................................................69
Figure 5.6 Example of External Clock Input ................................................................................69
Figure 5.7 Block Diagram of Subclock Generator .......................................................................70
Figure 5.8 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator................................................70
Figure 5.9 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator..................................................70
Figure 5.10 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock ................................................................71
Figure 5.11 Example of Incorrect Board Design ...........................................................................73
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram ...........................................................................................81
Section 7 ROM
Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration............................................................................88
Figure 7.2 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode............................95
Figure 7.3 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart............................................................................97
Figure 7.4 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ...................................................................................100
Section 9 I/O Ports
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration............................................................................................105
Figure 9.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration............................................................................................110
Figure 9.3 Port 5 Pin Configuration............................................................................................113
Figure 9.4 Port 7 Pin Configuration............................................................................................118
Figure 9.5 Port 8 Pin Configuration............................................................................................121
Figure 9.6 Port B Pin Configuration...........................................................................................124
Section 10 Timer A
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of Timer A......................................................................................128
Section 11 Timer V
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer V......................................................................................134
Figure 11.2 Increment Timing with Internal Clock ....................................................................140
Figure 11.3 Increment Timing with External Clock...................................................................141
Figure 11.4 OVF Set Timing......................................................................................................141
Figure 11.5 CMFA and CMFB Set Timing................................................................................141
Figure 11.6 TMOV Output Timing ............................................................................................142
Figure 11.7 Clear Timing by Compare Match............................................................................142
Figure 11.8 Clear Timing by TMRIV Input ...............................................................................142
Figure 11.9 Pulse Output Example.............................................................................................143
Figure 11.10 Example of Pulse Output Synchronized to TRGV Input.......................................144
Figure 11.11 Contention between TCNTV Write and Clear ......................................................145
Figure 11.12 Contention between TCORA Write and Compare Match.....................................146
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xviii of xxvi
Figure 11.13 Internal Clock Switching and TCNTV Operation.................................................146
Section 12 Timer W
Figure 12.1 Timer W Block Diagram.........................................................................................149
Figure 12.2 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................158
Figure 12.3 Periodic Counter Operation.....................................................................................159
Figure 12.4 0 and 1 Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)........................................................159
Figure 12.5 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1) ........................................................160
Figure 12.6 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1) ........................................................160
Figure 12.7 Input Capture Operating Example...........................................................................161
Figure 12.8 Buffer Operation Example (Input Capture).............................................................161
Figure 12.9 PWM Mode Example (1) ........................................................................................162
Figure 12.10 PWM Mode Example (2) ......................................................................................163
Figure 12.11 Buffer Operation Example (Output Compare) ......................................................163
Figure 12.12 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0: initial output values are set to 0)................................164
Figure 12.13 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 1: initial output values are set to 1)................................165
Figure 12.14 Count Timing for Internal Clock Source...............................................................166
Figure 12.15 Count Timing for External Clock Source..............................................................166
Figure 12.16 Output Compare Output Timing............................................................................167
Figure 12.17 Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................167
Figure 12.18 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match...................................................168
Figure 12.19 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)..........................................................168
Figure 12.20 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) .............................................................169
Figure 12.21 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match ..................................169
Figure 12.22 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Input Capture......................................170
Figure 12.23 Timing of Status Flag Clearing by CPU................................................................170
Figure 12.24 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear .........................................................171
Figure 12.25 Internal Clock Switching and TCNT Operation....................................................172
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer ........................................................................173
Figure 13.2 Watchdog Timer Operation Example......................................................................176
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface3 (SCI3)
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI3...........................................................................................178
Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication ......................................................191
Figure 14.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)...............191
Figure 14.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart......................................................................192
Figure 14.5 Example SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)............................................................................193
Figure 14.6 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) ..............................194
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xix of xxvi
Figure 14.7 Example SCI3 Operation in Reception in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)............................................................................195
Figure 14.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous mode)(1).......................197
Figure 14.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2) ..........................................................198
Figure 14.9 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication ..........................................199
Figure 14.10 Example of SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode......200
Figure 14.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode) ................201
Figure 14.12 Example of SCI3 Reception Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode...............202
Figure 14.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)......................203
Figure 14.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode) ...............................................................................205
Figure 14.15 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)...........................................207
Figure 14.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart ........................................208
Figure 14.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)........................................210
Figure 14.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)........................................211
Figure 14.18 Example of SCI3 Operation in Reception Using Multiprocessor Format
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit) ..............................212
Figure 14.19 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ......................................215
Section 15 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface........................................................................218
Figure 15.2 I2C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This LSI as Master) ..............................219
Figure 15.3 I2C Bus Data Formats (I2C Bus Formats)................................................................232
Figure 15.4 I2C Bus Timing........................................................................................................232
Figure 15.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing Example (MLS = WAIT = 0)...............234
Figure 15.6 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing Example (1)
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ..............................................................................236
Figure 15.6 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing Example (2)
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) ...............................................................................236
Figure 15.7 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) (MLS = ACKB = 0)........238
Figure 15.8 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) (MLS = ACKB = 0)........239
Figure 15.9 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = 0) ...........................240
Figure 15.10 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format)....................................................................241
Figure 15.11 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control..................................................................242
Figure 15.12 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler.........................................................................243
Figure 15.13 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode.......................................................244
Figure 15.14 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode ........................................................245
Figure 15.15 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode ..........................................................246
Figure 15.16 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode.........................................................247
Figure 15.17 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance
for Retransmission .................................................................................................252
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xx of xxvi
Section 16 A/D Converter
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter............................................................................254
Figure 16.2 A/D Conversion Timing..........................................................................................260
Figure 16.3 External Trigger Input Timing.................................................................................261
Figure 16.4 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1)..............................................................262
Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2)..............................................................263
Figure 16.6 Analog Input Circuit Example.................................................................................264
Section 17 EEPROM
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of EEPROM ...................................................................................266
Figure 17.2 EEPROM Bus Format and Bus Timing...................................................................268
Figure 17.3 Byte Write Operation...............................................................................................270
Figure 17.4 Page Write Operation ..............................................................................................271
Figure 17.5 Current Address Read Operation.............................................................................272
Figure 17.6 Random Address Read Operation ...........................................................................273
Figure 17.7 Sequential Read Operation (when current address read is used).............................274
Section 18 Power Supply Circuit
Figure 18.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used ....................275
Figure 18.2 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Not Used .............276
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Figure 20.1 System Clock Input Timing.....................................................................................316
Figure 20.2 RES Low Width Timing..........................................................................................317
Figure 20.3 Input Timing............................................................................................................317
Figure 20.4 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing ...................................................................317
Figure 20.5 SCK3 Input Clock Timing.......................................................................................318
Figure 20.6 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clocked Synchronous Mode ....................................318
Figure 20.7 EEPROM Bus Timing.............................................................................................319
Figure 20.8 Output Load Circuit.................................................................................................319
Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams
Figure B.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (P17) .....................................................................................351
Figure B.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (P16 to P14) ..........................................................................352
Figure B.3 Port 1 Block Diagram (P12, P11) .............................................................................353
Figure B.4 Port 1 Block Diagram (P10) .....................................................................................354
Figure B.5 Port 2 Block Diagram (P22) .....................................................................................355
Figure B.6 Port 2 Block Diagram (P21) .....................................................................................356
Figure B.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (P20) .....................................................................................357
Figure B.8 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57, P56)* ...........................................................................358
Figure B.9 Port 5 Block Diagram (P55) .....................................................................................359
Figure B.10 Port 5 Block Diagram (P54 to P50) ........................................................................360
Figure B.11 Port 7 Block Diagram (P76) ...................................................................................361
Figure B.12 Port 7 Block Diagram (P75) ...................................................................................362
Figure B.13 Port 7 Block Diagram (P74) ...................................................................................363
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xxi of xxvi
Figure B.14 Port 8 Block Diagram (P87 to P85)........................................................................364
Figure B.15 Port 8 Block Diagram (P84 to P81)........................................................................365
Figure B.16 Port 8 Block Diagram (P80) ...................................................................................366
Figure B.17 Port B Block Diagram (PB7 to PB0)......................................................................367
Appendix D Package Dimensions
Figure D.1 FP-64E Package Dimensions....................................................................................370
Figure D.2 FP-64A Package Dimensions ...................................................................................371
Figure D.3 FP-48F Package Dimensions....................................................................................372
Figure D.4 FP-48B Package Dimensions ...................................................................................373
Figure D.5 DP-42S Package Dimensions ...................................................................................374
Appendix E Laminated-Structure Cross Section
Figure E.1 Laminated-Structure Cross Section of H8/3664N ....................................................375
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xxii of xxvi
Tables
Section 1 Overview
Table 1.1 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................8
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.1 Operation Notation......................................................................................................22
Table 2.2 Data Transfer Instructions...........................................................................................23
Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) .......................................................................24
Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) .......................................................................25
Table 2.4 Logic Operations Instructions.....................................................................................26
Table 2.5 Shift Instructions.........................................................................................................26
Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)................................................................................27
Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)................................................................................28
Table 2.7 Branch Instructions .....................................................................................................29
Table 2.8 System Control Instructions........................................................................................30
Table 2.9 Block Data Transfer Instructions ................................................................................31
Table 2.10
Table 2.11
Table 2.12
Table 2.12
Addressing Modes ..................................................................................................33
Absolute Address Access Ranges ...........................................................................34
Effective Address Calculation (1)...........................................................................36
Effective Address Calculation (2)............................................................................37
Section 3 Exception Handling
Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address ......................................................................48
Table 3.2 Interrupt Wait States ...................................................................................................57
Section 4 Address Break
Table 4.1 Access and Data Bus Used..........................................................................................63
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Table 5.1 Crystal Resonator Parameters .....................................................................................69
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.1 Operating Frequency and Waiting Time.....................................................................78
Table 6.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling ............82
Table 6.3 Internal State in Each Operating Mode.......................................................................83
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.1 Setting Programming Modes ......................................................................................92
Table 7.2 Boot Mode Operation .................................................................................................94
Table 7.3 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate
is Possible ...................................................................................................................95
Table 7.4 Reprogram Data Computation Table ..........................................................................98
Table 7.5 Additional-Program Data Computation Table............................................................98
Table 7.6 Programming Time .....................................................................................................98
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xxiii of xxvi
Table 7.7 Flash Memory Operating States................................................................................102
Section 10 Timer A
Table 10.1
Pin Configuration..................................................................................................128
Section 11 Timer V
Table 11.1 Pin Configuration......................................................................................................134
Table 11.2 Clock Signals to Input to TCNTV and Counting Conditions ...................................137
Section 12 Timer W
Table 12.1
Table 12.2
Timer W Functions ...............................................................................................148
Pin Configuration..................................................................................................149
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface3 (SCI3)
Table 14.1
Table 14.2
Table 14.2
Table 14.2
Table 14.3
Table 14.4
Table 14.5
Table 14.6
Pin Configuration..................................................................................................179
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ......187
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ......188
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3) ......189
Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) ..........................189
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode).....................190
SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling ......................................................196
SCI3 Interrupt Requests........................................................................................213
Section 15 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Table 15.1
Table 15.2
Table 15.3
Table 15.4
Table 15.5
Table 15.6
Table 15.7
I2C Bus Interface Pins...........................................................................................219
Communication Format ........................................................................................223
I2C Transfer Rate ..................................................................................................225
Flags and Transfer States......................................................................................231
I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output)...............................................................248
Permissible SCL Rise Time (tsr) Values ...............................................................249
I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf)............................................250
Section 16 A/D Converter
Table 16.1
Table 16.2
Table 16.3
Pin Configuration..................................................................................................255
Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers ..............................256
A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)...................................................................261
Section 17 EEPROM
Table 17.1
Table 17.2
Pin Configuration..................................................................................................267
Slave Addresses ....................................................................................................270
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
Table 20.1
Table 20.2
Table 20.2
Table 20.2
Table 20.3
Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................287
DC Characteristics (1)...........................................................................................289
DC Characteristics (2)...........................................................................................293
DC Characteristics (3)...........................................................................................294
AC Characteristics ................................................................................................295
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xxiv of xxvi
Table 20.4
Table 20.5
Table 20.6
Table 20.7
Table 20.8
Table 20.9
I2C Bus Interface Timing ......................................................................................297
Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing..............................................................................298
A/D Converter Characteristics..............................................................................299
Watchdog Timer Characteristics...........................................................................300
Flash Memory Characteristics...............................................................................301
EEPROM Characteristics.......................................................................................303
Table 20.10 DC Characteristics (1)...........................................................................................305
Table 20.10 DC Characteristics (2)...........................................................................................310
Table 20.11 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................311
Table 20.12 I2C Bus Interface Timing......................................................................................313
Table 20.13 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing..............................................................................314
Table 20.14 A/D Converter Characteristics..............................................................................315
Table 20.15 Watchdog Timer Characteristics...........................................................................316
Appendix A Instruction Set
Table A.1
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.3
Table A.4
Table A.5
Instruction Set .......................................................................................................323
Operation Code Map (1) .......................................................................................336
Operation Code Map (2) .......................................................................................337
Operation Code Map (3) .......................................................................................338
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction..................................................................340
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction..................................................................341
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes ..........................................350
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, Page xxv of xxvi
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page xxvi of xxvi
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Features
•
High-speed H8/300H central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture
Upward-compatible with H8/300 CPU on an object level
Sixteen 16-bit general registers
62 basic instructions
•
Various peripheral functions
Timer A (can be used as a time base for a clock)
Timer V (8-bit timer)
Timer W (16-bit timer)
Watchdog timer
SCI3 (Asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication interface)
I2C Bus Interface (conforms to the I2C bus interface format that is advocated by Philips
Electronics)
10-bit A/D converter
•
On-chip memory
Product Classification
Flash memory version
(F-ZTATTM version)
Model
EEPROM
ROM
RAM
H8/3664N
H8/3664F
H8/3664
H8/3663
H8/3662
H8/3661
H8/3660
HD64N3664
HD64F3664
HD6433664
HD6433663
HD6433662
HD6433661
HD6433660
512 bytes
32 kbytes 2,048 bytes
32 kbytes 2,048 bytes
32 kbytes 1,024 bytes
24 kbytes 1,024 bytes
16 kbytes 512 bytes
12 kbytes 512 bytes
Mask ROM version
8 kbytes
512 bytes
•
General I/O ports
I/O pins: 29 I/O pins (H8/3664N has 27 I/O pins), including 8 large current ports (IOL = 20
mA, @VOL = 1.5 V)
Input-only pins: 8 input pins (also used for analog input)
•
•
EEPROM interface (only for H8/3664N)
I2C Bus Interface (conforms to the I2C bus interface format that is advocated by Philips
Electronics)
Supports various power-down modes
Note: F-ZTATTM is a trademark of Hitachi, Ltd.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 1 of 400
•
Compact package
Package
LQFP-64
QFP-64
Code
Body Size
Pin Pitch
0.5 mm
FP-64E
FP-64A
FP-48F
FP-48B
DP-42S
10.0 × 10.0 mm
14.0 × 14.0 mm
10.0 × 10.0 mm
7.0 × 7.0 mm
14.0 × 37.3 mm
0.8 mm
LQFP-48
LQFP-48
SDIP-42
0.65 mm
0.5 mm
1.78 mm
Only LQFP-64 (FP-64E) for H8/3664N package
1.2
Internal Block Diagram
P80/FTCI
P81/FTIOA
P82/FTIOB
P83/FTIOC
P84/FTIOD
P85
System
Subclock
CPU
H8/300H
clock
generator
generator
P86
Data bus (lower)
P10/TMOW
P87
P11
P12
P14/
P15/
P16/
P74/TMRIV
P75/TMCIV
P76/TMOV
RAM
SCI3
ROM
P17/
/TRGV
Timer W
Timer A
Timer V
P50/
P51/
P52/
P53/
P54/
P20/SCK3
P21/RXD
P22/TXD
Watchdog
timer
P55/
/
P56/SDA
P57/SCL
A/D
converter
PB0/AN0
PB1/AN1
PB2/AN2
PB3/AN3
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
I2C bus
interface
Data bus (upper)
Address bus
AVCC
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 2 of 400
P80/FTCI
P81/FTIOA
P82/FTIOB
P83/FTIOC
P84/FTIOD
P85
System
clock
generator
CPU
H8/300H
Subclock
generator
P86
Data bus (lower)
P10/TMOW
P11
P87
P12
P14/
P15/
P74/TMRIV
P75/TMCIV
P76/TMOV
RAM
ROM
P16/
P17/
/TRGV
Timer W
SCI3
P50/
P51/
P52/
P53/
P54/
P20/SCK3
P21/RXD
P22/TXD
Watchdog
timer
Timer A
Timer V
P55/
/
A/D
converter
PB0/AN0
PB1/AN1
PB2/AN2
PB3/AN3
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
SDA
SCL
I2C bus
interface
Data bus (upper)
Address bus
AVCC
EEPROM
Note : The H8/3664N is a laminated-structure product in which an EEPROM chip is mounted on the
H8/3664F-ZTATTM version.
Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of H8/3664N of F-ZTATTM Version with EEPROM
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 3 of 400
1.3
Pin Arrangement
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
NC
NC
NC
NC
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
P57/SCL
P56/SDA
P12
P14/
P15/
P16/
P17/
/TRGV
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
NC
H8/3664
Top view
P11
P10/TMOW
P55/
P54/
P53/
P52/
NC
/
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Note: Do not connect NC pins (* these pins are not connected to the internal circuitry).
Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions
(FP-64E, FP-64A)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 4 of 400
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
P14/
P15/
P16/
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
P57/SCL
P56/SDA
P12
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
P17/
/TRGV
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
H8/3664
P11
Top View
P10/TMOW
P55/
P54/
P53/
P52/
/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions
(FP-48F, FP-48B)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 5 of 400
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
AVCC
P17/
/TRGV
1
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
P16/
2
P15/
3
P14/
4
P22/TXD
P21/RXD
5
X2
6
X1
P20/SCK3
P87
7
VCL
8
P86
9
H8/3664
Top view
TEST
VSS
P85
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
P84/FTIOD
P83/FTIOC
P82/FTIOB
P81/FTIOA
P80/FTCI
OSC2
OSC1
VCC
P50/
P51/
P52/
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
P57/SCL
P53/
P54/
P55/
/
P10/TMOW
P56/SDA
Note: DP-42S has no P11, P12, PB4/AN4, PB5/AN5, PB6/AN6, and PB7/AN7 pins.
Figure 1.5 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664 of F-ZTATTM and Mask-ROM Versions
(DS-42S)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 6 of 400
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
NC
NC
NC
NC
P76/TMOV
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
SCL*
P14/
P15/
P16/
P17/
/TRGV
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
NC
SDA*
P12
H8/3664N
Top View
P11
P10/TMOW
P55/
P54/
P53/
P52/
NC
/
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Note: Do not connect NC pins.
* These pins are only available for the I2C bus interface in the F-ZATTM version with EEPROM.
Figure 1.6 Pin Arrangement of H8/3664N of F-ZTATTM Version with EEPROM
(FP-64E)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 7 of 400
1.4
Pin Functions
Table 1.1 Pin Functions
Pin No.
H8/3664
H8/3664N
Type
Symbol FP-64E, FP-48F, DP-42S FP-64E
FP-64A FP-48B
I/O
Functions
Power source VCC
pins
12
10
14
11
5
12
Input
Input
Input
Power supply pin. Connect this pin to the
system power supply.
VSS
9
7
9
Ground pin. Connect all these pins to the
system power supply (0V).
AVCC
3
1
3
Analog power supply pin for the A/D
converter. When the A/D converter is not
used, connect this pin to the system
power supply.
VCL
6
4
8
6
Input
Internal step-down power supply pin.
Connect a
capacitor of around 0.1 µF between this
pin and
the Vss pin for stabilization.
Clock pins
OSC1
OSC2
11
10
9
8
13
12
11
10
Input
These pins connect to a crystal or ceramic
resonator for system clocks, or can be
used to input an external clock.
Output
These pins can be used to input an
external clock.
See section 5, Clock Pulse Generators,
for a typical connection.
X1
X2
5
3
7
5
Input
For connection to a 32.768 kHz crystal
resonator for subclocks.
See section 5, Clock Pulse Generators,
for a typical connection.
4
7
2
5
6
9
4
7
Output
Input
System control RES
Reset pin. When this driven low, the chip
is reset.
TEST
8
6
10
27
8
Input
Input
Test pin. Connect this pin to Vss.
Interrupt pins NMI
35
25
35
Non-maskable interrupt request input pin.
IRQ0 to
IRQ3
51 to 54 37 to 40 39 to 42 51 to 54 Input
External interrupt request input pins. Can
select the rising or falling edge.
WKP0 to 13, 14,
WKP5 19 to 22
11 to 16 15 to 20 13, 14,
19 to 22
Input
External interrupt request input pins. Can
select the rising or falling edge.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 8 of 400
Pin No.
H8/3664
H8/3664N
Type
Symbol
FP-64E, FP-48F, DP-42S FP-64E
FP-64A FP-48B
I/O
Functions
Timer A
Timer V
TMOW
TMOV
23
30
17
24
21
26
23
30
Output
Output
This is an output pin for divided clocks.
This is an output pin for waveforms
generated by the output compare function.
TMCIV
TMRIV
TRGV
FTCI
29
28
54
36
23
22
40
26
25
24
42
28
29
28
54
36
Input
Input
Input
Input
External event input pin.
Counter reset input pin.
Counter start trigger input pin.
External event input pin.
Timer W
FTIOA to 37 to 40 27 to 30 29 to 32 37 to 40 I/O
FTIOD
Output compare output/ input capture
input/ PWM output pin
I2C bus
SDA
SCL
26*2
27*2
46
20
21
36
22
23
38
26*1
27*1
46
I/O
IIC data I/O pin. Can directly drive a bus
by NMOS open-drain output. When using
this pin, external pull-up resistance is
required.
inerface
I/O
IIC clock I/O pin. Can directly drive a bus
(EEPROM: by NMOS open-drain output. When using
input)
this pin, external pull-up resistance is
required.
Serial commu- TXD
nication
Output
Transmit data output pin
interface (SCI)
RXD
45
44
35
34
37
36
45
44
Input
I/O
Receive data input pin
Clock I/O pin
SCK3
A/D converter AN7 to
AN0
55 to 62 41 to 48 1 to 4*2
55 to 62 Input
Analog input pin
ADTRG
22
16
20
22
Input
A/D converter trigger input pin.
8-bit input port.
I/O ports
PB7 to
PB0
55 to 62 41 to 48 1 to 4*2
55 to 62 Input
P17 to
P14,
51 to 54 37 to 40 39 to 42, 51 to 54, I/O
21*2
23 to 25
7-bit I/O port.
23 to 25 17 to 19
P12 to
P10
P22 to
P20
44 to 46 34 to 36 36 to 38 44 to 46 I/O
3-bit I/O port.
P57 to
13,14,
21, 20,
15 to 20, 13, 14,
19 to 22
I/O
8-bit I/O port
P50 (P55
to P50 for
H8/3664N)
16 to 11 22, 23
19 to 22
26, 27
(6-bit I/O port for H8/3664N)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 9 of 400
Pin No.
H8/3664
H8/3664N
Type
Symbol FP-64E, FP-48F, DP-42S FP-64E
FP-64A FP-48B
I/O
Functions
I/O ports
P76 to
P74
28 to 30 22 to 24 24 to 26 28 to 30 I/O
3-bit I/O port
8-bit I/O port.
P87 to
P80
36 to 43 26 to 33 28 to 35 36 to 43 I/O
Note : 1. These pins are only available for the I2C bus interface in the F-ZATTM version with EEPROM. Since
the I2C bus is disabled after canceling a reset, the ICE bit in ICCR must be set to 1 by using the
program.
2. The DP-42S does not have the P11, P12, PB4/AN4, PB5/AN5, PB6/AN6, and PB7/AN7 pins.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 10 of 400
Section 2 CPU
This LSI has an H8/300H CPU with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with
the H8/300CPU, and supports only normal mode, which has a 64-kbyte address space.
•
Upward-compatible with H8/300 CPUs
Can execute H8/300 CPUs object programs
Additional eight 16-bit extended registers
32-bit transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions are added
Signed multiply and divide instructions are added.
General-register architecture
•
•
Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers
Sixty-two basic instructions
8/16/32-bit data transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions
Multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
Eight addressing modes
•
Register direct [Rn]
Register indirect [@ERn]
Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)]
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24]
Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
•
•
64-kbyte address space
High-speed operation
All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract
8 × 8-bit register-register multiply : 14 states
16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide : 14 states
: 2 state
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply : 22 states
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide : 22 states
Power-down state
•
Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 11 of 400
CPU30H2A_000020020300
2.1
Address Space and Memory Map
The address space of this LSI is 64 kbytes, which includes the program area and the data area.
Figures 2.1 show the memory map.
HD6433660
HD64F3664
HD6433661
(Mask ROM version)
(Flash memory version)
(Mask ROM version)
H'0000
H'0033
H'0034
H'0000
H'0033
H'0034
H'0000
H'0033
H'0034
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
On-chip ROM
(8 kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(12 kbytes)
H'1FFF
H'2FFF
On-chip ROM
(32 kbytes)
H'7FFF
Not used
Not used
Not used
H'F780
(1-kbyte work area
for flash memory
programming)
H'FB7F
H'FB80
On-chip RAM
(2 kbytes)
(1-kbyte user area)
Internal I/O register
H'FD80
H'FD80
On-chip RAM
(512 bytes)
On-chip RAM
(512 bytes)
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 12 of 400
HD6433662
HD6433663
HD6433664
(Mask ROM version)
(Mask ROM version)
(Mask ROM version)
H'0000
H'0033
H'0034
H'0000
H'0033
H'0034
H'0000
H'0033
H'0034
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
Interrupt vector
On-chip ROM
(16 kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(24 kbytes)
H'3FFF
On-chip ROM
(32 kbytes)
H'5FFF
H'7FFF
Not used
Not used
Not used
H'FB80
H'FB80
On-chip RAM
(1 kbyte)
On-chip RAM
(1 kbyte)
H'FD80
On-chip RAM
(512 bytes)
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
H'FF7F
H'FF80
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
H'FFFF
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 13 of 400
HD64N3664
(On-chip EEPROM module)
H'0000
H'01FF
User area
(512 bytes)
Not used
H'FF09
Slave address
register
Not used
Figure 2.1 Memory Map (3)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 14 of 400
2.2
Register Configuration
The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.2. There are two types of registers;
general registers and control registers. The control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), and
an 8-bit condition code register (CCR).
General Registers
15
0 7
0 7
0
ER0
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
R0H
R1H
R2H
R3H
R4H
R5H
R6H
R7H
R0L
R1L
R2L
R3L
R4L
R5L
R6L
R7L
ER1
ER2
ER3
ER4
ER5
ER6
ER7 (SP)
Control Registers (CR)
23
0
0
PC
7
6 5 4 3 2 1
CCR
I UI H U N Z V C
Legend
SP
PC
:Stack pointer
:Program counter
H
:Half-carry flag
:User bit
:Negative flag
:Zero flag
:Overflow flag
:Carry flag
U
N
Z
V
C
CCR :Condition-code register
I
UI
:Interrupt mask bit
:User bit
Figure 2.2 CPU Registers
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 15 of 400
2.2.1
General Registers
The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally
identical and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is
used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.3 illustrates
the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address
registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L
to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8-bit
registers.
The usage of each register can be selected independently.
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.4 shows the
stack.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 16 of 400
Free area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area
Program Counter (PC)
2.2.2
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0). The PC is initialized when the
start address is loaded by the vector address generated during reset exception-handling sequence.
2.2.3
Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. The I bit is initialized to 1
by reset exception-handling sequence, but other bits are not initialized.
Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching
conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions.
For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1 Instruction List.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 17 of 400
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
I
1
R/W
Interrupt Mask Bit
Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1.
NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting.
The I bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-
handling sequence.
6
5
UI
H
undefined
undefined
R/W
R/W
User Bit
Can be written and read by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
Half-Carry Flag
When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B,
CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this
flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3,
and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W,
SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is
executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry
or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L
instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to
0 otherwise.
4
3
2
1
0
U
N
Z
undefined
undefined
undefined
undefined
undefined
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
User Bit
Can be written and read by software using the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
Negative Flag
Stores the value of the most significant bit of data
as a sign bit.
Zero Flag
Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to
indicate non-zero data.
V
C
Overflow Flag
Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and
cleared to 0 at other times.
Carry Flag
Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0
otherwise. Used by:
•
•
•
Add instructions, to indicate a carry
Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a
carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator
by bit manipulation instructions.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 18 of 400
2.3
Data Formats
The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit
(longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2,
…, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two
digits of 4-bit BCD data.
2.3.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.5 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
1-bit data
General Register
RnH
Data Format
7
0
0
Don't care
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
0
0
Don't care
RnL
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1-bit data
7
4
3
0
4-bit BCD data
Upper
Lower
Don't care
7
4
3
0
4-bit BCD data
Byte data
Don't care
Upper
Lower
7
0
Don't care
MSB
LSB
7
0
Byte data
Don't care
MSB
LSB
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 19 of 400
Data Type
Word data
General
Register
Data Format
Rn
15
0
MSB
LSB
Word data
En
15
0
MSB
31
LSB
Longword
data
ERn
16 15
0
MSB
LSB
Legend
ERn : General register ER
En
Rn
: General register E
: General register R
RnH : General register RH
RnL : General register RL
MSB : Most significant bit
LSB : Least significant bit
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 20 of 400
2.3.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.6 shows the data formats in memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and
longword data in memory, however word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an
attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, an address error does not
occur, however the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so access begins the
preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches.
When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word
or longword.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
7
0
0
1-bit data
Byte data
Word data
Address L
Address L
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
Address 2M
Address 2M+1
Longword data
Address 2N
MSB
Address 2N+1
Address 2N+2
Address 2N+3
LSB
Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 21 of 400
2.4
Instruction Set
2.4.1
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
The H8/300H CPU has 62 instructions. Tables 2.2 to 2.9 summarize the instructions in each
functional category. The notation used in tables 2.2 to 2.9 is defined below.
Table 2.1 Operation Notation
Symbol
Description
Rd
General register (destination)*
General register (source)*
General register*
General register (32-bit register or address register)
Destination operand
Source operand
Rs
Rn
ERn
(EAd)
(EAs)
CCR
Condition-code register
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C (carry) flag in CCR
Program counter
Stack pointer
N
Z
V
C
PC
SP
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical XOR
→
Move
¬
NOT (logical complement)
3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length
:3/:8/:16/:24
Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to
R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers/address register (ER0 to ER7).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 22 of 400
Table 2.2 Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general register
and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
POP
B
(EAs) → Rd, Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rs → (EAs) Cannot be used in this LSI.
B
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W
@SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 23 of 400
Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd Rs → Rd, Rd #IMM → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on
immediate data and data in a general register (immediate byte data
cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX
or ADD instruction.)
ADDX
SUBX
B
Rd Rs C → Rd, Rd #IMM C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.
INC
DEC
B/W/L
Rd 1 → Rd, Rd 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands
can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.)
ADDS
SUBS
L
Rd 1 → Rd, Rd 2 → Rd, Rd 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register.
DAA
DAS
B
Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by
referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.
MULXU
MULXS
DIVXU
B/W
B/W
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either
8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16
bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 24 of 400
Table 2.3 Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*
Function
DIVXS
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷
8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit
quotient and 16-bit remainder.
CMP
NEG
EXTU
B/W/L
B/W/L
W/L
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general register
or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result.
0 – Rd → Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a
general register.
Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the
left.
EXTS
W/L
Rd (sign extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 25 of 400
Table 2.4 Logic Operations Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
AND
B/W/L
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
OR
B/W/L
B/W/L
B/W/L
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
XOR
NOT
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data.
¬ (Rd) → (Rd)
Takes the one's complement of general register contents.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2.5 Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
B/W/L
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
ROTL
ROTR
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
ROTXL
ROTXR
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 26 of 400
Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BCLR
BNOT
BTST
B
B
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or
clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIAND
C ∧ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIOR
C ∨ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register
or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 27 of 400
Table 2.6 Bit Manipulation Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*
Function
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BLD
B
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the
carry flag.
BILD
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand.
BIST
¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 28 of 400
Table 2.7 Branch Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Bcc*
—
Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The
branching conditions are listed below.
Mnemonic
BRA (BT)
BRN (BF)
BHI
Description
Always (true)
Never (false)
High
Condition
Always
Never
C ∨ Z = 0
C ∨ Z = 1
C = 0
BLS
Low or same
BCC (BHS)
Carry clear
(high or same)
BCS (BLO)
BNE
BEQ
BVC
BVS
Carry set (low)
Not equal
C = 1
Z = 0
Equal
Z = 1
Overflow clear
Overflow set
Plus
V = 0
V = 1
BPL
N = 0
BMI
Minus
N = 1
BGE
BLT
Greater or equal
Less than
N ⊕ V = 0
N ⊕ V = 1
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1
BGT
BLE
Greater than
Less or equal
JMP
BSR
JSR
RTS
—
—
—
—
Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
Returns from a subroutine
Note: * Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 29 of 400
Table 2.8 System Control Instructions
Instruction
TRAPA
RTE
Size*
—
Function
Starts trap-instruction exception handling.
Returns from an exception-handling routine.
Causes a transition to a power-down state.
—
SLEEP
LDC
—
B/W
(EAs) → CCR
Moves the source operand contents to the CCR. The CCR size is one
byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition code
register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by
word access.
ANDC
ORC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR with immediate data.
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR with immediate data.
XORC
NOP
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically XORs the CCR with immediate data.
—
PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
Note: * Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 30 of 400
Table 2.9 Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV.B
—
if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+,
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W
—
if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+,
R4–1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers
data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set
in ER6.
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is
completed.
2.4.2
Basic Instruction Formats
H8/300H CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an
operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a
condition field (cc).
Figure 2.7 shows examples of instruction formats.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 31 of 400
•
Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried
out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction.
Some instructions have two operation fields.
•
•
•
Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3
bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
Effective Address Extension
8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. A24-bit
address or displacement is treated as a 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (H'00).
Condition Field
Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm
EA(disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op cc EA(disp) BRA d:8
Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 32 of 400
2.5
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.5.1
Addressing Modes
The following describes the H8/300H CPU. In this LSI, the upper eight bits are ignored in the
generated 24-bit address, so the effective address is 16 bits.
The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.10. Each instruction uses
a subset of these addressing modes. Addressing modes that can be used differ depending on the
instruction. For details, refer to appendix A.4, Combinations of Instructions and Addressing
Modes.
Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer
instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect.
Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or the absolute addressing mode
to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or
immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2.10 Addressing Modes
No.
1
Addressing Mode
Symbol
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:24,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@–ERn
5
6
7
8
Absolute address
Immediate
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
@@aa:8
Program-counter relative
Memory indirect
Register Direct—Rn
The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the
operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7
can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.
Register Indirect—@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of
which contain the address of the operand on memory.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 33 of 400
Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn)
A 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)
specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum the address of a
memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn
•
Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits
of which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is
added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register.
The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word
or longword access, the register value should be even.
•
Register indirect with pre-decrement—@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result is the address of a memory operand.
The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for
word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word or longword access, the register value
should be even.
Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address
may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24)
For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit
absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A 24-bit absolute address can access the
entire address space.
The access ranges of absolute addresses for the series of this LSI are those shown in table 2.11,
because the upper 8 bits are ignored.
Table 2.11 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute Address
8 bits (@aa:8)
Access Range
H'FF00 to H'FFFF
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'0000 to H'FFFF
16 bits (@aa:16)
24 bits (@aa:24)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 34 of 400
Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an
operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a
vector address.
Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the BSR instruction. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the
instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. The
PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction,
so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768
bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an
even number.
Memory Indirect—@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit
absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.
The memory operand is accessed by longword access. The first byte of the memory operand is
ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. Figure 2.8 shows how to specify branch address for in
memory indirect mode. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the
address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF).
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area.
Specified
by @aa:8
Dummy
Branch address
Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 35 of 400
2.5.2
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.12 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In this LSI
the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit effective address.
Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (1)
No
1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Register direct(Rn)
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Operand is general register contents.
op
rm rn
2
3
Register indirect(@ERn)
31
0
23
0
General register contents
General register contents
op
r
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)
31
31
0
0
23
0
op
r
disp
disp
Sign extension
Register indirect with post-increment or
pre-decrement
•Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
4
31
31
0
0
23
0
General register contents
op
r
1, 2, or 4
•Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn
General register contents
23
0
op
r
1, 2, or 4
The value to be added or subtracted is 1 when the
operand is byte size, 2 for word size, and 4 for
longword size.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 36 of 400
Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (2)
No
5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Absolute address
@aa:8
23
8 7
0
0
op
abs
H'FFFF
@aa:16
23
16 15
op
op
abs
Sign extension
@aa:24
23
0
abs
6
7
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
op
Operand is immediate data.
IMM
disp
23
0
0
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC) @(d:16,PC)
PC contents
op
23
Sign
disp
extension
23
0
8
Memory indirect @@aa:8
23
8
7
0
0
op
abs
abs
H'0000
15
23
16 15
H'00
0
Memory contents
Legend
r, rm,rn : Register field
op :
Operation field
Displacement
Immediate data
Absolute address
disp :
IMM :
abs :
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 37 of 400
2.6
Basic Bus Cycle
CPU operation is synchronized by a system clock (ø) or a subclock (øSUB). The period from a rising
edge of ø or øSUB to the next rising edge is called one state. A bus cycle consists of two states or
three states. The cycle differs depending on whether access is to on-chip memory or to on-chip
peripheral modules.
2.6.1
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)
Access to on-chip memory takes place in two states. The data bus width is 16 bits, allowing access
in byte or word size. Figure 2.9 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
ø or øSUB
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 38 of 400
2.6.2
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
On-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states or three states. The data bus width is 8 bits
or 16 bits depending on the register. For description on the data bus width and number of
accessing states of each register, refer to section 19.1, Register Addresses. Registers with 16-bit
data bus width can be accessed by word size only. Registers with 8-bit data bus width can be
accessed by byte or word size. When a register with 8-bit data bus width is accessed by word size,
access is completed in two cycles. In two-state access, the operation timing is the same as that for
on-chip memory.
Figure 2.10 shows the operation timing in the case of three-state access to an on-chip peripheral
module.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
ø or øSUB
Internal
address bus
Address
Internal
read signal
Internal
data bus
Read data
(read access)
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus
Write data
(write access)
Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 39 of 400
2.7
CPU States
There are four CPU states: the reset state, program execution state, program halt state, and
exception-handling state. The program execution state includes active mode and subactive mode.
In the program halt state there are a sleep mode, standby mode, and sub-sleep mode. These states
are shown in figure 2.11. Figure 2.12 shows the state transitions. For details on program execution
state and program halt state, refer to section 6, Power-Down Modes. For details on exception
processing, refer to section 3, Exception Handling.
CPU state
Reset state
The CPU is initialized
Program
execution state
Active
(high speed) mode
The CPU executes successive program
instructions at high speed,
synchronized by the system clock
Subactive mode
The CPU executes
successive program
instructions at reduced
speed, synchronized
by the subclock
Power-down
modes
Sleep mode
Standby mode
Subsleep mode
Program halt state
A state in which some
or all of the chip
functions are stopped
to conserve power
Exception-
handling state
A transient state in which the CPU changes
the processing flow due to a reset or an interrupt
Figure 2.11 CPU Operation States
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 40 of 400
Reset cleared
Reset occurs
Reset state
Exception-handling state
Reset
occurs
Interrupt
source
Reset
occurs
Interrupt
source
Exception-
handling
complete
Program halt state
Program execution state
SLEEP instruction executed
Figure 2.12 State Transitions
2.8
Usage Notes
2.8.1
Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas
The address space of this LSI includes empty areas in addition to the ROM, RAM, and on-chip
I/O registers areas available to the user. When data is transferred from CPU to empty areas, the
transferred data will be lost. This action may also cause the CPU to malfunction. When data is
transferred from an empty area to CPU, the contents of the data cannot be guaranteed.
2.8.2
EEPMOV Instruction
EEPMOV is a block-transfer instruction and transfers the byte size of data indicated by R4L,
which starts from the address indicated by R5, to the address indicated by R6. Set R4L and R6 so
that the end address of the destination address (value of R6 + R4L) does not exceed H'FFFF (the
value of R6 must not change from H'FFFF to H'0000 during execution).
2.8.3
Bit Manipulation Instruction
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data from the specified address in
byte units, manipulate the data of the target bit, and write data to the same address again in byte
units. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases where two registers are
assigned to the same address or when a bit is directly manipulated for a port, because this may
rewrite data of a bit other than the bit to be manipulated.
Bit manipulation for two registers assigned to the same address
Example: Bit manipulation for the timer load register and timer counter
(Applicable for timer B and timer C, not for the series of this LSI.)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 41 of 400
Figure 2.13 shows an example of a timer in which two timer registers are assigned to the same
address. When a bit manipulation instruction accesses the timer load register and timer counter of
a reloadable timer, since these two registers share the same address, the following operations takes
place.
1. Data is read in byte units.
2. The CPU sets or resets the bit to be manipulated with the bit manipulation instruction.
3. The written data is written again in byte units to the timer load register.
The timer is counting, so the value read is not necessarily the same as the value in the timer load
register. As a result, bits other than the intended bit in the timer counter may be modified and the
modified value may be written to the timer load register.
Read
Count clock
Timer counter
Reload
Write
Timer load register
Internal bus
Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to Same
Address
Example 2: The BSET instruction is executed for port 5.
P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at
P56. P55 to P50 are output pins and output low-level signals. An example to output a high-level
signal at P50 with a BSET instruction is shown below.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 42 of 400
Prior to executing BSET
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
BSET instruction executed
BSET #0, @PDR5
The BSET instruction is executed for port 5.
After executing BSET
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
Description on operation
When the BSET instruction is executed, first the CPU reads port 5.
Since P57 and P56 are input pins, the CPU reads the pin states (low-level and high-level input).
P55 to P50 are output pins, so the CPU reads the value in PDR5. In this example PDR5 has a
value of H'80, but the value read by the CPU is H'40.
Next, the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the PDR5 data to H'41.
Finally, the CPU writes H'41 to PDR5, completing execution of BSET.
As a result of the BSET instruction, bit 0 in PDR5 becomes 1, and P50 outputs a high-level signal.
However, bits 7 and 6 of PDR5 end up with different values. To prevent this problem, store a copy
of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit manipulation on the data in the work
area, then write this data to PDR5.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 43 of 400
Prior to executing BSET
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
#80, R0L
R0L, @RAM0
R0L, @PDR5
The PDR5 value (H'80) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PDR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
BSET instruction executed
BSET
#0,
@RAM0
The BSET instruction is executed designating the PDR5
work area (RAM0).
After executing BSET
MOV.B
MOV.B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PDR5
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PDR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
Bit Manipulation in a Register Containing a Write-Only Bit
Example 3: BCLR instruction executed designating port 5 control register PCR5
P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at
P56. P55 to P50 are output pins that output low-level signals. An example of setting the P50 pin as
an input pin by the BCLR instruction is shown below. It is assumed that a high-level signal will be
input to this input pin.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 44 of 400
Prior to executing BCLR
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
BCLR instruction executed
BCLR #0, @PCR5
The BCLR instruction is executed for PCR5.
After executing BCLR
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
Description on operation
When the BCLR instruction is executed, first the CPU reads PCR5. Since PCR5 is a write-only
register, the CPU reads a value of H'FF, even though the PCR5 value is actually H'3F.
Next, the CPU clears bit 0 in the read data to 0, changing the data to H'FE.
Finally, H'FE is written to PCR5 and BCLR instruction execution ends.
As a result of this operation, bit 0 in PCR5 becomes 0, making P50 an input port. However, bits 7
and 6 in PCR5 change to 1, so that P57 and P56 change from input pins to output pins. To prevent
this problem, store a copy of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory and manipulate data of the
bit in the work area, then write this data to PDR5.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 45 of 400
Prior to executing BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
#3F, R0L
R0L, @RAM0
R0L, @PCR5
The PCR5 value (H'3F) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PCR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
BCLR instruction executed
BCLR #0, @RAM0
The BCLR instructions executed for the PCR5 work area
(RAM0).
After executing BCLR
MOV.B
MOV.B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PCR5
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PCR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Pin state
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
PDR5
RAM0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 46 of 400
Section 3 Exception Handling
Exception handling may be caused by a reset, a trap instruction (TRAPA), or interrupts.
•
Reset
A reset has the highest exception priority. Exception handling starts as soon as the reset is cleared
by the RES pin. The chip is also reset when the watchdog timer overflows, and exception handling
starts. Exception handling is the same as exception handling by the RES pin.
•
Trap Instruction
Exception handling starts when a trap instruction (TRAPA) is executed. The TRAPA instruction
generates a vector address corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the
instruction code. Exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
•
Interrupts
External interrupts other than NMI and internal interrupts other than address break are masked by
the I bit in CCR, and kept masked while the I bit is set to 1. Exception handling starts when the
current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.
3.1
Exception Sources and Vector Address
Table 3.1 shows the vector addresses and priority of each exception handling. When more than
one interrupt is requested, handling is performed from the interrupt with the highest priority.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 47 of 400
Table 3.1 Exception Sources and Vector Address
Vector
Number Vector Address
Relative Module Exception Sources
Priority
RES pin
Watchdog timer
Reset
0
H'0000 to H'0001
High
Reserved for system use
1 to 6
7
H'0002 to H'000D
H'000E to H'000F
External interrupt NMI
pin
CPU
Trap instruction (#0)
8
H'0010 to H'0011
H'0012 to H'0013
H'0014 to H'0015
H'0016 to H'0017
H'0018 to H'0019
H'001A to H'001B
(#1)
9
(#2)
(#3)
10
11
12
Address break
CPU
Break conditions satisfied
Direct transition by executing the 13
SLEEP instruction
External interrupt IRQ0
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
H'001C to H'001D
H'001E to H'001F
H'0020 to H'0021
H'0022 to H'0023
H'0024 to H'0025
H'0026 to H'0027
H'0028 to H'0029
H'002A to H'002B
pin
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
WKP
Timer A
Overflow
Reserved for system use
Timer W
Input capture A/compare match A 21
Input capture B/compare match B
Input capture C/compare match C
Input capture D/compare match D
Timer W overflow
Timer V
SCI3
Timer V compare match A
Timer V compare match B
Timer V overflow
22
H'002C to H'002D
H'002E to H'002F
SCI3 receive data full
SCI3 transmit data empty
SCI3 transmit end
23
SCI3 receive error
IIC
Data transfer end
24
25
H'0030 to H'0031
H'0032 to H'0033
Address inequality
Stop conditions detected
A/D conversion end
A/D converter
Low
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 48 of 400
3.2
Register Descriptions
Interrupts are controlled by the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Interrupt edge select register 1 (IEGR1)
Interrupt edge select register 2 (IEGR2)
Interrupt enable register 1 (IENR1)
Interrupt flag register 1 (IRR1)
Wakeup interrupt flag register (IWPR)
3.2.1
Interrupt Edge Select Register 1 (IEGR1)
IEGR1 selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of pins NMI and IRQ3 to
IRQ0.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
NMIEG
0
R/W
NMI Edge Select
0: Falling edge of NMI pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of NMI pin input is detected
Reserved
6
5
4
3
1
1
1
0
These bits are always read as 1.
IEG3
R/W
IRQ3 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of IRQ3 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of IRQ3 pin input is detected
IRQ2 Edge Select
2
1
0
IEG2
IEG1
IEG0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
0: Falling edge of IRQ2 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of IRQ2 pin input is detected
IRQ1 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of IRQ1 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of IRQ1 pin input is detected
IRQ0 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of IRQ0 pin input is detected
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 49 of 400
3.2.2
Interrupt Edge Select Register 2 (IEGR2)
IEGR2 selects the direction of an edge that generates interrupt requests of the pins ADTRG and
WKP5 to WKP0.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
1
1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
WKP5 Edge Select
WPEG5
R/W
0: Falling edge of WKP5 (ADTRG) pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP5 (ADTRG) pin input is detected
WKP4 Edge Select
4
3
2
1
0
WPEG4
WPEG3
WPEG2
WPEG1
WPEG0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
0: Falling edge of WKP4 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP4 pin input is detected
WKP3 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP3 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP3 pin input is detected
WKP2 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP2 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP2 pin input is detected
WKP1Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP1 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP1 pin input is detected
WKP0 Edge Select
0: Falling edge of WKP0 pin input is detected
1: Rising edge of WKP0 pin input is detected
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 50 of 400
3.2.3
Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1)
IENR1 enables direct transition interrupts, timer A overflow interrupts, and external pin interrupts.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
IENDT
IENTA
IENWP
0
0
0
R/W
Direct Transfer Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, direct transition interrupt requests
are enabled.
R/W
R/W
Timer A Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, timer A overflow interrupt
requests are enabled.
Wakeup Interrupt Enable
This bit is an enable bit, which is common to the pins
WKP5 to WKP0. When the bit is set to 1, interrupt
requests are enabled.
4
3
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
IRQ3 Interrupt Enable
IEN3
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ3 pin
are enabled.
2
1
0
IEN2
IEN1
IEN0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
IRQ2 Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ2 pin
are enabled.
IRQ1 Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ1 pin
are enabled.
IRQ0 Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt requests of the IRQ0 pin
are enabled.
When disabling interrupts by clearing bits in an interrupt enable register, or when clearing bits in
an interrupt flag register, always do so while interrupts are masked (I = 1). If the above clear
operations are performed while I = 0, and as a result a conflict arises between the clear instruction
and an interrupt request, exception handling for the interrupt will be executed after the clear
instruction has been executed.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 51 of 400
3.2.4
Interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1)
IRR1 is a status flag register for direct transition interrupts, timer A overflow interrupts, and IRQ3
to IRQ0 interrupt requests.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
IRRDT
0
R/W
Direct Transfer Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When a direct transfer is made by executing a SLEEP
instruction while DTON in SYSCR2 is set to 1.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRDT is cleared by writing 0
Timer A Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
6
IRRTA
0
R/W
When the timer A counter value overflows
[Clearing condition]
When IRRTA is cleared by writing 0
Reserved
5
4
3
IRRI3
1
1
0
R/W
These bits are always read as 1.
IRQ3 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When IRQ3 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRI3 is cleared by writing 0
IRQ2 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
2
1
0
IRRI2
IRRI1
IRRl0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
When IRQ2 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRI2 is cleared by writing 0
IRQ1 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When IRQ1 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRI1 is cleared by writing 0
IRQ0 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When IRQ0 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IRRI0 is cleared by writing 0
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 52 of 400
3.2.5
Wakeup Interrupt Flag Register (IWPR)
IWPR is a status flag register for WKP5 to WKP0 interrupt requests.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
6
5
1
1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
WKP5 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
IWPF5
IWPF4
IWPF3
IWPF2
IWPF1
IWPF0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
When WKP5 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF5 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP4 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
When WKP4 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF4 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP3 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP3 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF3 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP2 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP2 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF2 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP1 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP1 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF1 is cleared by writing 0.
WKP0 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When WKP0 pin is designated for interrupt input and the
designated signal edge is detected.
[Clearing condition]
When IWPF0 is cleared by writing 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 53 of 400
3.3
Reset Exception Handling
When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset. The internal state of
the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized by the reset. To ensure
that this LSI is reset at power-up, hold the RES pin low until the clock pulse generator output
stabilizes. To reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 10 system clock
cycles. When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts
reset exception handling. The reset exception handling sequence is shown in figure 3.1.
The reset exception handling sequence is as follows:
1. Set the I bit in the condition code register (CCR) to 1.
2. The CPU generates a reset exception handling vector address (from H'0000 to H'0001), the
data in that address is sent to the program counter (PC) as the start address, and program
execution starts from that address.
3.4
Interrupt Exception Handling
3.4.1
External Interrupts
There are external interrupts, NMI, IRQ3 to IRQ0, and WKP5 to WKP0.
NMI Interrupt
NMI interrupt is requested by input signal edge to pin NMI. This interrupt is detected by either
rising edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the setting of bit NMIEG in IEGR1.
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and can always be accepted without depending on the I
bit value in CCR.
IRQ3 to IRQ0 Interrupts
IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins IRQ3 to IRQ0. These four
interrupts are given different vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising
edge sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits IEG3 to IEG0 in
IEGR1.
When pins IRQ3 to IRQ0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR1 and the designated signal
edge is input, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt.
When IRQ3 to IRQ0 interrupt is accepted, the I bit is set to 1 in CCR. These interrupts can be
masked by setting bits IEN3 to IEN0 in IENR1.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 54 of 400
WKP5 to WKP0 Interrupts
WKP5 to WKP0 interrupts are requested by input signals to pins WKP5 to WKP0. These six
interrupts have the same vector addresses, and are detected individually by either rising edge
sensing or falling edge sensing, depending on the settings of bits WPEG5 to WPEG0 in
IEGR2.
When pins WKP5 to WKP0 are designated for interrupt input in PMR5 and the designated
signal edge is input, the corresponding bit in IWPR is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an
interrupt. These interrupts can be masked by setting bit IENWP in IENR1.
Reset cleared
Initial program
instruction prefetch
Vector fetch Internal
processing
ø
Internal
address bus
(1)
(2)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data
bus (16 bits)
(2)
(3)
(1) Reset exception handling vector address (H'0000)
(2) Program start address
(3) Initial program instruction
Figure 3.1 Reset Sequence
3.4.2
Internal Interrupts
Each on-chip peripheral module has a flag to show the interrupt request status and the enable bit to
enable or disable the interrupt. For timer A interrupt requests and direct transfer interrupt requests
generated by execution of a SLEEP instruction, this function is included in IRR1 and IENR1.
When an on-chip peripheral module requests an interrupt, the corresponding interrupt request
status flag is set to 1, requesting the CPU of an interrupt. When this interrupt is accepted, the I bit
is set to 1 in CCR. These interrupts can be masked by writing 0 to clear the corresponding enable
bit.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 55 of 400
3.4.3
Interrupt Handling Sequence
Interrupts are controlled by an interrupt controller.
Interrupt operation is described as follows.
1. If an interrupt occurs while the NMI or interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request
signal is sent to the interrupt controller.
2. When multiple interrupt requests are generated, the interrupt controller requests to the CPU for
the interrupt handling with the highest priority at that time according to table 3.1. Other
interrupt requests are held pending.
3. The CPU accepts the NMI and address break without depending on the I bit value. Other
interrupt requests are accepted, if the I bit is cleared to 0 in CCR; if the I bit is set to 1, the
interrupt request is held pending.
4. If the CPU accepts the interrupt after processing of the current instruction is completed,
interrupt exception handling will begin. First, both PC and CCR are pushed onto the stack. The
state of the stack at this time is shown in figure 3.2. The PC value pushed onto the stack is the
address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from interrupt handling.
5. Then, the I bit of CCR is set to 1, masking further interrupts excluding the NMI and address
break. Upon return from interrupt handling, the values of I bit and other bits in CCR will be
restored and returned to the values prior to the start of interrupt exception handling.
6. Next, the CPU generates the vector address corresponding to the accepted interrupt, and
transfers the address to PC as a start address of the interrupt handling-routine. Then a program
starts executing from the address indicated in PC.
Figure 3.3 shows a typical interrupt sequence where the program area is in the on-chip ROM and
the stack area is in the on-chip RAM.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 56 of 400
SP – 4
SP – 3
SP – 2
SP – 1
SP (R7)
SP (R7)
SP + 1
SP + 2
SP + 3
SP + 4
CCR
CCR*3
PCH
PCL
Even address
Stack area
Prior to start of interrupt
exception handling
After completion of interrupt
exception handling
PC and CCR
saved to stack
Legend:
PC
PC
H
L
: Upper 8 bits of program counter (PC)
Lower 8 bits of program counter (PC)
:
CCR: Condition code register
SP: Stack pointer
1. PC shows the address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from the interrupt
handling routine.
Notes:
2. Register contents must always be saved and restored by word length, starting from
an even-numbered address.
3. Ignored when returning from the interrupt handling routine.
Figure 3.2 Stack Status after Exception Handling
3.4.4
Interrupt Response Time
Table 3.2 shows the number of wait states after an interrupt request flag is set until the first
instruction of the interrupt handling-routine is executed.
Table 3.2 Interrupt Wait States
Item
States
Total
Waiting time for completion of executing instruction*
Saving of PC and CCR to stack
Vector fetch
1 to 13
15 to 27
4
2
4
4
Instruction fetch
Internal processing
Note: * Not including EEPMOV instruction.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 57 of 400
Figure 3.3 Interrupt Sequence
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 58 of 400
3.5
Usage Notes
3.5.1
Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset and before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes
the stack pointer (example: MOV.W #xx: 16, SP).
3.5.2
Notes on Stack Area Use
When word data is accessed the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0. Access to the
stack always takes place in word size, so the stack pointer (SP: R7) should never indicate an odd
address. Use PUSH Rn (MOV.W Rn, @–SP) or POP Rn (MOV.W @SP+, Rn) to save or restore
register values.
3.5.3
Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers
When a port mode register is rewritten to switch the functions of external interrupt pins, IRQ3 to
IRQ0, and WKP5 to WKP0, the interrupt request flag may be set to 1.
Figure 3.4 shows a port mode register setting and interrupt request flag clearing procedure.
When switching a pin function, mask the interrupt before setting the bit in the port mode register.
After accessing the port mode register, execute at least one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear the
interrupt request flag from 1 to 0.
Interrupts masked. (Another possibility
is to disable the relevant interrupt in
interrupt enable register 1.)
←
CCR I bit
1
Set port mode register bit
After setting the port mode register bit,
first execute at least one instruction
(e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt
request flag to 0
Execute NOP instruction
Clear interrupt request flag to 0
←
Interrupt mask cleared
CCR I bit
0
Figure 3.4 Port Mode Register Setting and Interrupt Request Flag Clearing Procedure
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 59 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 60 of 400
Section 4 Address Break
The address break simplifies on-board program debugging. It requests an address break interrupt
when the set break condition is satisfied. The interrupt request is not affected by the I bit of CCR.
Break conditions that can be set include instruction execution at a specific address and a
combination of access and data at a specific address. With the address break function, the
execution start point of a program containing a bug is detected and execution is branched to the
correcting program. Figure 4.1 shows a block diagram of the address break.
Internal address bus
Comparator
BARH
BARL
ABRKCR
ABRKSR
Interrupt
generation
control circuit
BDRH
BDRL
Comparator
Interrupt
Legend:
BARH, BARL: Break address register
BDRH, BDRL: Break data register
ABRKCR:
ABRKSR:
Address break control register
Address break status register
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Address Break
4.1
Register Descriptions
Address break has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Address break control register (ABRKCR)
Address break status register (ABRKSR)
Break address register (BARH, BARL)
Break data register (BDRH, BDRL)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 61 of 400
ABK0000A_000020020300
4.1.1
ABRKCR sets address break conditions.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR)
R/W Description
R/W RTE Interrupt Enable
When this bit is 0, the interrupt immediately after
7
RTINTE
1
executing RTE is masked and then one instruction must
be executed. When this bit is 1, the interrupt is not
masked.
6
5
CSEL1
CSEL0
0
0
R/W Condition Select 1 and 0
R/W These bits set address break conditions.
00: Instruction execution cycle
01: CPU data read cycle
10: CPU data write cycle
11: CPU data read/write cycle
4
3
2
ACMP2
ACMP1
ACMP0
0
0
0
R/W Address Compare Condition Select 2 to 0
R/W These bits comparison condition between the address set
in BAR and the internal address bus.
R/W
000: Compares 16-bit addresses
001: Compares upper 12-bit addresses
010: Compares upper 8-bit addresses
011: Compares upper 4-bit addresses
1XX: Reserved (setting prohibited)
1
0
DCMP1
DCMP0
0
0
R/W Data Compare Condition Select 1 and 0
R/W These bits set the comparison condition between the data
set in BDR and the internal data bus.
00: No data comparison
01: Compares lower 8-bit data between BDRL and data
bus
10: Compares upper 8-bit data between BDRH and data
bus
11: Compares 16-bit data between BDR and data bus
Legend: X: Don't care.
When an address break is set in the data read cycle or data write cycle, the data bus used will
depend on the combination of the byte/word access and address. Table 4.1 shows the access and
data bus used. When an I/O register space with an 8-bit data bus width is accessed in word size, a
byte access is generated twice. For details on data widths of each register, see section 19.1,
Register Addresses.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 62 of 400
Table 4.1 Access and Data Bus Used
Word Access
Even Address Odd Address Even Address Odd Address
Byte Access
ROM space
RAM space
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
I/O register with 8-bit data bus Upper 8 bits
width
I/O register with 16-bit data
bus width
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
—
—
4.1.2
Address Break Status Register (ABRKSR)
ABRKSR consists of the address break interrupt flag and the address break interrupt enable bit.
Bit
Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description
7
ABIF
0
R/W Address Break Interrupt Flag
[Setting condition]
When the condition set in ABRKCR is satisfied
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after ABIF=1 is read
R/W Address Break Interrupt Enable
6
ABIE
0
When this bit is 1, an address break interrupt request is
enabled.
5 to 0 —
All 1
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
4.1.3
Break Address Registers (BARH, BARL)
BARH and BARL are 16-bit read/write registers that set the address for generating an address
break interrupt. When setting the address break condition to the instruction execution cycle, set
the first byte address of the instruction. The initial value of this register is H'FFFF.
4.1.4
Break Data Registers (BDRH, BDRL)
BDRH and BDRL are 16-bit read/write registers that set the data for generating an address break
interrupt. BDRH is compared with the upper 8-bit data bus. BDRL is compared with the lower 8-
bit data bus. When memory or registers are accessed by byte, the upper 8-bit data bus is used for
even and odd addresses in the data transmission. Therefore, comparison data must be set in
BDRH for byte access. For word access, the data bus used depends on the address. See section
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 63 of 400
4.1.1, Address Break Control Register (ABRKCR), for details. The initial value of this register is
undefined.
4.2
Operation
When the ABIF and ABIE bits in ABRKSR are set to 1, the address break function generates an
interrupt request to the CPU. The ABIF bit in ABRKSR is set to 1 by the combination of the
address set in BAR, the data set in BDR, and the conditions set in ABRKCR. When the interrupt
request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after the instruction being executed ends.
The address break interrupt is not masked because of the I bit in CCR of the CPU.
Figures 4.2 show the operation examples of the address break interrupt setting.
When the address break is specified in instruction execution cycle
Register setting
• ABRKCR = H'80
• BAR = H'025A
Program
0258 NOP
* 025A NOP
025C MOV.W @H'025A,R0
0260 NOP
Underline indicates the address
to be stacked.
0262 NOP
:
:
NOP
NOP
MOV
MOV
instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc-
tion
tion
tion 1
tion 2
Internal
prefetch prefetch prefetch prefetch processing
Stack save
φ
Address
bus
0258
025A
025C
025E
SP-2
SP-4
Interrupt
request
Interrupt acceptance
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 64 of 400
When the address break is specified in the data read cycle
Register setting
• ABRKCR = H'A0
• BAR = H'025A
Program
0258 NOP
025A NOP
* 025C MOV.W @H'025A,R0
0260 NOP
0262 NOP
Underline indicates the address
to be stacked.
:
:
MOV
MOV
NOP
MOV
NOP
Next
instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instru-
tion 1
tion 2
tion
tion
tion
ction
Internal Stack
prefetch prefetch prefetch execution prefetch prefetch processing save
φ
Address
bus
025C
025E
0260
025A
0262
0264
SP-2
Interrupt
request
Interrupt acceptance
Figure 4.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2)
4.3
Usage Notes
When an address break is set to an instruction after a conditional branch instruction, and the
instruction set when the condition of the branch instruction is not satisfied is executed (see figure
4.3), note that an address break interrupt request is not generated. Therefore an address break must
not be set to the instruction after a conditional branch instruction.
[Register setting]
[Program]
ABRKCR=H'80
BAR=H'0136
012A MOV.B . . .
:
:
0134 BNE
*0136 NOP
0138 NOP
:
:
BNE
NOP
MOV
NOP
instruction instruction instruction instruction
prefetch prefetch prefetch prefetch
0134
0136
102A
0138
Adress bus
Adress break
interrupt request
Figure 4.3 Operation when Condition is not Satisfied in Branch Instruction
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 65 of 400
When another interrupt request is accepted before an instruction to which an address break is set is
executed, exception handling of an address break interrupt is not executed. However, the ABIF bit
is set to 1 (see figure 4.4). Therefore the ABIF bit must be read during exception handling of an
address break interrupt.
[Register setting]
[Program]
ABRKCR=H'80
BAR=H'0144
001C 0900
:
:
0142 MOV.B #H'23,R1H
0144 MOV.B #H'45,R1H
0146 MOV.B #H'67,R1H
External interrupt
Underlined indicates the addoress to be stacked.
*
MOV
MOV
MOV
instruction instruction instruction
prefetch prefetch prefetch
Internal
processing
Internal
processing
External interrupt
acceptance
Vector
fetch
Stack save
0900
001C
0142
0144
0146
SP-2
SP-4
Adress bus
Adress break
interrupt request
ABIF
External interrupt acceptance
Figure 4.4 Operation when Another Interrupt is Accepted at Address Break Setting
Instruction
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 66 of 400
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generators
Clock oscillator circuitry (CPG: clock pulse generator) is provided on-chip, including both a
system clock pulse generator and a subclock pulse generator. The system clock pulse generator
consists of a system clock oscillator, a duty correction circuit, and system clock dividers. The
subclock pulse generator consists of a subclock oscillator circuit and a subclock divider.
Figure 5.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generators.
øOSC
øOSC/8
ø
System
clock
divider
System
clock
oscillator
Duty
correction
circuit
OSC1
OSC2
øOSC
(fOSC
øOSC
(fOSC
øOSC/16
øOSC/32
øOSC/64
)
)
ø/2
Prescaler S
(13 bits)
to
ø/8192
System clock pulse generator
ø
W/2
W/4
Subclock
oscillator
X1
X2
øW
ø
Subclock
divider
øSUB
(fW
)
øW/8
ø
W/8
Prescaler W
(5 bits)
to
øW/128
Subclock pulse generator
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generators
The basic clock signals that drive the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules are ø and øSUB. The
system clock is divided by prescaler S to become a clock signal from ø/8192 to ø/2, and the
subclock is divided by prescaler W to become a clock signal from øw/128 to øw/8. Both the
system clock and subclock signals are provided to the on-chip peripheral modules.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 67 of 400
CPG0200A_000020020300
5.1
System Clock Generator
Clock pulses can be supplied to the system clock divider either by connecting a crystal or ceramic
resonator, or by providing external clock input. Figure 5.2 shows a block diagram of the system
clock generator.
OSC2
LPM
OSC1
LPM: Low-power mode (standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode)
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of System Clock Generator
5.1.1
Connecting Crystal Resonator
Figure 5.3 shows a typical method of connecting a crystal resonator. An AT-cut parallel-resonance
crystal resonator should be used. Figure 5.4 shows the equivalent circuit of a crystal resonator. A
resonator having the characteristics given in table 5.1 should be used.
C1
OSC1
C2
OSC2
C1 = C2 = 12 pF 2ꢀ0
Figure 5.3 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator
LS
RS
CS
OSC1
OSC2
Cꢀ
Figure 5.4 Equivalent Circuit of Crystal Resonator
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 68 of 400
Table 5.1 Crystal Resonator Parameters
Frequency (MHz)
RS (max)
2
4
8
10
16
500 Ω
7 pF
120 Ω
7 pF
80 Ω
7 pF
60 Ω
7 pF
50 Ω
7 pF
C0 (max)
5.1.2
Connecting Ceramic Resonator
Figure 5.5 shows a typical method of connecting a ceramic resonator.
C1
OSC1
C2
OSC2
C1 = 3ꢀ pF 1ꢀ0
C2 = 3ꢀ pF 1ꢀ0
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator
External Clock Input Method
5.1.3
Connect an external clock signal to pin OSC1, and leave pin OSC2 open. Figure 5.6 shows a typical
connection. The duty cycle of the external clock signal must be 45 to 55%.
OSC1
OSC 2
External clock input
Open
Figure 5.6 Example of External Clock Input
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 69 of 400
5.2
Subclock Generator
Figure 5.7 shows a block diagram of the subclock generator.
x
2
8M
x
1
Note : Capacitance is a reference value.
Figure 5.7 Block Diagram of Subclock Generator
5.2.1
Connecting 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator
Clock pulses can be supplied to the subclock divider by connecting a 32.768-kHz crystal
resonator, as shown in figure 5.8. Figure 5.9 shows the equivalent circuit of the 32.768-kHz
crystal resonator.
C1
X1
C2
X2
C1 = C2 = 15 pF (typ.)
Figure 5.8 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator
LS
CS
RS
X1
X2
CO
CO = 1.5 pF (typ.)
R
S = 14 kΩ (typ.)
f
W = 32.768 kHz
Note: Constants are reference values.
Figure 5.9 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 70 of 400
5.2.2
Pin Connection when Not Using Subclock
When the subclock is not used, connect pin X1 to VCL or VSS and leave pin X2 open, as shown in
figure 5.10.
VCL or VSS
X1
X2
Open
Figure 5.10 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock
5.3
Prescalers
5.3.1
Prescaler S
Prescaler S is a 13-bit counter using the system clock (ø) as its input clock. It is incremented once
per clock period. Prescaler S is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and starts counting on exit from
the reset state. In standby mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode, the system clock pulse
generator stops. Prescaler S also stops and is initialized to H'0000. The CPU cannot read or write
prescaler S. The output from prescaler S is shared by the on-chip peripheral modules. The divider
ratio can be set separately for each on-chip peripheral function. In active mode and sleep mode,
the clock input to prescaler S is determined by the division factor designated by MA2 to MA0 in
SYSCR2.
5.3.2
Prescaler W
Prescaler W is a 5-bit counter using a 32.768 kHz signal divided by 4 (øW/4) as its input clock. The
divided output is used for clock time base operation of timer A. Prescaler W is initialized to H'00
by a reset, and starts counting on exit from the reset state. Even in standby mode, subactive mode,
or subsleep mode, prescaler W continues functioning so long as clock signals are supplied to pins
X1 and X2. Prescaler W can be reset by setting 1s in bits TMA3 and TMA2 of timer mode register
A (TMA).
5.4
Usage Notes
5.4.1
Note on Resonators
Resonator characteristics are closely related to board design and should be carefully evaluated by
the user, referring to the examples shown in this section. Resonator circuit constants will differ
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 71 of 400
depending on the resonator element, stray capacitance in its interconnecting circuit, and other
factors. Suitable constants should be determined in consultation with the resonator element
manufacturer. Design the circuit so that the resonator element never receives voltages exceeding
its maximum rating.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 72 of 400
5.4.2
Notes on Board Design
When using a crystal resonator (ceramic resonator), place the resonator and its load capacitors as
close as possible to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the
resonator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation (see figure 5.11).
Avoid
Signal A Signal B
C1
C2
OSC1
OSC2
Figure 5.11 Example of Incorrect Board Design
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 73 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 74 of 400
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
This LSI has six modes of operation after a reset. These include a normal active mode and four
power-down modes, in which power consumption is significantly reduced. Module standby mode
reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip module functions.
•
Active mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system
clock frequency can be selected from øosc, øosc/8, øosc/16, øosc/32, and øosc/64.
•
Subactive mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock. The subclock
frequency can be selected from øw/2, øw/4, and øw/8.
•
•
•
Sleep mode
The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock.
Subsleep mode
The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock.
Standby mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules halt. When the clock time-base function is
selected, timer A is operable.
•
Module standby mode
Independent of the above modes, power consumption can be reduced by halting on-chip
peripheral modules that are not used in module units.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 75 of 400
LPW3000A_000020020300
6.1
Register Descriptions
The registers related to power-down modes are listed below.
•
•
•
System control register 1 (SYSCR1)
System control register 2 (SYSCR2)
Module standby control register 1 (MSTCR1)
6.1.1
System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)
SYSCR1 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR2.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 76 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W Description
7
SSBY
0
R/W Software Standby
This bit selects the mode to transit after the execution of
the SLEEP instruction.
0: a transition is made to sleep mode or subsleep mode.
1: a transition is made to standby mode.
For details, see table 6.2.
6
5
4
STS2
STS1
STS0
0
0
0
R/W Standby Timer Select 2 to 0
R/W These bits designate the time the CPU and peripheral
modules wait for stable clock operation after exiting from
R/W
standby mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode to
active mode or sleep mode due to an interrupt. The
designation should be made according to the clock
frequency so that the waiting time is at least 6.5 ms. The
relationship between the specified value and the number
of wait states is shown in table 6.1. When an external
clock is to be used, the minimum value (STS2 = STS1 =
STS0 = 1) is recommended.
3
NESEL
0
R/W Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select
The subclock pulse generator generates the watch clock
signal (φW) and the system clock pulse generator
generates the oscillator clock (φOSC). This bit selects the
sampling frequency of the oscillator clock when the watch
clock signal (φW) is sampled. When φOSC = 2 to 10 MHz,
clear NESEL to 0.
0: Sampling rate is φOSC/16
1: Sampling rate is φOSC/4
2
1
0
0
0
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 77 of 400
Table 6.1 Operating Frequency and Waiting Time
STS2 STS1 STS0 Waiting Time
16 MHz 10 MHz 8 MHz
4 MHz
2.0
2 MHz
4.1
1 MHz 0.5 MHz
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
8,192 states
16,384 states
32,768 states
65,536 states
131,072 states
1,024 states
128 states
0.5
0.8
1.0
8.1
16.4
32.8
65.5
131.1
262.1
2.05
0.26
0.03
1.0
1.6
2.0
4.1
8.2
16.4
32.8
65.5
131.1
1.02
0.13
0.02
2.0
3.3
4.1
8.2
16.4
32.8
65.5
0.51
0.06
0.01
4.1
6.6
8.2
16.4
32.8
0.26
0.03
0.00
1
8.2
13.1
0.10
0.01
0.00
16.4
0.13
0.02
0.00
0.06
0.00
0.00
16 states
Note: Time unit is ms.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 78 of 400
6.1.2
System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)
SYSCR2 controls the power-down modes, as well as SYSCR1.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W Description
7
6
5
SMSEL
LSON
DTON
0
0
0
R/W Sleep Mode Selection
R/W Low Speed on Flag
R/W Direct Transfer on Flag
These bits select the mode to transit after the execution of
a SLEEP instruction, as well as bit SSBY of SYSCR1.
For details, see table 6.2.
4
3
2
MA2
MA1
MA0
0
0
0
R/W Active Mode Clock Select 2 to 0
R/W These bits select the operating clock frequency in active
and sleep modes. The operating clock frequency changes
to the set frequency after the SLEEP instruction is
executed.
R/W
0XX: φOSC
100: φOSC/8
101: φOSC/16
110: φOSC/32
111: φOSC/64
1
0
SA1
SA0
0
0
R/W Subactive Mode Clock Select 1 and 0
R/W These bits select the operating clock frequency in
subactive and subsleep modes. The operating clock
frequency changes to the set frequency after the SLEEP
instruction is executed.
00: φW/8
01: φW/4
1X: φW/2
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 79 of 400
6.1.3
MSTCR1 allows the on-chip peripheral modules to enter a standby state in module units.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description
Module Standby Control Register 1 (MSTCR1)
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
MSTIIC
MSTS3
MSTAD
R/W IIC Module Standby
IIC enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1
R/W SCI3 Module Standby
SCI3 enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1
R/W A/D Converter Module Standby
A/D converter enters standby mode when this bit is set to
1
3
MSTWD
0
R/W Watchdog Timer Module Standby
Watchdog timer enters standby mode when this bit is set
to 1.When the internal oscillator is selected for the
watchdog timer clock, the watchdog timer operates
regardless of the setting of this bit
2
1
0
MSTTW
MSTTV
MSTTA
0
0
0
R/W Timer W Module Standby
Timer W enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1
R/W Timer V Module Standby
Timer V enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1
R/W Timer A Module Standby
Timer A enters standby mode when this bit is set to 1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 80 of 400
6.2
Mode Transitions and States of LSI
Figure 6.1 shows the possible transitions among these operating modes. A transition is made from
the program execution state to the program halt state of the program by executing a SLEEP
instruction. Interrupts allow for returning from the program halt state to the program execution
state of the program. A direct transition between active mode and subactive mode, which are both
program execution states, can be made without halting the program. The operating frequency can
also be changed in the same modes by making a transition directly from active mode to active
mode, and from subactive mode to subactive mode. RES input enables transitions from a mode to
the reset state. Table 6.2 shows the transition conditions of each mode after the SLEEP instruction
is executed and a mode to return by an interrupt. Table 6.3 shows the internal states of the LSI in
each mode.
Reset state
Program halt state
Standby mode
Program execution state
Active mode
Program halt state
Sleep mode
Direct transition
interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
Interrupt
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
Direct
transition
interrupt
Direct
transition
interrupt
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
Subactive
mode
Subsleep mode
Interrupt
Direct transition
interrupt
Notes: 1. To make a transition to another mode by an interrupt, make sure interrupt handling is after the interrupt
is accepted.
2. Details on the mode transition conditions are given in table 6.2.
Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 81 of 400
Table 6.2 Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling
Transition Mode after
SLEEP Instruction
Execution
Transition Mode due to
Interrupt
DTON
SSBY
SMSEL
LSON
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
X
0
Sleep mode
Active mode
Subactive mode
Active mode
Subactive mode
Active mode
—
1
Subsleep mode
Standby mode
1
X
1
X
0*
Active mode (direct
transition)
X
X
1
Subactive mode (direct
transition)
—
Legend: X : Don’t care.
*
When a state transition is performed while SMSEL is 1, timer V, SCI3, and the A/D
converter are reset, and all registers are set to their initial values. To use these
functions after entering active mode, reset the registers.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 82 of 400
Table 6.3 Internal State in Each Operating Mode
Subactive
Mode
Subsleep
Mode
Function
Active Mode
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Sleep Mode
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Standby Mode
Halted
System clock oscillator
Subclock oscillator
Halted
Halted
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Functioning
Halted
CPU
operations
Instructions
Registers
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
RAM
IO ports
Register
contents are
retained, but
output is the
high-impedance
state.
External
interrupts
IRQ3 to IRQ0 Functioning
WKP5 to WKP0 Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Peripheral Timer A
functions
Functioning
Functioning if the timekeeping time-base
function is selected, and retained if not selected
Timer V
Timer W
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Reset
Reset
Reset
Retained (if internal clock φ is Retained
selected as a count clock, the
counter is incremented by a
subclock*)
Watchdog timer Functioning
Functioning
Retained (functioning if the internal oscillator is
selected as a count clock*)
SCI3
IIC
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Reset
Reset
Reset
Retained*
Reset
Retained
Reset
Retained
Reset
A/D converter Functioning
Note: * Registers can be read or written in subactive mode.
6.2.1
Sleep Mode
In sleep mode, CPU operation is halted but the on-chip peripheral modules function at the clock
frequency set by the MA2, MA1, and MA0 bits in SYSCR2. CPU register contents are retained.
When an interrupt is requested, sleep mode is cleared and interrupt exception handling starts.
Sleep mode is not cleared if the I bit of the condition code register (CCR) is set to 1 or the
requested interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register. After sleep mode is cleared, a
transition is made to active mode when the LSON bit in SYSCR2 is 0, and a transition is made to
subactive mode when the bit is 1.
When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and sleep mode is cleared.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 83 of 400
6.2.2
Standby Mode
In standby mode, the clock pulse generator stops, so the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules stop
functioning. However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, on-
chip RAM, and some on-chip peripheral module registers are retained. On-chip RAM contents
will be retained as long as the voltage set by the RAM data retention voltage is provided. The I/O
ports go to the high-impedance state.
Standby mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, the system clock pulse
generator starts. After the time set in bits STS2–STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed, and interrupt
exception handling starts. Standby mode is not cleared if the I bit of CCR is set to 1 or the
requested interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register.
When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals
are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the
RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator
output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.
6.2.3
Subsleep Mode
In subsleep mode, operation of the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules other than timer A is
halted. As long as a required voltage is applied, the contents of CPU registers, the on-chip RAM,
and some registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are retained. I/O ports keep the same states
as before the transition.
Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, subsleep mode is cleared
and interrupt exception handling starts. Subsleep mode is not cleared if the I bit of CCR is set to 1
or the requested interrupt is disabled in the interrupt enable register. After subsleep mode is
cleared, a transition is made to active mode when the LSON bit in SYSCR2 is 0, and a transition is
made to subactive mode when the bit is 1.
When the RES pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals
are supplied to the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the
RES pin must be kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator
output has stabilized, the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 84 of 400
6.2.4
Subactive Mode
The operating frequency of subactive mode is selected from øW/2, øW/4, and øW/8 by the SA1 and
SA0 bits in SYSCR2. After the SLEEP instruction is executed, the operating frequency changes to
the frequency which is set before the execution. When the SLEEP instruction is executed in
subactive mode, a transition to sleep mode, subsleep mode, standby mode, active mode, or
subactive mode is made, depending on the combination of SYSCR1 and SYSCR2. When the RES
pin goes low, the system clock pulse generator starts. Since system clock signals are supplied to
the entire chip as soon as the system clock pulse generator starts functioning, the RES pin must be
kept low until the pulse generator output stabilizes. After the pulse generator output has stabilized,
the CPU starts reset exception handling if the RES pin is driven high.
6.3
Operating Frequency in Active Mode
Operation in active mode is clocked at the frequency designated by the MA2, MA1, and MA0 bits
in SYSCR2. The operating frequency changes to the set frequency after SLEEP instruction
execution.
6.4
Direct Transition
The CPU can execute programs in two modes: active and subactive mode. A direct transition is a
transition between these two modes without stopping program execution. A direct transition can
be made by executing a SLEEP instruction while the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1. The direct
transition also enables operating frequency modification in active or subactive mode. After the
mode transition, direct transition interrupt exception handling starts.
If the direct transition interrupt is disabled in interrupt enable register 1, a transition is made
instead to sleep or subsleep mode. Note that if a direct transition is attempted while the I bit in
CCR is set to 1, sleep or subsleep mode will be entered, and the resulting mode cannot be cleared
by means of an interrupt.
6.4.1
Direct Transition from Active Mode to Subactive Mode
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (1).
Direct transition time = {(number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (number of internal
processing states)}× (tcyc before transition) + (number of interrupt exception handling states) ×
(tsubcyc after transition) (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 85 of 400
Example
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × tosc + 14 × 8tw = 3tosc + 112tw
(when the CPU operating clock of øosc → øw/8 is selected)
Legend
tosc: OSC clock cycle time
tw: watch clock cycle time
tcyc: system clock (ø) cycle time
tsubcyc: subclock (øSUB) cycle time
6.4.2
Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active Mode
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (2).
Direct transition time = {(number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (number of internal
processing states)} × (tsubcyc before transition) + {(waiting time set in bits STS2 to STS0) +
(number of interrupt exception handling states)} × (tcyc after transition)
(2)
Example
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8 tw + (8192 + 14) × tosc = 24tw + 8206 tosc
(when the CPU operating clock of øw/8 → øosc and a waiting time of 8192 states are selected)
Legend
tosc: OSC clock cycle time
tw: watch clock cycle time
tcyc: system clock (ø) cycle time
tsubcyc: subclock (øSUB) cycle time
6.5
Module Standby Function
The module-standby function can be set to any peripheral module. In module standby mode, the
clock supply to modules stops to enter the power-down mode. Module standby mode enables each
on-chip peripheral module to enter the standby state by setting a bit that corresponds to each
module to 1 and cancels the mode by clearing the bit to 0.
6.6
Usage Note
When subsleep mode is entered by setting the SMSEL bit to 1 while the subclock is not used (the
X1 pin is fixed), note that active mode cannot be re-entered by using an interrupt. To use a power-
down mode while a port is retained, connect the subclock to the X1 and X2 pins.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 86 of 400
Section 7 ROM
The features of the 32-kbyte flash memory built into the flash memory version are summarized
below.
•
Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block
units. The flash memory is configured as follows: 1 kbyte × 4 blocks and 28 kbytes × 1
block. To erase the entire flash memory, each block must be erased in turn.
•
•
Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 1,000 times.
On-board programming
On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built
into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user
program mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed.
•
•
Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM
programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode.
Automatic bit rate adjustment
For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match
the transfer bit rate of the host.
•
•
Programming/erasing protection
Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
Power-down mode
Operation of the power supply circuit can be partly halted in subactive mode. As a result,
flash memory can be read with low power consumption.
7.1
Block Configuration
Figure 7.1 shows the block configuration of 32-kbyte flash memory. The thick lines indicate
erasing units, the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The
flash memory is divided into 1 kbyte × 4 blocks and 28 kbytes × 1 block. Erasing is performed in
these units. Programming is performed in 128-byte units starting from an address with lower eight
bits H'00 or H'80.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 87 of 400
ROM3320A_000020020300
H'0000
H'0080
H'0001
H'0081
H'0002
H'0082
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'007F
H'00FF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0380
H'0400
H'0480
H'0381
H'0401
H'0481
H'0382
H'0402
H'0481
H'03FF
H'047F
H'04FF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0780
H'0800
H'0880
H'0781
H'0801
H'0881
H'0782
H'0802
H'0882
H'07FF
H'087F
H'08FF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0B80
H'0C00
H'0C80
H'0B81
H'0C01
H'0C81
H'0B82
H'0C02
H'0C82
H'0BFF
H'0C7F
H'0CFF
Erase unit
1kbyte
H'0F80
H'1000
H'1080
H'0F81
H'1001
H'1081
H'0F82
H'1002
H'1082
H'0FFF
H'107F
H'10FF
Erase unit
28 kbytes
H'7F80
H'7F81
H'7F82
H'7FFF
Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration
7.2
Register Descriptions
The flash memory has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1)
Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2)
Erase block register 1 (EBR1)
Flash memory power control register (FLPWCR)
Flash memory enable register (FENR)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 88 of 400
7.2.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify
mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 7.4, Flash
Memory Programming/Erasing.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
—
0
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
Software Write Enable
6
5
4
SWE
ESU
PSU
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, flash memory
programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is
cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all
EBR1 bits cannot be set.
0
0
R/W
R/W
Erase Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the
erase setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before
setting the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1.
Program Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the
program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1
before setting the P bit in FLMCR1.
3
2
1
EV
PV
E
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Erase-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-
verify mode is cancelled.
Program-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0,
program-verify mode is cancelled.
Erase
When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE=1 and
ESU=1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to erase
mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase mode is
cancelled.
0
P
0
R/W
Program
When this bit is set to 1, and while the SWE=1 and
PSU=1 bits are 1, the flash memory changes to
program mode. When it is cleared to 0, program
mode is cancelled.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 89 of 400
7.2.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a
read-only register, and should not be written to.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
FLER
0
R
Flash Memory Error
Indicates that an error has occurred during an
operation on flash memory (programming or erasing).
When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the
error-protection state.
See 7.5.3, Error Protection, for details.
Reserved
6 to 0 —
All 0
—
These bits are always read as 0.
7.2.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 specifies the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to H'00 when the SWE bit
in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit at a time, as this will cause all the bits in EBR1 to
be automatically cleared to 0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7 to 5 —
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
4
3
2
1
0
EB4
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 28 kbytes of H'1000 to
H'7FFF will be erased.
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0C00 to H'0FFF
will be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0800 to H'0BFF
will be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0400 to H'07FF
will be erased.
When this bit is set to 1, 1 kbyte of H'0000 to H'03FF
will be erased.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 90 of 400
7.2.4
Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)
FLPWCR enables or disables a transition to the flash memory power-down mode when the LSI
switches to subactive mode. There are two modes: mode in which operation of the power supply
circuit of flash memory is partly halted in power-down mode and flash memory can be read, and
mode in which even if a transition is made to subactive mode, operation of the power supply
circuit of flash memory is retained and flash memory can be read.
Bit
Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
PDWND
0
R/W
Power-Down Disable
When this bit is 0 and a transition is made to subactive
mode, the flash memory enters the power-down mode.
When this bit is 1, the flash memory remains in the
normal mode even after a transition is made to subactive
mode.
6 to 0 —
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
7.2.5
Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)
Bit 7 (FLSHE) in FENR enables or disables the CPU access to the flash memory control registers,
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and FLPWCR.
Bit
Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
FLSHE
0
R/W
Flash Memory Control Register Enable
Flash memory control registers can be accessed when
this bit is set to 1. Flash memory control registers cannot
be accessed when this bit is set to 0.
6 to 0 —
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
7.3
On-Board Programming Modes
There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables on-
board programming/erasing, and programmer mode, in which programming/erasing is performed
with a PROM programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user
program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, the series of HD64F3664 changes to a mode
depending on the TEST pin settings, NMI pin settings, and input level of each port, as shown in
table 7.1. The input level of each pin must be defined four states before the reset ends.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 91 of 400
When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program
transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM
via SCI3. After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is executed.
This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible return when
programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program mode,
individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase control
program prepared by the user.
Table 7.1 Setting Programming Modes
TEST
NMI
1
P85
X
PB0
X
PB1
X
PB2
X
LSI State after Reset End
User Mode
0
0
1
0
1
X
X
X
Boot Mode
X
X
0
0
0
Programmer Mode
Legend: X: Don’t care.
7.3.1
Boot Mode
Table 7.2 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming
control program.
1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in
the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the
description in section 7.4, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
2. SCI3 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop
bit, and no parity.
3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous
SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then
calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI3 bit rate to match that
of the host. The reset should end with the RxD pin high. The RxD and TxD pins should be
pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100
states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period.
4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the
completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication
(H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could
not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's
transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between
the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit
rate and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 7.3.
5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'F780 to
H'FEEF is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the host.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 92 of 400
The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to the
programming control program.
6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations
by SCI3 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value
remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer
of write data or verify data with the host. The TxD pin is high (PCR22 = 1, P22 = 1). The
contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the
programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the
programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in
subroutine calls, etc.
7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at
least 20 states, and then setting the TEST pin and NMI pin. Boot mode is also cleared when a
WDT overflow occurs.
8. Do not change the TEST pin and NMI pin input levels in boot mode.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 93 of 400
Table 7.2 Boot Mode Operation
Host Operation
Communication Contents
LSI Operation
Processing Contents
Processing Contents
Branches to boot program at reset-start.
Boot program initiation
. . .
H'00, H'00
H'00
Continuously transmits data H'00
at specified bit rate.
• Measures low-level period of receive data
H'00.
• Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI3.
• Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment
end indication.
H'00
Transmits data H'55 when data H'00
is received error-free.
H'55
H'FF
H'AA
Boot program
erase error
Checks flash memory data, erases all flash
memory blocks in case of written data
existing, and transmits data H'AA to host.
(If erase could not be done, transmits data
H'FF to host and aborts operation.)
H'AA reception
Upper bytes, lower bytes
Echoback
Transmits number of bytes (N) of
programming control program to be
transferred as 2-byte data
(low-order byte following high-order
byte)
Echobacks the 2-byte data
received to host.
Echobacks received data to host and also
transfers it to RAM.
(repeated for N times)
H'XX
Transmits 1-byte of programming
control program (repeated for N times)
Echoback
H'AA
Transmits data H'AA to host when data H'55
is received.
H'AA reception
Branches to programming control program
transferred to on-chip RAM and starts
execution.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 94 of 400
Table 7.3 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
Host Bit Rate
19,200 bps
9,600 bps
System Clock Frequency Range of LSI
16 MHz
8 to 16 MHz
4 to 16 MHz
2 to 16 MHz
4,800 bps
2,400 bps
7.3.2
Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode
On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user
program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching
conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must
contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase
control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during
programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot
mode. Figure 7.2 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode.
Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 7.4,
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
Reset-start
No
Program/erase?
Yes
Transfer user program/erase control
program to RAM
Branch to flash memory application
program
Branch to user program/erase control
program in RAM
Execute user program/erase control
program (flash memory rewrite)
Branch to flash memory application
program
Figure 7.2 Programming/Erasing Flowchart Example in User Program Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 95 of 400
7.4
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase flash memory in the on-
board programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one
of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify
mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control
program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform
programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in
accordance with the descriptions in section 7.4.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 7.4.2,
Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively.
7.4.1
Program/Program-Verify
When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown
in figure 7.3 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability.
1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which
programming has already been performed.
2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be
performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128-
byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform
reprogramming data computation according to table 7.4, and additional programming data
computation according to table 7.5.
4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or
additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte
data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory
destination area must be H'00 or H'80.
5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Table 7.6 shows the
allowable programming times.
6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.
An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed.
7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2 bits
are B'00. Verify data can be read in words or in longwords from the address to which a
dummy write was performed.
8. The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence of the same bit
is 1,000.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 96 of 400
Write pulse application subroutine
Apply Write Pulse
START
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 1 µs
WDT enable
Set PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait 50 µs
Store 128-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
*
n= 1
Set P bit in FLMCR1
m= 0
Wait (Wait time=programming time)
Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram
data area consecutively to flash memory
Clear P bit in FLMCR1
Wait 5 µs
Apply Write pulse
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait 4 µs
Wait 5 µs
Set block start address as
verify address
Disable WDT
End Sub
n ← n + 1
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
*
Read verify data
Increment address
Verify data =
write data?
No
m = 1
Yes
No
n ≤ 6 ?
Yes
Additional-programming data computation
Reprogram data computation
128-byte
data verification completed?
No
Yes
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1
Wait 2 µs
No
n ≤ 6?
Yes
Successively write 128-byte data from additional-
programming data area in RAM to flash memory
Sub-Routine-Call
Apply Write Pulse
No
Yes
m= 0 ?
n ≤ 1000 ?
Yes
No
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 100 µs
Wait 100 µs
End of programming
Programming failure
Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during the following 1. and 2. periods.
1. A period between 128-byte data programming to flash memory and the P bit clearing
2. A period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading
Figure 7.3 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 97 of 400
Table 7.4 Reprogram Data Computation Table
Program Data
Verify Data
Reprogram Data
Comments
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
Programming completed
Reprogram bit
—
Remains in erased state
Table 7.5 Additional-Program Data Computation Table
Additional-Program
Reprogram Data
Verify Data
Data
Comments
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Additional-program bit
No additional programming
No additional programming
No additional programming
Table 7.6 Programming Time
Programming
n
In Additional
Programming
(Number of Writes) Time
Comments
1 to 6
30
10
—
7 to 1,000
200
Note: Time shown in µs.
7.4.2
Erase/Erase-Verify
When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 7.4 should be
followed.
1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.
2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block
register (EBR1). To erase multiple blocks, each block must be erased in turn.
3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time.
4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An
overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed.
5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write
was performed.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 98 of 400
6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-
verify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify
sequence is 100.
7.4.3
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed
or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons:
1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing
algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured.
2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during
programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions.
3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be
carried out.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 99 of 400
Erase start
SWE bit ← 1
Wait 1 µs
n ← 1
Set EBR1
Enable WDT
ESU bit ← 1
Wait 100 µs
E bit ← 1
Wait 10 µs
E bit ← 0
Wait 10 µs
ESU bit ← 10
10 µs
Disable WDT
EV bit ← 1
Wait 20 µs
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
*
n ← n + 1
Read verify data
No
Verify data + all 1s ?
Yes
Increment address
No
Last address of block ?
Yes
EV bit ← 0
Wait 4 µs
EV bit ← 0
Wait 4µs
No
Yes
n ≤100 ?
All erase block erased ?
Yes
No
Yes
SWE bit ← 0
SWE bit ← 0
Wait 100 µs
Wait 100 µs
End of erasing
Erase failure
Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during a period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading.
Figure 7.4 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 100 of 400
7.5
Program/Erase Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
7.5.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or standby
mode. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2),
and erase block register 1 (EBR1) are initialized. In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not
entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of
a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse width specified in the AC
Characteristics section.
7.5.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks
by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit
in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase
block register 1 (EBR1), erase protection can be set for individual blocks. When EBR1 is set to
H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks.
7.5.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER
bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered.
•
When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing
(including vector read and instruction fetch)
•
•
Immediately after exception handling excluding a reset during programming/erasing
When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing
The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, and EBR1 settings are retained, however program mode or erase mode
is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-
entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit setting is enabled, and a transition
can be made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a power-on reset.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 101 of 400
7.6
Programmer Mode
In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a
socket adapter, just as a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the MCU
device type with the on-chip Hitachi 64-kbyte flash memory (FZTAT64V5).
7.7
Power-Down States for Flash Memory
In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states:
•
•
Normal operating mode
The flash memory can be read and written to at high speed.
Power-down operating mode
The power supply circuit of flash memory can be partly halted. As a result, flash memory can
be read with low power consumption.
•
Standby mode
All flash memory circuits are halted.
Table 7.7 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash
memory. In subactive mode, the flash memory can be set to operate in power-down mode with the
PDWND bit in FLPWCR. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from
power-down mode or standby mode, a period to stabilize operation of the power supply circuits
that were stopped is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, bits
STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 must be set to provide a wait time of at least 20 µs, even when the
external clock is being used.
Table 7.7 Flash Memory Operating States
Flash Memory Operating State
LSI Operating State
PDWND = 0 (Initial value)
Normal operating mode
Power-down mode
Normal operating mode
Standby mode
PDWND = 1
Active mode
Normal operating mode
Normal operating mode
Normal operating mode
Standby mode
Subactive mode
Sleep mode
Subsleep mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 102 of 400
Section 8 RAM
This LSI has an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit
data bus, enabling two-state access by the CPU to both byte data and word data.
Product Classification
Flash memory version
(F-ZTATTM version)
RAM Size
2 kbytes
2 kbytes
1 kbyte
RAM Address
H8/3664N
H8/3664F
H8/3664
H8/3663
H8/3662
H8/3661
H8/3660
H'F780 to H'FF7F*
H'F780 to H'FF7F*
H'FB80 to H'FF7F
H'FB80 to H'FF7F
H'FD80 to H'FF7F
H'FD80 to H'FF7F
H'FD80 to H'FF7F
Mask ROM version
1 kbyte
512 bytes
512 bytes
512 bytes
Note: * Area H'F780 to H'FB7F must not be accessed.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 103 of 400
RAM0300A_000020020300
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 104 of 400
Section 9 I/O Ports
The series of this LSI has twenty-nine general I/O ports (twenty-seven ports for H8/3664N) and
eight general input-only ports. Port 8 is a large current port, which can drive 20 mA (@VOL = 1.5
V) when a low level signal is output. Any of these ports can become an input port immediately
after a reset. They can also be used as I/O pins of the on-chip peripheral modules or external
interrupt input pins, and these functions can be switched depending on the register settings. The
registers for selecting these functions can be divided into two types: those included in I/O ports
and those included in each on-chip peripheral module. General I/O ports are comprised of the port
control register for controlling inputs/outputs and the port data register for storing output data and
can select inputs/outputs in bit units. For functions in each port, see appendix B.1, I/O Port Block
Diagrams. For the execution of bit manipulation instructions to the port control register and port
data register, see section 2.8.3, Bit Manipulation Instruction.
9.1
Port 1
Port 1 is a general I/O port also functioning as IRQ interrupt input pins, a timer A output pin, and
a timer V input pin. Figure 9.1 shows its pin configuration.
P17/
P16/
P15/
P14/
P12
/TRGV
Port 1
P11
P10/TMOW
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration
Port 1 has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Port mode register 1 (PMR1)
Port control register 1 (PCR1)
Port data register 1 (PDR1)
Port pull-up control register 1 (PUCR1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 105 of 400
9.1.1
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
PMR1 switches the functions of pins in port 1 and port 2.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
IRQ3
IRQ2
IRQ1
IRQ0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
P17/IRQ3/TRGV Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P17/IRQ3/TRGV is used as
P17 or as IRQ3/TRGV.
0: General I/O port
1: IRQ3/TRGV input pin
P16/IRQ2 Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P16/IRQ2 is used as P16 or as
IRQ2.
0: General I/O port
1: IRQ2 input pin
P15/IRQ1 Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P15/IRQ1 is used as P15 or as
IRQ1.
0: General I/O port
1: IRQ1 input pin
P14/IRQ0 Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P14/IRQ0 is used as P14 or as
IRQ0.
0: General I/O port
1: IRQ0 input pin
3
2
1
1
1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
P22/TXD Pin Function Switch
TXD
R/W
This bit selects whether pin P22/TXD is used as P22 or as
TXD.
0: General I/O port
1: TXD output pin
0
TMOW
0
R/W
P10/TMOW Pin Function Switch
This bit selects whether pin P10/TMOW is used as P10 or
as TMOW.
0: General I/O port
1: TMOW output pin
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 106 of 400
9.1.2
Port Control Register 1 (PCR1)
PCR1 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 1.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR17
PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
When the corresponding pin is designated in PMR1 as a
general I/O pin, setting a PCR1 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input port.
Bit 3 is a reserved bit.
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
9.1.3
Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)
PDR1 is a general I/O port data register of port 1.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P17
P16
P15
P14
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR1 stores output data for port 1 pins.
If PDR1 is read while PCR1 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR1 are read. If PDR1 is read while PCR1 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR1.
Bit 3 is a reserved bit. This bit is always read as 1.
P12
P11
P10
R/W
R/W
R/W
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 107 of 400
9.1.4
Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)
PUCR1 controls the pull-up MOS in bit units of the pins set as the input ports.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PUCR17
PUCR16
PUCR15
PUCR14
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
R/W Only bits for which PCR1 is cleared are valid. The pull-up
MOS of P17 to P14 and P12 to P10 pins enter the on-
state when these bits are set to 1, while they enter the off-
state when these bits are cleared to 0.
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit 3 is a reserved bit. This bit is always read as 1.
PUCR12
PUCR11
PUCR10
R/W
R/W
R/W
9.1.5
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P17/IRQ3/TRGV pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
IRQ3
PCR1
PCR17
Pin Function
Setting value 0
0
1
X
P17 input pin
P17 output pin
1
IRQ3 input/TRGV input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
P16/IRQ2 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
IRQ2
PCR1
PCR16
Pin Function
P16 input pin
P16 output pin
IRQ2 input pin
Setting value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 108 of 400
P15/I
RQ
1
pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
IRQ1
PCR1
PCR15
Pin Function
P15 input pin
P15 output pin
IRQ1 input pin
Setting value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P14/IRQ0 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
IRQ0
PCR1
PCR14
Pin Function
P14 input pin
P14 output pin
IRQ0 input pin
Setting value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P12 pin
Register
PCR1
Bit Name
PCR12
Pin Function
Setting value
0
1
P12 input pin
P12 output pin
P11 pin
Register
PCR1
Bit Name
PCR11
Pin Function
P11 input pin
P11 output pin
Setting value
0
1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 109 of 400
P10/TMOW pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
TMOW
PCR1
PCR10
Pin Function
P10 input pin
Setting value 0
0
1
X
P10 output pin
TMOW output pin
1
Legend X: Don't care.
9.2
Port 2
Port 2 is a general I/O port also functioning as a SCI3 I/O pin. Each pin of the port 2 is shown in
figure 9.2. The register settings of PMR1 and SCI3 have priority for functions of the pins for both
uses.
P22/TXD
P21/RXD
Port 2
P20/SCK3
Figure 9.2 Port 2 Pin Configuration
Port 2 has the following registers.
•
•
Port control register 2 (PCR2)
Port data register 2 (PDR2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 110 of 400
9.2.1
Port Control Register 2 (PCR2)
PCR2 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 2.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
W
W
W
Reserved
PCR22
PCR21
PCR20
When each of the port 2 pins P22 to P20 functions as an
general I/O port, setting a PCR2 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input port.
0
0
9.2.2
Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)
PDR2 is a general I/O port data register of port 2.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
P22
P21
P20
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR2 stores output data for port 2 pins.
PDR2 is read while PCR2 bits are set to 1, the value stored
in PDR2 is read. If PDR2 is read while PCR2 bits are
cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value
stored in PDR2.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 111 of 400
9.2.3
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P22/TXD pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR1
TXD
PCR2
PCR22
Pin Function
P22 input pin
P22 output pin
TXD output pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P21/RXD pin
Register
Bit Name
SCR3
RE
PCR2
PCR21
Pin Function
P21 input pin
P21 output pin
RXD input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P20/SCK3 pin
Register
SCR3
CKE1
0
SMR
COM
0
PCR2
Bit Name
Setting Value
CKE0
PCR20
Pin Function
P20 input pin
0
0
1
P20 output pin
SCK3 output pin
SCK3 output pin
SCK3 input pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 112 of 400
9.3
Port 5
Port 5 is a general I/O port also functioning as an I2C bus interface I/O pin, an A/D trigger input
pin, wakeup interrupt input pin. Each pin of the port 5 is shown in figure 9.3. The register setting
of the I2C bus interface register has priority for functions of the pins P57/SCL and P56/SDA. Since
the output buffer for pins P56 and P57 has the NMOS push-pull structure, it differs from an output
buffer with the CMOS structure in the high-level output characteristics (see section 20, Electrical
Characteristics). The H8/3664N does not have P57 and P56.
H8/3664
H8/3664N
P57/SCL
P56/SDA
P55/
SCL
SDA
P55/
P54/
P53/
P52/
P51/
P50/
/
/
P54/
Port 5
Port 5
P53/
P52/
P51/
P50/
Figure 9.3 Port 5 Pin Configuration
Port 5 has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
Port mode register 5 (PMR5)
Port control register 5 (PCR5)
Port data register 5 (PDR5)
Port pull-up control register 5 (PUCR5)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 113 of 400
9.3.1
Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
PMR5 switches the functions of pins in port 5.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description
7
6
5
0
0
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
WKP5
R/W P55/WKP5/ADTRG Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P55/WKP5/ADTRG is used as P55 or as
WKP5/ADTRG input.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP5/ADTRG input pin
4
3
2
1
0
WKP4
WKP3
WKP2
WKP1
WKP0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W P54/WKP4 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P54/WKP4 is used as P54 or as WKP4.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP4 input pin
R/W P53/WKP3 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P53/WKP3 is used as P53 or as WKP3.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP3 input pin
R/W P52/WKP2 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P52/WKP2 is used as P52 or as WKP2.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP2 input pin
R/W P51/WKP1 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P51/WKP1 is used as P51 or as WKP1.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP1 input pin
R/W P50/WKP0 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P50/WKP0 is used as P50 or as WKP0.
0: General I/O port
1: WKP0 input pin
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 114 of 400
9.3.2
Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)
PCR5 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 5.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR57
PCR56
PCR55
PCR54
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
When each of the port 5 pins P57 to P50 functions as an
general I/O port, setting a PCR5 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input port.
Note: Do not set PCR57 and PCR56 to 1 for H8/3664N.
9.3.3
Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)
PDR5 is a general I/O port data register of port 5.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Stores output data for port 5 pins.
If PDR5 is read while PCR5 bits are set to 1, the value
stored in PDR5 are read. If PDR5 is read while PCR5 bits
are cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the
value stored in PDR5.
Note: Do not set P57 and P56 to 1 for H8/3664N.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 115 of 400
9.3.4
Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)
PUCR5 controls the pull-up MOS in bit units of the pins set as the input ports.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Only bits for which PCR5 is cleared are valid. The pull-up
MOS of the corresponding pins enter the on-state when
these bits are set to 1, while they enter the off-state when
these bits are cleared to 0.
9.3.5
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P57/SCL pin
Register
Bit Name
ICCR
ICE
PCR5
PCR57
Pin Function
P57 input pin
P57 output pin
SCL I/O pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
SCL performs the NMOS open-drain output, that enables a direct bus drive.
P56/SDA pin
Register
Bit Name
ICCR
ICE
PCR5
PCR56
Pin Function
P56 input pin
P56 output pin
SDA I/O pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
SDA performs the NMOS open-drain output, that enables a direct bus drive.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 116 of 400
P55/WKP5
/A
D
T
RG
pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP5
PCR5
PCR55
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
P55 input pin
P55 output pin
1
WKP5/ADTRG input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
P54/WKP4 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP4
PCR5
PCR54
Pin Function
P54 input pin
P54 output pin
WKP4 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P53/WKP3 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP3
PCR5
PCR53
Pin Function
P53 input pin
P53 output pin
WKP3 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P52/WKP2 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP2
PCR5
PCR52
Pin Function
P52 input pin
P52 output pin
WKP2 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 117 of 400
P51/WK
P1
pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP1
PCR5
PCR51
Pin Function
P51 input pin
P51 output pin
WKP1 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
P50/WKP0 pin
Register
Bit Name
PMR5
WKP0
PCR5
PCR50
Pin Function
P50 input pin
P50 output pin
WKP0 input pin
Setting Value 0
0
1
X
1
Legend X: Don't care.
9.4
Port 7
Port 7 is a general I/O port also functioning as a timer V I/O pin. Each pin of the port 7 is shown
in figure 9.4. The register setting of TCSRV in timer V has priority for functions of pin
P76/TMOV. The pins, P75/TMCIV and P74/TMRIV, are also functioning as timer V input ports
that are connected to the timer V regardless of the register setting of port 7.
P76/TMOV
Port 7
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
Figure 9.4 Port 7 Pin Configuration
Port 7 has the following registers.
•
•
Port control register 7 (PCR7)
Port data register 7 (PDR7)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 118 of 400
9.4.1
Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)
PCR7 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 7.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
0
W
W
W
Reserved
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
Setting a PCR7 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input port. Note that the TCSRV setting of the timer V has
priority for deciding input/output direction of the P76/TMOV
pin.
0
0
3
2
1
0
Reserved
9.4.2
Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)
PDR7 is a general I/O port data register of port 7.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
1
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
PDR7 stores output data for port 7 pins.
6
5
4
P76
P75
P74
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR7 is read while PCR7 bits are set to 1, the value stored
in PDR7 is read. If PDR7 is read while PCR7 bits are
cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value
stored in PDR7.
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 119 of 400
9.4.3
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P76/TMOV pin
Register
Bit Name
TCSRV
PCR7
OS3 to OS0 PCR76
Pin Function
P76 input pin
Setting Value 0000
0
1
X
P76 output pin
TMOV output pin
Other than
the above
values
Legend X: Don't care.
P75/TMCIV pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR7
PCR75
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
1
P75 input/TMCIV input pin
P75 output/TMCIV input pin
P74/TMRIV pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR7
PCR74
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
1
P74 input/TMRIV input pin
P74 output/TMRIV input pin
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 120 of 400
9.5
Port 8
Port 8 is a general I/O port also functioning as a timer W I/O pin. Each pin of the port 8 is shown
in figure 9.5. The register setting of the timer W has priority for functions of the pins P84/FTIOD,
P83/FTIOC, P82/FTIOB, and P81/FTIOA. P80/FTCI also functions as a timer W input port that is
connected to the timer W regardless of the register setting of port 8.
P87
P86
P85
P84/FTIOD
Port 8
P83/FTIOC
P82/FTIOB
P81/FTIOA
P80/FTCI
Figure 9.5 Port 8 Pin Configuration
Port 8 has the following registers.
•
•
Port control register 8 (PCR8)
Port data register 8 (PDR8)
9.5.1
Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)
PCR8 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 8.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCR87
PCR86
PCR85
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
When each of the port 8 pins P87 to P80 functions as an
general I/O port, setting a PCR8 bit to 1 makes the
corresponding pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input port.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 121 of 400
9.5.2
Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)
PDR8 is a general I/O port data register of port 8.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
PDR8 stores output data for port 8 pins.
PDR8 is read while PCR8 bits are set to 1, the value stored
in PDR8 is read. If PDR8 is read while PCR8 bits are
cleared to 0, the pin states are read regardless of the value
stored in PDR8.
9.5.3
Pin Functions
The correspondence between the register specification and the port functions is shown below.
P87 pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR8
PCR87
Pin Function
P87 input pin
P87 output pin
Setting Value 0
1
P86 pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR8
PCR86
Pin Function
P86 input pin
P86 output pin
Setting Value 0
1
P85 pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR8
PCR85
Pin Function
P85 input pin
P85 output pin
Setting Value 0
1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 122 of 400
P84/FTIOD pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR1
IOD2
PCR8
IOD1
IOD0
PCR84
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P84 input/FTIOD input pin
P84 output/FTIOD input pin
FTIOD output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOD output pin
P84 input/FTIOD input pin
P84 output/FTIOD input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
P83/FTIOC pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR1
IOC2
PCR8
IOC1
IOC0
PCR83
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P83 input/FTIOC input pin
P83 output/FTIOC input pin
FTIOC output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOC output pin
P83 input/FTIOC input pin
P83 output/FTIOC input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
P82/FTIOB pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR0
IOB2
PCR8
IOB1
IOB0
PCR82
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
P82 input/FTIOB input pin
P82 output/FTIOB input pin
FTIOB output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
1
X
X
FTIOB output pin
P82 input/FTIOB input pin
P82 output/FTIOB input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 123 of 400
P81/FTIOA pin
Register
Bit Name
TIOR0
IOA2
PCR8
IOA1
IOA0
PCR81
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
0
0
0
1
X
X
0
1
X
X
0
1
P81 input/FTIOA input pin
P81 output/FTIOA input pin
FTIOA output pin
0
0
1
0
1
X
FTIOA output pin
P81 input/FTIOA input pin
P81 output/FTIOA input pin
Legend X: Don't care.
P80/FTCI pin
Register
Bit Name
PCR8
PCR80
Pin Function
Setting Value 0
1
P80 input/FTCI input pin
P80 output/FTCI input pin
9.6
Port B
Port B is an input port also functioning as an A/D converter analog input pin. Each pin of the port
B is shown in figure 9.6.
PB7/AN7
PB6/AN6
PB5/AN5
PB4/AN4
Port B
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2
PB1/AN1
PB0/AN0
Figure 9.6 Port B Pin Configuration
Port B has the following register.
•
Port data register B (PDRB)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 124 of 400
9.6.1
Port Data Register B (PDRB)
PDRB is a general input-only port data register of port B.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
The input value of each pin is read by reading this register.
However, if a port B pin is designated as an analog input
channel by ADCSR in A/D converter, 0 is read.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 125 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 126 of 400
Section 10 Timer A
Timer A is an 8-bit timer with interval timing and real-time clock time-base functions. The clock
time-base function is available when a 32.768kHz crystal oscillator is connected. Figure 10.1
shows a block diagram of timer A.
10.1
Features
•
•
•
Timer A can be used as an interval timer or a clock time base.
An interrupt is requested when the counter overflows.
Any of eight clock signals can be output from pin TMOW: 32.768 kHz divided by 32, 16, 8, or
4 (1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz), or the system clock divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4.
Interval Timer
Choice of eight internal clock sources (φ/8192, φ/4096, φ/2048, φ/512, φ/256, φ/128, φ/32, φ8)
Clock Time Base
•
•
Choice of four overflow periods (1 s, 0.5 s, 0.25 s, 31.25 ms) when timer A is used as a clock
time base (using a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 127 of 400
TIM08A0A_000020020300
1/4
PSW
TMA
øW
ø
W/4
ø
ø
ø
ø
W/32
W/16
W/8
øW/128
W/4
TCA
TMOW
øW/32
ø/8192, ø/4096,
ø
ø
ø
W/16
W/8
W/4
ø/2048, ø/512,
ø/256, ø/128,
ø/32, ø/8
ø
PSS
IRRTA
Legend
TMA: Timer mode register A
TCA: Timer counter A
IRRTA: Timer A overflow interrupt request flag
PSW: Prescaler W
PSS:
Prescaler S
Note: * Can be selected only when the prescaler W output (ø /128) is used as the TCA input clock.
W
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of Timer A
10.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 10.1 shows the timer A input/output pin.
Table 10.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation I/O
TMOW Output
Function
Clock output
Output of waveform generated by timer A output
circuit
10.3
Register Descriptions
Timer A has the following registers.
•
•
Timer mode register A (TMA)
Timer counter A (TCA)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 128 of 400
10.3.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA)
TMA selects the operating mode, the divided clock output, and the input clock.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
TMA7
TMA6
TMA5
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Output Select 7 to 5
These bits select the clock output at the TMOW pin.
000: φ/32
001: φ/16
010: φ/8
011: φ/4
100: φw/32
101: φw/16
110: φw/8
111: φw/4
For details on clock outputs, see section 10.4.3, Clock
Output.
4
3
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Internal Clock Select 3
TMA3
R/W
This bit selects the operating mode of the timer A.
0: Functions as an interval timer to count the outputs of
prescaler S.
1: Functions as a clock-time base to count the outputs of
prescaler W.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 129 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
2
1
0
TMA2
TMA1
TMA0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Internal Clock Select 2 to 0
These bits select the clock input to TCA when TMA3 = 0.
000: φ/8192
001: φ/4096
010: φ/2048
011: φ/512
100: φ/256
101: φ/128
110: φ/32
111: φ/8
These bits select the overflow period when TMA3 = 1
(when a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator with is used as φW).
000: 1s
001: 0.5 s
010: 0.25 s
011: 0.03125 s
1XX: Both PSW and TCA are reset
Legend X: Don't care.
10.3.2 Timer Counter A (TCA)
TCA is an 8-bit readable up-counter, which is incremented by internal clock input. The clock
source for input to this counter is selected by bits TMA3 to TMA0 in TMA. TCA values can be
read by the CPU in active mode, but cannot be read in subactive mode. When TCA overflows, the
IRRTA bit in interrupt request register 1 (IRR1) is set to 1. TCA is cleared by setting bits TMA3
and TMA2 in TMA to B’11. TCA is initialized to H'00.
10.4 Operation
10.4.1 Interval Timer Operation
When bit TMA3 in TMA is cleared to 0, timer A functions as an 8-bit interval timer.
Upon reset, TCA is cleared to H'00 and bit TMA3 is cleared to 0, so up-counting of timer A
resume immediately as an interval timer. The clock input to timer A is selected by bits TMA2 to
TMA0 in TMA; any of eight internal clock signals output by prescaler S can be selected.
After the count value in TCA reaches H'FF, the next clock signal input causes timer A to
overflow, setting bit IRRTA to 1 in interrupt Flag Register 1 (IRR1). If IENTA = 1 in interrupt
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 130 of 400
enable register 1 (IENR1), a CPU interrupt is requested. At overflow, TCA returns to H'00 and
starts counting up again. In this mode timer A functions as an interval timer that generates an
overflow output at intervals of 256 input clock pulses.
10.4.2 Clock Time Base Operation
When bit TMA3 in TMA is set to 1, timer A functions as a clock-timer base by counting clock
signals output by prescaler W. When a clock signal is input after the TCA counter value has
become H'FF, timer A overflows and IRRTA in IRR1 is set to 1. At that time, an interrupt request
is generated to the CPU if IENTA in the interrupt enable register 1 (IENR1) is 1. The overflow
period of timer A is set by bits TMA1 and TMA0 in TMA. A choice of four periods is available.
In clock time base operation (TMA3 = 1), setting bit TMA2 to 1 clears both TCA and prescaler W
to H'00.
10.4.3 Clock Output
Setting bit TMOW in port mode register 1 (PMR1) to 1 causes a clock signal to be output at pin
TMOW. Eight different clock output signals can be selected by means of bits TMA7 to TMA5 in
TMA. The system clock divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 can be output in active mode and sleep mode. A
32.768 kHz signal divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 can be output in active mode, sleep mode, and
subactive mode.
10.5
Usage Note
When the clock time base function is selected as the internal clock of TCA in active mode or sleep
mode, the internal clock is not synchronous with the system clock, so it is synchronized by a
synchronizing circuit. This may result in a maximum error of 1/ø (s) in the count cycle.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 131 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 132 of 400
Section 11 Timer V
Timer V is an 8-bit timer based on an 8-bit counter. Timer V counts external events. Compare-
match signals with two registers can also be used to reset the counter, request an interrupt, or
output a pulse signal with an arbitrary duty cycle. Counting can be initiated by a trigger input at
the TRGV pin, enabling pulse output control to be synchronized to the trigger, with an arbitrary
delay from the trigger input. Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of timer V.
11.1
Features
•
Choice of seven clock signals is available.
Choice of six internal clock sources (ø/128, ø/64, ø/32, ø/16, ø/8, ø/4) or an external clock.
•
•
Counter can be cleared by compare match A or B, or by an external reset signal. If the count
stop function is selected, the counter can be halted when cleared.
Timer output is controlled by two independent compare match signals, enabling pulse output
with an arbitrary duty cycle, PWM output, and other applications.
•
•
Three interrupt sources: compare match A, compare match B, timer overflow
Counting can be initiated by trigger input at the TRGV pin. The rising edge, falling edge, or
both edges of the TRGV input can be selected.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 133 of 400
TIM08V0A_000020020300
TCRV1
TCORB
Trigger
control
TRGV
TMCIV
ø
Comparator
Clock select
TCNTV
Comparator
TCORA
PSS
Clear
control
TCRV0
TMRIV
Interrupt
request
control
Output
control
TCSRV
TMOV
CMIA
CMIB
OVI
Legend:
TCORA:
TCORB:
TCNTV:
TCSRV:
TCRV0:
TCRV1:
PSS:
Time constant register A
Time constant register B
Timer counter V
Timer control/status register V
Timer control register V0
Timer control register V1
Prescaler S
CMIA:
CMIB:
OVI:
Compare-match interrupt A
Compare-match interrupt B
Overflow interupt
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer V
11.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 11.1 shows the timer V pin configuration.
Table 11.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
Timer V output
Timer V clock input
Timer V reset input
Trigger input
TMOV
TMCIV
TMRIV
TRGV
Output
Input
Input
Input
Timer V waveform output
Clock input to TCNTV
External input to reset TCNTV
Trigger input to initiate counting
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 134 of 400
11.3
Register Descriptions
Time V has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer counter V (TCNTV)
Timer constant register A (TCORA)
Timer constant register B (TCORB)
Timer control register V0 (TCRV0)
Timer control/status register V (TCSRV)
Timer control register V1 (TCRV1)
11.3.1 Timer Counter V (TCNTV)
TCNTV is an 8-bit up-counter. The clock source is selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in timer
control register V0 (TCRV0). The TCNTV value can be read and written by the CPU at any time.
TCNTV can be cleared by an external reset input signal, or by compare match A or B. The
clearing signal is selected by bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0.
When TCNTV overflows, OVF is set to 1 in timer control/status register V (TCSRV).
TCNTV is initialized to H'00.
11.3.2 Time Constant Registers A and B (TCORA, TCORB)
TCORA and TCORB have the same function.
TCORA and TCORB are 8-bit read/write registers.
TCORA and TCNTV are compared at all times. When the TCORA and TCNTV contents match,
CMFA is set to 1 in TCSRV. If CMIEA is also set to 1 in TCRV0, a CPU interrupt is requested.
Note that they must not be compared during the T3 state of a TCORA write cycle.
Timer output from the TMOV pin can be controlled by the identifying signal (compare match A)
and the settings of bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV.
TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 135 of 400
11.3.3 Timer Control Register V0 (TCRV0)
TCRV0 selects the input clock signals of TCNTV, specifies the clearing conditions of TCNTV,
and controls each interrupt request.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
CMIEB
CMIEA
OVIE
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Compare Match Interrupt Enable B
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the CMFB
bit in TCSRV is enabled.
Compare Match Interrupt Enable A
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the CMFA
bit in TCSRV is enabled.
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, interrupt request from the OVF bit
in TCSRV is enabled.
4
3
CCLR1
CCLR0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Counter Clear 1 and 0
These bits specify the clearing conditions of TCNTV.
00: Clearing is disabled
01: Cleared by compare match A
10: Cleared by compare match B
11: Cleared on the rising edge of the TMRIV pin. The
operation of TCNTV after clearing depends on TRGE in
TCRV1.
2
1
0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
These bits select clock signals to input to TCNTV and the
counting condition in combination with ICKS0 in TCRV1.
Refer to table 11.2.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 136 of 400
Table 11.2 Clock Signals to Input to TCNTV and Counting Conditions
TCRV0
Bit 2
CKS2
0
TCRV1
Bit 1
CKS1
0
Bit 0
CKS0
0
Bit 0
ICKS0
Description
0
Clock input prohibited
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/8, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/16, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/32, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/64, falling edge
Internal clock: counts on φ/128, falling edge
Clock input prohibited
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
External clock: counts on rising edge
External clock: counts on falling edge
External clock: counts on rising and falling edge
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 137 of 400
11.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register V (TCSRV)
TCSRV indicates the status flag and controls outputs by using a compare match.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
CMFB
CMFA
OVF
0
0
0
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
Compare Match Flag B
Setting condition:
When the TCNTV value matches the TCORB value
Clearing condition:
After reading CMFB = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFB
Compare Match Flag A
Setting condition:
When the TCNTV value matches the TCORA value
Clearing condition:
After reading CMFA = 1, cleared by writing 0 to CMFA
Timer Overflow Flag
Setting condition:
When TCNTV overflows from H'FF to H'00
Clearing condition:
After reading OVF = 1, cleared by writing 0 to OVF
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Output Select 3 and 2
3
2
OS3
OS2
0
0
R/W
R/W
These bits select an output method for the TOMV pin by
the compare match of TCORB and TCNTV.
00: No change
01: 0 output
10: 1 output
11: Output toggles
Output Select 1 and 0
1
0
OS1
OS0
0
0
R/W
R/W
These bits select an output method for the TOMV pin by
the compare match of TCORA and TCNTV.
00: No change
01: 0 output
10: 1 output
11: Output toggles
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 138 of 400
OS3 and OS2 select the output level for compare match B. OS1 and OS0 select the output level
for compare match A. The two output levels can be controlled independently. After a reset, the
timer output is 0 until the first compare match.
11.3.5 Timer Control Register V1 (TCRV1)
TCRV1 selects the edge at the TRGV pin, enables TRGV input, and selects the clock input to
TCNTV.
Bit
Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7 to 5
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
TRGV Input Edge Select
4
3
TVEG1
0
0
R/W
R/W
TVEG0
These bits select the TRGV input edge.
00: TRGV trigger input is prohibited
01: Rising edge is selected
10: Falling edge is selected
11: Rising and falling edges are both selected
2
TRGE
0
R/W
TCNTV starts counting up by the input of the edge which
is selected by TVEG1 and TVEG0.
0: Disables starting counting-up TCNTV by the input of
the TRGV pin and halting counting-up TCNTV when
TCNTV is cleared by a compare match.
1: Enables starting counting-up TCNTV by the input of
the TRGV pin and halting counting-up TCNTV when
TCNTV is cleared by a compare match.
1
0
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Internal Clock Select 0
ICKS0
R/W
This bit selects clock signals to input to TCNTV in
combination with CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0.
Refer to table 11.2.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 139 of 400
11.4
Operation
11.4.1 Timer V Operation
1. According to table 11.2, six internal/external clock signals output by prescaler S can be
selected as the timer V operating clock signals. When the operating clock signal is selected,
TCNTV starts counting-up. Figure 11.2 shows the count timing with an internal clock signal
selected, and figure 11.3 shows the count timing with both edges of an external clock signal
selected.
2. When TCNTV overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), the overflow flag (OVF) in TCRV0
will be set. The timing at this time is shown in figure 11.4. An interrupt request is sent to the
CPU when OVIE in TCRV0 is 1.
3. TCNTV is constantly compared with TCORA and TCORB. Compare match flag A or B
(CMFA or CMFB) is set to 1 when TCNTV matches TCORA or TCORB, respectively. The
compare-match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match. Figure 11.5
shows the timing. An interrupt request is generated for the CPU when CMIEA or CMIEB in
TCRV0 is 1.
4. When a compare match A or B is generated, the TMOV responds with the output value
selected by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV. Figure 11.6 shows the timing when the output is
toggled by compare match A.
5. When CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCRV0 is 01 or 10, TCNTV can be cleared by the corresponding
compare match. Figure 11.7 shows the timing.
6. When CCLR1 or CCLR0 in TCRV0 is 11, TCNTV can be cleared by the rising edge of the
input of TMRIV pin. A TMRIV input pulse-width of at least 1.5 system clocks is necessary.
Figure 11.8 shows the timing.
7. When a counter-clearing source is generated with TRGE in TCRV1 set to 1, the counting-up is
halted as soon as TCNTV is cleared. TCNTV resumes counting-up when the edge selected by
TVEG1 or TVEG0 in TCRV1 is input from the TGRV pin.
ø
Internal clock
TCNTV input
clock
N – 1
N
N + 1
TCNTV
Figure 11.2 Increment Timing with Internal Clock
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 140 of 400
ø
TMCIV
(External clock
input pin)
TCNTV input
clock
N – 1
N
N + 1
TCNTV
Figure 11.3 Increment Timing with External Clock
ø
TCNTV
H'FF
H'00
Overflow signal
OVF
Figure 11.4 OVF Set Timing
ø
TCNTV
N
N
N+1
TCORA or
TCORB
Compare match
signal
CMFA or
CMFB
Figure 11.5 CMFA and CMFB Set Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 141 of 400
ø
Compare match
A signal
Timer V output
pin
Figure 11.6 TMOV Output Timing
ø
Compare match
A signal
N
H'00
TCNTV
Figure 11.7 Clear Timing by Compare Match
ø
Compare match
A signal
Timer V output
pin
N – 1
N
H'00
TCNTV
Figure 11.8 Clear Timing by TMRIV Input
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 142 of 400
11.5
Timer V Application Examples
11.5.1 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Duty Cycle
Figure 11.9 shows an example of output of pulses with an arbitrary duty cycle.
1. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0 so that TCNTV will be cleared by compare match with
TCORA.
2. Set bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV so that the output will go to 1 at compare match with TCORA
and to 0 at compare match with TCORB.
3. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0 and bit ICKS0 in TCRV1 to select the desired clock source.
4. With these settings, a waveform is output without further software intervention, with a period
determined by TCORA and a pulse width determined by TCORB.
TCNTV value
H'FF
Counter cleared
TCORA
TCORB
H'00
Time
TMOV
Figure 11.9 Pulse Output Example
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 143 of 400
11.5.2 Pulse Output with Arbitrary Pulse Width and Delay from TRGV Input
The trigger function can be used to output a pulse with an arbitrary pulse width at an arbitrary
delay from the TRGV input, as shown in figure 11.10. To set up this output:
1. Set bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCRV0 so that TCNTV will be cleared by compare match with
TCORB.
2. Set bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSRV so that the output will go to 1 at compare match with TCORA
and to 0 at compare match with TCORB.
3. Set bits TVEG1 and TVEG0 in TCRV1 and set TRGE to select the falling edge of the TRGV
input.
4. Set bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCRV0 and bit ICKS0 in TCRV1 to select the desired clock source.
5. After these settings, a pulse waveform will be output without further software intervention,
with a delay determined by TCORA from the TRGV input, and a pulse width determined by
(TCORB – TCORA).
TCNTV value
H'FF
Counter cleared
TCORB
TCORA
H'00
Time
TRGV
TMOV
Compare match A
Compare match B
Compare match A
Compare match B
clears TCNTV and
halts count-up
clears TCNTV and
halts count-up
Figure 11.10 Example of Pulse Output Synchronized to TRGV Input
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 144 of 400
11.6
Usage Notes
The following types of contention or operation can occur in timer V operation.
1. Writing to registers is performed in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle. If a TCNTV clear
signal is generated in the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle, as shown in figure 11.11, clearing
takes precedence and the write to the counter is not carried out. If counting-up is generated in
the T3 state of a TCNTV write cycle, writing takes precedence.
2. If a compare match is generated in the T3 state of a TCORA or TCORB write cycle, the write
to TCORA or TCORB takes precedence and the compare match signal is inhibited. Figure
11.12 shows the timing.
3. If compare matches A and B occur simultaneously, any conflict between the output selections
for compare match A and compare match B is resolved by the following priority: toggle
output > output 1 > output 0.
4. Depending on the timing, TCNTV may be incremented by a switch between different internal
clock sources. When TCNTV is internally clocked, an increment pulse is generated from the
falling edge of an internal clock signal, that is divided system clock (φ). Therefore, as shown
in figure 11.3 the switch is from a high clock signal to a low clock signal, the switchover is
seen as a falling edge, causing TCNTV to increment. TCNTV can also be incremented by a
switch between internal and external clocks.
TCNTV write cycle by CPU
T1
T2
T3
ø
Address
TCNTV address
Internal write signal
Counter clear signal
TCNTV
N
H'00
Figure 11.11 Contention between TCNTV Write and Clear
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 145 of 400
TCORA write cycle by CPU
T1 T2 T3
ø
Address
TCORA address
Internal write signal
TCNTV
TCORA
N
N
N+1
M
TCORA write data
Compare match signal
Inhibited
Figure 11.12 Contention between TCORA Write and Compare Match
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count clock
TCNTV
N
N+1
N+2
Write to CKS1 and CKS0
Figure 11.13 Internal Clock Switching and TCNTV Operation
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 146 of 400
Section 12 Timer W
The timer W has a 16-bit timer having output compare and input capture functions. The timer W
can count external events and output pulses with an arbitrary duty cycle by compare match
between the timer counter and four general registers. Thus, it can be applied to various systems.
12.1
Features
•
Selection of five counter clock sources: four internal clocks (φ, φ/2, φ/4, and φ/8) and an
external clock (external events can be counted)
•
•
Capability to process up to four pulse outputs or four pulse inputs
Four general registers:
Independently assignable output compare or input capture functions
Usable as two pairs of registers; one register of each pair operates as a buffer for the output
compare or input capture register
•
Four selectable operating modes :
Waveform output by compare match
Selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output
Input capture function
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges
Counter clearing function
Counters can be cleared by compare match
PWM mode
Up to three-phase PWM output can be provided with desired duty ratio.
Any initial timer output value can be set
Five interrupt sources
•
•
Four compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt.
Table 12.1 summarizes the timer W functions, and figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the timer
W.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 147 of 400
TIM08W0A_000020020300
Table 12.1 Timer W Functions
Input/Output Pins
Item
Counter
FTIOA
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Count clock
Internal clocks: φ, φ/2, φ/4, φ/8
External clock: FTCI
General registers
(output compare/input
capture registers)
Period
specified in
GRA
GRA
GRB
GRC (buffer GRD (buffer
register for register for
GRA in buffer GRB in buffer
mode)
mode)
Counter clearing function GRA
compare
GRA
compare
match
—
—
—
match
Initial output value
setting function
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
Buffer function
Yes
Yes
Compare
match output
0
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toggle
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Input capture function
PWM mode
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
—
—
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interrupt sources
Overflow
Compare
Compare
Compare
Compare
match/input match/input match/input match/input
capture capture capture capture
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 148 of 400
Internal clock: ø
ø/2
FTIOA
Clock
selector
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
IRRTW
ø/4
ø/8
Control logic
External clock: FTCI
Comparator
Internal
data bus
Legend:
TMRW: Timer mode register W (8 bits)
TCRW: Timer control register W (8 bits)
TIERW: Timer interrupt enable register W (8 bits)
TSRW: Timer status register W (8 bits)
TIOR:
Timer I/O control register (8 bits)
TCNT: Timer counter (16 bits)
GRA:
GRB:
GRC:
GRD:
General register A (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
General register B (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
General register C (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
General register D (input capture/output compare register: 16 bits)
IRRTW: Timer W interrupt request
Figure 12.1 Timer W Block Diagram
12.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 12.2 summarizes the timer W pins.
Table 12.2 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation Input/Output
Function
External clock input
FTCI
Input
External clock input pin
Input capture/output
compare A
FTIOA
Input/output
Output pin for GRA output compare or
input pin for GRA input capture
Input capture/output
compare B
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Input/output
Input/output
Input/output
Output pin for GRB output compare,
input pin for GRB input capture, or
PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output
compare C
Output pin for GRC output compare,
input pin for GRC input capture, or
PWM output pin in PWM mode
Input capture/output
compare D
Output pin for GRD output compare,
input pin for GRD input capture, or
PWM output pin in PWM mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 149 of 400
12.3
Register Descriptions
The timer W has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Timer mode register W (TMRW)
Timer control register W (TCRW)
Timer interrupt enable register W (TIERW)
Timer status register W (TSRW)
Timer I/O control register 0 (TIOR0)
Timer I/O control register 1 (TIOR1)
Timer counter (TCNT)
General register A (GRA)
General register B (GRB)
General register C (GRC)
General register D (GRD)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 150 of 400
12.3.1 Timer Mode Register W (TMRW)
TMRW selects the general register functions and the timer output mode.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
CTS
0
R/W
Counter Start
The counter operation is halted when this bit is 0, while it
can be performed when this bit is 1.
6
5
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Buffer Operation B
Selects the GRD function.
BUFEB
R/W
0: GRD operates as an input capture/output compare
register
1: GRD operates as the buffer register for GRB
Buffer Operation A
4
BUFEA
0
R/W
Selects the GRC function.
0: GRC operates as an input capture/output compare
register
1: GRC operates as the buffer register for GRA
Reserved
3
2
1
0
This bit is always read as 1.
PWM Mode D
PWMD
R/W
Selects the output mode of the FTIOD pin.
0: FTIOD operates normally (output compare output)
1: PWM output
1
0
PWMC
PWMB
0
0
R/W
R/W
PWM Mode C
Selects the output mode of the FTIOC pin.
0: FTIOC operates normally (output compare output)
1: PWM output
PWM Mode B
Selects the output mode of the FTIOB pin.
0: FTIOB operates normally (output compare output)
1: PWM output
12.3.2 Timer Control Register W (TCRW)
TCRW selects the timer counter clock source, selects a clearing condition, and specifies the timer
output levels.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 151 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
CCLR
0
R/W
Counter Clear
The TCNT value is cleared by compare match A when this
bit is 1. When it is 0, TCNT operates as a free-running
counter.
6
5
4
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 2 to 0
Select the TCNT clock source.
000: Internal clock: counts on φ
001: Internal clock: counts on φ/2
010: Internal clock: counts on φ/4
011: Internal clock: counts on φ/8
1XX: Counts on rising edges of the external event (FTCI)
When the internal clock source (φ) is selected, subclock
sources are counted in subactive and subsleep modes.
3
2
1
0
TOD
TOC
TOB
TOA
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Timer Output Level Setting D
Sets the output value of the FTIOD pin until the first
compare match D is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Timer Output Level Setting C
Sets the output value of the FTIOC pin until the first
compare match C is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Timer Output Level Setting B
Sets the output value of the FTIOB pin until the first
compare match B is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Timer Output Level Setting A
Sets the output value of the FTIOA pin until the first
compare match A is generated.
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Legend X: Don't care.
Note: * The change of the setting is immediately reflected in the output value.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 152 of 400
12.3.3 Timer Interrupt Enable Register W (TIERW)
TIERW controls the timer W interrupt request.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
OVIE
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, FOVI interrupt requested by OVF
flag in TSRW is enabled.
6
5
4
3
1
1
1
0
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
IMIED
R/W
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable D
When this bit is set to 1, IMID interrupt requested by IMFD
flag in TSRW is enabled.
2
1
0
IMIEC
IMIEB
IMIEA
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable C
When this bit is set to 1, IMIC interrupt requested by IMFC
flag in TSRW is enabled.
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable B
When this bit is set to 1, IMIB interrupt requested by IMFB
flag in TSRW is enabled.
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt Enable A
When this bit is set to 1, IMIA interrupt requested by IMFA
flag in TSRW is enabled.
12.3.4 Timer Status Register W (TSRW)
TSRW shows the status of interrupt requests.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
OVF
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Flag
[Setting condition]
When TCNT overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000
[Clearing condition]
Read OVF when OVF = 1, then write 0 in OVF
Reserved
6
5
4
1
1
1
These bits are always read as 1.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 153 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
3
2
1
0
IMFD
IMFC
IMFB
IMFA
0
0
0
0
R/W
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag D
[Setting conditions]
•
TCNT = GRD when GRD functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRD by an input
capture signal when GRD functions as an input capture
register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFD when IMFD = 1, then write 0 in IMFD
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag C
[Setting conditions]
R/W
R/W
R/W
•
TCNT = GRC when GRC functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRC by an input
capture signal when GRC functions as an input capture
register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFC when IMFC = 1, then write 0 in IMFC
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag B
[Setting conditions]
•
TCNT = GRB when GRB functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRB by an input
capture signal when GRB functions as an input capture
register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFB when IMFB = 1, then write 0 in IMFB
Input Capture/Compare Match Flag A
[Setting conditions]
•
TCNT = GRA when GRA functions as an output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to GRA by an input
capture signal when GRA functions as an input capture
register
[Clearing condition]
Read IMFA when IMFA = 1, then write 0 in IMFA
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 154 of 400
12.3.5 Timer I/O Control Register 0 (TIOR0)
TIOR0 selects the functions of GRA and GRB, and specifies the functions of the FTIOA and
FTIOB pins.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
1
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
I/O Control B2
6
IOB2
0
R/W
Selects the GRB function.
0: GRB functions as an output compare register
1: GRB functions as an input capture register
I/O Control B1 and B0
5
4
IOB1
IOB0
0
0
R/W
R/W
When IOB2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOB pin at GRB compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOB pin at GRB compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOB pin at GRB compare
match
When IOB2 = 1,
00: Input capture at rising edge at the FTIOB pin
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOB pin
1X: Input capture at rising and falling edges of the FTIOB
pin
3
2
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
IOA2
R/W
I/O Control A2
Selects the GRA function.
0: GRA functions as an output compare register
1: GRA functions as an input capture register
I/O Control A1 and A0
1
0
IOA1
IOA0
0
0
R/W
R/W
When IOA2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOA pin at GRA compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOA pin at GRA compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOA pin at GRA compare
match
When IOA2 = 1,
00: Input capture at rising edge of the FTIOA pin
01: Input capture at falling edge of the FTIOA pin
1X: Input capture at rising and falling edges of the FTIOA
pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 155 of 400
12.3.6 Timer I/O Control Register 1 (TIOR1)
TIOR1 selects the functions of GRC and GRD, and specifies the functions of the FTIOC and
FTIOD pins.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value
R/W
Description
7
1
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
I/O Control D2
6
IOD2
0
R/W
Selects the GRD function.
0: GRD functions as an output compare register
1: GRD functions as an input capture register
I/O Control D1 and D0
5
4
IOD1
IOD0
0
0
R/W
R/W
When IOD2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOD pin at GRD compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOD pin at GRD compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOD pin at GRD compare
match
When IOD2 = 1,
00: Input capture at rising edge at the FTIOD pin
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOD pin
1X: Input capture at rising and falling edges at the FTIOD
pin
3
2
1
0
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
IOC2
R/W
I/O Control C2
Selects the GRC function.
0: GRC functions as an output compare register
1: GRC functions as an input capture register
I/O Control C1 and C0
1
0
IOC1
IOC0
0
0
R/W
R/W
When IOC2 = 0,
00: No output at compare match
01: 0 output to the FTIOC pin at GRC compare match
10: 1 output to the FTIOC pin at GRC compare match
11: Output toggles to the FTIOC pin at GRC compare
match
When IOC2 = 1,
00: Input capture to GRC at rising edge of the FTIOC pin
01: Input capture to GRC at falling edge of the FTIOC pin
1X: Input capture to GRC at rising and falling edges of the
FTIOC pin
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 156 of 400
12.3.7 Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable up-counter. The clock source is selected by bits CKS2 to
CKS0 in TCRW. TCNT can be cleared to H'0000 through a compare match with GRA by setting
the CCLR in TCRW to 1. When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000), the OVF
flag in TSRW is set to 1. If OVIE in TIERW is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is
generated. TCNT must always be read or written in 16-bit units; 8-bit access is not allowed.
TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset.
12.3.8 General Registers A to D (GRA to GRD)
Each general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output-
compare register or an input-capture register. The function is selected by settings in TIOR0 and
TIOR1.
When a general register is used as an input-compare register, its value is constantly compared with
the TCNT value. When the two values match (a compare match), the corresponding flag (IMFA,
IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD) in TSRW is set to 1. An interrupt request is generated at this time, when
IMIEA, IMIEB, IMIEC, or IMIED is set to 1. Compare match output can be selected in TIOR.
When a general register is used as an input-capture register, an external input-capture signal is
detected and the current TCNT value is stored in the general register. The corresponding flag
(IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD) in TSRW is set to 1. If the corresponding interrupt-enable bit
(IMIEA, IMIEB, IMIEC, or IMIED) in TSRW is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is
generated. The edge of the input-capture signal is selected in TIOR.
GRC and GRD can be used as buffer registers of GRA and GRB, respectively, by setting BUFEA
and BUFEB in TMRW.
For example, when GRA is set as an output-compare register and GRC is set as the buffer register
for GRA, the value in the buffer register GRC is sent to GRA whenever compare match A is
generated.
When GRA is set as an input-capture register and GRC is set as the buffer register for GRA, the
value in TCNT is transferred to GRA and the value in the buffer register GRC is transferred to
GRA whenever an input capture is generated.
GRA to GRD must be written or read in 16-bit units; 8-bit access is not allowed. GRA to GRD are
initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 157 of 400
12.4
Operation
The timer W has the following operating modes.
•
•
Normal Operation
PWM Operation
12.4.1 Normal Operation
TCNT performs free-running or periodic counting operations. After a reset, TCNT is set as a free-
running counter. When the CST bit in TMRW is set to 1, TCNT starts incrementing the count.
When the count overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, the OVF flag in TSRW is set to 1. If the OVIE
in TIERW is set to 1, an interrupt request is generated. Figure 12.2 shows free-running counting.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
CST bit
Time
Flag cleared
by software
OVF
Figure 12.2 Free-Running Counter Operation
Periodic counting operation can be performed when GRA is set as an output compare register and
bit CCLR in TCRW is set to 1. When the count matches GRA, TCNT is cleared to H'0000, the
IMFA flag in TSRW is set to 1. If the corresponding IMIEA bit in TIERW is set to 1, an interrupt
request is generated. TCNT continues counting from H'0000. Figure 12.3 shows periodic
counting.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 158 of 400
TCNT value
GRA
H'0000
CST bit
Time
Flag cleared
by software
IMFA
Figure 12.3 Periodic Counter Operation
By setting a general register as an output compare register, compare match A, B, C, or D can
cause the output at the FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD pin to output 0, output 1, or toggle.
Figure 12.4 shows an example of 0 and 1 output when TCNT operates as a free-running counter, 1
output is selected for compare match A, and 0 output is selected for compare match B. When
signal is already at the selected output level, the signal level does not change at compare match.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
Time
No change
No change
H'0000
FTIOA
FTIOB
No change
No change
Figure 12.4 0 and 1 Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)
Figure 12.5 shows an example of toggle output when TCNT operates as a free-running counter,
and toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 159 of 400
TCNT value
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
Time
H'0000
Toggle output
Toggle output
FTIOA
FTIOB
Figure 12.5 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)
Figure 12.6 shows another example of toggle output when TCNT operates as a periodic counter,
cleared by compare match A. Toggle output is selected for both compare match A and B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by compare match with GRA
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
Time
H'0000
FTIOA
Toggle
output
Toggle
output
FTIOB
Figure 12.6 Toggle Output Example (TOA = 0, TOB = 1)
The TCNT value can be captured into a general register (GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD) when a
signal level changes at an input-capture pin (FTIOA, FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD). Capture can
take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. By using the input-capture function, the
pulse width and periods can be measured. Figure 12.7 shows an example of input capture when
both edges of FTIOA and the falling edge of FTIOB are selected as capture edges. TCNT operates
as a free-running counter.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 160 of 400
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'F000
H'AA55
H'55AA
H'1000
H'0000
Time
FTIOA
GRA
H'1000
H'F000
H'55AA
FTIOB
GRB
H'AA55
Figure 12.7 Input Capture Operating Example
Figure 12.8 shows an example of buffer operation when the GRA is set as an input-capture
register and GRC is set as the buffer register for GRA. TCNT operates as a free-running counter,
and FTIOA captures both rising and falling edge of the input signal. Due to the buffer operation,
the GRA value is transferred to GRC by input-capture A and the TCNT value is stored in GRA.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'DA91
H'5480
H'0245
H'0000
Time
FTIOA
H'0245
H'5480
H'0245
H'DA91
H'5480
GRA
GRC
Figure 12.8 Buffer Operation Example (Input Capture)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 161 of 400
12.4.2 PWM Operation
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are generated by using GRA as the period register and GRB,
GRC, and GRD as duty registers. PWM waveforms are output from the FTIOB, FTIOC, and
FTIOD pins. Up to three-phase PWM waveforms can be output. In PWM mode, a general register
functions as an output compare register automatically. The output level of each pin depends on the
corresponding timer output level set bit (TOB, TOC, and TOD) in TCRW. When TOB is 1, the
FTIOB output goes to 1 at compare match A and to 0 at compare match B. When TOB is 0, the
FTIOB output goes to 0 at compare match A and to 1 at compare match B. Thus the compare
match output level settings in TIOR0 and TIOR1 are ignored for the output pin set to PWM mode.
If the same value is set in the cycle register and the duty register, the output does not change when
a compare match occurs.
Figure 12.9 shows an example of operation in PWM mode. The output signals go to 1 and TCNT
is cleared at compare match A, and the output signals go to 0 at compare match B, C, and D
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 1: initial output values are set to 1).
TCNT value
Counter cleared by compare match A
GRA
GRB
GRC
GRD
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Figure 12.9 PWM Mode Example (1)
Figure 12.10 shows another example of operation in PWM mode. The output signals go to 0 and
TCNT is cleared at compare match A, and the output signals go to 1 at compare match B, C, and
D (TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0: initial output values are set to 1).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 162 of 400
TCNT value
Counter cleared by compare match A
GRA
GRB
GRC
GRD
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Figure 12.10 PWM Mode Example (2)
Figure 12.11 shows an example of buffer operation when the FTIOB pin is set to PWM mode and
GRD is set as the buffer register for GRB. TCNT is cleared by compare match A, and FTIOB
outputs 1 at compare match B and 0 at compare match A.
Due to the buffer operation, the FTIOB output level changes and the value of buffer register GRD
is transferred to GRB whenever compare match B occurs. This procedure is repeated every time
compare match B occurs.
TCNT value
GRA
H'0520
H'0450
H'0200
GRB
Time
H'0000
GRD
H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
H'0200
H'0450
H'0520
GRB
FTIOB
Figure 12.11 Buffer Operation Example (Output Compare)
Figures 12.12 and 12.13 show examples of the output of PWM waveforms with duty cycles of 0%
and 100%.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 163 of 400
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
GRB
Write to GRB
H'0000
Time
Duty 0%
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Duty 100%
GRB
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Time
GRB
H'0000
Duty 100%
Duty 0%
FTIOB
Figure 12.12 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 0: initial output values are set to 0)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 164 of 400
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
GRB
Write to GRB
H'0000
Time
Duty 100%
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Duty 0%
GRB
H'0000
Time
FTIOB
Output does not change when cycle register
and duty register compare matches occur
simultaneously.
TCNT value
Write to GRB
GRA
Write to GRB
Write to GRB
Time
GRB
H'0000
Duty 0%
Duty 100%
FTIOB
Figure 12.13 PWM Mode Example
(TOB, TOC, and TOD = 1: initial output values are set to 1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 165 of 400
12.5
Operation Timing
12.5.1 TCNT Count Timing
Figure 12.14 shows the TCNT count timing when the internal clock source is selected. Figure
12.15 shows the timing when the external clock source is selected. The pulse width of the external
clock signal must be at least two system clock (φ) cycles; shorter pulses will not be counted
correctly.
φ
Internal
clock
Rising edge
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 12.14 Count Timing for Internal Clock Source
φ
External
clock
Rising edge
Rising edge
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 12.15 Count Timing for External Clock Source
12.5.2 Output Compare Output Timing
The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and GR match (when
TCNT changes from the matching value to the next value). When the compare match signal is
generated, the output value selected in TIOR is output at the compare match output pin (FTIOA,
FTIOB, FTIOC, or FTIOD).
When TCNT matches GR, the compare match signal is generated only after the next counter clock
pulse is input.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 166 of 400
Figure 12.16 shows the output compare timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
N
N
N+1
TCNT
GRA to GRD
Compare
match signal
FTIOA to FTIOD
Figure 12.16 Output Compare Output Timing
12.5.3 Input Capture Timing
Input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected through settings in
TIOR0 and TIOR1. Figure 12.17 shows the timing when the falling edge is selected. The pulse
width of the input capture signal must be at least two system clock (φ) cycles; shorter pulses will
not be detected correctly.
ø
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
N–1
N
N+1
N
N+2
TCNT
GRA to GRD
Figure 12.17 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 167 of 400
12.5.4 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match
Figure 12.18 shows the timing when the counter is cleared by compare match A. When the GRA
value is N, the counter counts from 0 to N, and its cycle is N + 1.
φ
Compare
match signal
N
N
H'0000
TCNT
GRA
Figure 12.18 Timing of Counter Clearing by Compare Match
12.5.5 Buffer Operation Timing
Figures 12.19 and 12.20 show the buffer operation timing.
φ
Compare
match signal
N
N+1
TCNT
M
GRC, GRD
GRA, GRB
M
Figure 12.19 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 168 of 400
φ
Input capture
signal
N
N+1
TCNT
GRA, GRB
M
N
N+1
N
GRC, GRD
M
Figure 12.20 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture)
12.5.6 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match
If a general register (GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD) is used as an output compare register, the
corresponding IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD flag is set to 1 when TCNT matches the general
register.
The compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when TCNT is
updated from the matching count to the next count). Therefore, when TCNT matches a general
register, the compare match signal is generated only after the next TCNT clock pulse is input.
Figure 12.21 shows the timing of the IMFA to IMFD flag setting at compare match.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
N
N+1
GRA to GRD
Compare
match signal
IMFA to IMFD
IRRTW
Figure 12.21 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Compare Match
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 169 of 400
12.5.7 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Setting at Input Capture
If a general register (GRA, GRB, GRC, or GRD) is used as an input capture register, the
corresponding IMFA, IMFB, IMFC, or IMFD flag is set to 1 when an input capture occurs. Figure
12.22 shows the timing of the IMFA to IMFD flag setting at input capture.
φ
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
GRA to GRD
IMFA to IMFD
IRRTW
N
Figure 12.22 Timing of IMFA to IMFD Flag Setting at Input Capture
12.5.8 Timing of Status Flag Clearing
When the CPU reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag
is cleared. Figure 12.23 shows the status flag clearing timing.
TSRW write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TSRW address
Address
Write signal
IMFA to IMFD
IRRTW
Figure 12.23 Timing of Status Flag Clearing by CPU
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 170 of 400
12.6 Usage Notes
The following types of contention or operation can occur in timer W operation.
1. The pulse width of the input clock signal and the input capture signal must be at least two
system clock (φ) cycles; shorter pulses will not be detected correctly.
2. Writing to registers is performed in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle.
If counter clear signal occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, clearing of the counter
takes priority and the write is not performed, as shown in figure 12.24. If counting-up is
generated in the TCNT write cycle to contend with the TCNT counting-up, writing takes
precedence.
3. Depending on the timing, TCNT may be incremented by a switch between different internal
clock sources. When TCNT is internally clocked, an increment pulse is generated from the
rising edge of an internal clock signal, that is divided system clock (φ). Therefore, as shown in
figure 12.25 the switch is from a low clock signal to a high clock signal, the switchover is seen
as a rising edge, causing TCNT to increment.
4. If timer W enters module standby mode while an interrupt request is generated, the interrupt
request cannot be cleared. Before entering module standby mode, disable interrupt requests.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
Counter clear
signal
N
H'0000
TCNT
Figure 12.24 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 171 of 400
Previous clock
New clock
Count clock
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
N+3
The change in signal level at clock switching is
assumed to be a rising edge, and TCNT
increments the count.
Figure 12.25 Internal Clock Switching and TCNT Operation
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 172 of 400
Section 13 Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is an 8-bit timer that can generate an internal reset signal for this LSI if a
system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus allowing it to overflow.
The block diagram of the watchdog timer is shown in figure 13.1.
CLK
PSS
Internal
oscillator
TCSRWD
TCWD
ø
TMWD
Legend:
Internal reset
signal
TCSRWD: Timer control/status register WD
TCWD:
PSS:
Timer counter WD
Prescaler S
TMWD:
Timer mode register WD
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
13.1
Features
•
Selectable from nine counter input clocks.
Eight clock sources (φ/64, φ/128, φ/256, φ/512, φ/1024, φ/2048, φ/4096, and φ/8192) or the
internal oscillator can be selected as the timer-counter clock. When the internal oscillator is
selected, it can operate as the watchdog timer in any operating mode.
•
Reset signal generated on counter overflow
An overflow period of 1 to 256 times the selected clock can be set.
13.2
Register Descriptions
The watchdog timer has the following registers.
•
•
•
Timer control/status register WD (TCSRWD)
Timer counter WD (TCWD)
Timer mode register WD (TMWD)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 173 of 400
WDT0110A_000020020300
13.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD (TCSRWD)
TCSRWD performs the TCSRWD and TCWD write control. TCSRWD also controls the
watchdog timer operation and indicates the operating state. TCSRWD must be rewritten by using
the MOV instruction. The bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to change the setting value.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
B6WI
1
R/W
Bit 6 Write Inhibit
The TCWE bit can be written only when the write value of
the B6WI bit is 0.
This bit is always read as 1.
6
TCWE
0
R/W
Timer Counter WD Write Enable
TCWD can be written when the TCWE bit is set to 1.
When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 7 must be 0.
Bit 4 Write Inhibit
5
4
B4WI
1
0
R/W
R/W
The TCSRWE bit can be written only when the write value
of the B4WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
TCSRWE
Timer Control/Status Register W Write Enable
The WDON and WRST bits can be written when the
TCSRWE bit is set to 1.
When writing data to this bit, the value for bit 5 must be 0.
Bit 2 Write Inhibit
3
2
B2WI
1
0
R/W
R/W
This bit can be written to the WDON bit only when the write
value of the B2WI bit is 0.
This bit is always read as 1.
Watchdog Timer On
WDON
TCWD starts counting up when WDON is set to 1 and halts
when WDON is cleared to 0.
[Setting condition]
When 1 is written to the WDON bit while writing 0 to the
B2WI bit when the TCSRWE bit=1
[Clearing condition]
•
•
Reset by RES pin
When 0 is written to the WDON bit while writing 0 to the
B2WI when the TCSRWE bit=1
1
B0WI
1
R/W
Bit 0 Write Inhibit
This bit can be written to the WRST bit only when the write
value of the B0WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 174 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
WRST R/W
Description
0
0
Watchdog Timer Reset
[Setting condition]
When TCWD overflows and an internal reset signal is
generated
[Clearing condition]
•
•
Reset by RES pin
When 0 is written to the WRST bit while writing 0 to the
B0WI bit when the TCSRWE bit=1
13.2.2 Timer Counter WD (TCWD)
TCWD is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When TCWD overflows from H'FF to H'00, the
internal reset signal is generated and the WRST bit in TCSRWD is set to 1. TCWD is initialized to
H'00.
13.2.3 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD)
TMWD selects the input clock.
Bit
Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7 to 4
All 1
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Clock Select 3 to 0
3
2
1
0
CKS3
1
1
1
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Select the clock to be input to TCWD.
1000: Internal clock: counts on φ/64
1001: Internal clock: counts on φ/128
1010: Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1011: Internal clock: counts on φ/512
1100: Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1101: Internal clock: counts on φ/2048
1110: Internal clock: counts on φ/4096
1111: Internal clock: counts on φ8192
0XXX: Internal oscillator
For the internal oscillator overflow periods, see section
20, Electrical Characteristics.
Legend X: Don't care.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 175 of 400
13.3
Operation
The watchdog timer is provided with an 8-bit counter. If 1 is written to WDON while writing 0 to
B2WI when the TCSRWE bit in TCSRWD is set to 1, TCWD begins counting up. (To operate
the watchdog timer, two write accesses to TCSRWD are required.) When a clock pulse is input
after the TCWD count value has reached H'FF, the watchdog timer overflows and an internal reset
signal is generated. The internal reset signal is output for a period of 512 φosc clock cycles. TCWD
is a writable counter, and when a value is set in TCWD, the count-up starts from that value. An
overflow period in the range of 1 to 256 input clock cycles can therefore be set, according to the
TCWD set value.
Figure 13.2 shows an example of watchdog timer operation.
Example: With 30ms overflow period when φ = 4 MHz
4 × 106
8192
× 30 × 10–3 = 14.6
Therefore, 256 – 15 = 241 (H'F1) is set in TCW.
TCWD overflow
H'FF
H'F1
TCWD
count value
H'00
Start
H'F1 written
to TCWD
H'F1 written to TCWD
Reset generated
Internal reset
signal
512 φosc clock cycles
Figure 13.2 Watchdog Timer Operation Example
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 176 of 400
Section 14 Serial Communication Interface3 (SCI3)
Serial Communication Interface 3 (SCI3) can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous
serial communication. In the asynchronous method, serial data communication can be carried out
using standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or an Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA). A
function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor
communication function).
Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI3.
14.1
Features
•
•
Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode
Full-duplex communication capability
The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to
be executed simultaneously.
Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data.
•
•
•
On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
External clock or on-chip baud rate generator can be selected as a transfer clock source.
Six interrupt sources
Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, overrun error, framing error, and parity
error.
Asynchronous mode
•
•
•
•
•
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in the case of a
framing error
Clocked synchronous mode
•
•
Data length: 8 bits
Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 177 of 400
SCI0010A_000020020300
External
clock
Internal clock (ø/64, ø/16, ø/4, ø)
BRR
SCK
3
Baud rate generator
BRC
Clock
SMR
SCR3
SSR
Transmit/receive
control circuit
TXD
RXD
TSR
RSR
TDR
RDR
Interrupt request
(TEI, TXI, RXI, ERI)
Legend:
RSR:
Receive shift register
RDR:
TSR:
TDR:
Receive data register
Transmit shift register
Transmit data register
Serial mode register
SMR:
SCR3: Serial control register 3
SSR:
BRR:
BRC:
Serial status register
Bit rate register
Bit rate counter
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of SCI3
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 178 of 400
14.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 14.1 shows the SCI3 pin configuration.
Table 14.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
SCK3
I/O
Function
SCI3 clock
I/O
SCI3 clock input/output
SCI3 receive data input
SCI3 transmit data output
SCI3 receive data input
SCI3 transmit data output
RXD
Input
Output
TXD
14.3 Register Descriptions
The SCI3 has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receive shift register (RSR)
Receive data register (RDR)
Transmit shift register (TSR)
Transmit data register (TDR)
Serial mode register (SMR)
Serial control register 3 (SCR3)
Serial status register (SSR)
Bit rate register (BRR)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 179 of 400
14.3.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is a shift register that is used to receive serial data input from the RxD pin and convert it into
parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
14.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is an 8-bit register that stores received data. When the SCI3 has received one byte of serial
data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is
receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive
operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only
once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00.
14.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI3 first
transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR automatically, then sends the data that starts from the
LSB to the TXD pin. TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
14.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI3 detects that TSR is
empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The double-
buffered structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit
data has already been written to TDR during transmission of one-frame data, the SCI3 transfers
the written data to TSR to continue transmission. To achieve reliable serial transmission, write
transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is
initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 180 of 400
14.3.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR is used to set the SCI3’s serial transfer format and select the on-chip baud rate generator
clock source.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
COM
0
R/W
Communication Mode
0: Asynchronous mode
1: Clocked synchronous mode
6
5
CHR
PE
0
R/W
Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
0: Selects 8 bits as the data length.
1: Selects 7 bits as the data length.
0
R/W
Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to
transmit data before transmission, and the parity
bit is checked in reception.
4
3
PM
0
0
R/W
R/W
Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity.
1: Selects odd parity.
STOP
Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
Selects the stop bit length in transmission.
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
For reception, only the first stop bit is checked,
regardless of the value in the bit. If the second
stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next
transmit character.
2
MP
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Mode
When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor
communication function is enabled. The PE bit
and PM bit settings are invalid. In clocked
synchronous mode, this bit should be cleared to 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 181 of 400
Bit
1
Bit Name
CKS1
Initial Value R/W
Description
0
0
R/W
R/W
Clock Select 0 and 1
0
CKS0
These bits select the clock source for the on-chip
baud rate generator.
00: ø clock (n = 0)
01: ø/4 clock (n = 1)
10: ø/16 clock (n = 2)
11: ø/64 clock (n = 3)
For the relationship between the bit rate register
setting and the baud rate, see section 14.3.8, Bit
Rate Register (BRR). n is the decimal
representation of the value of n in BRR (see
section 14.3.8, Bit Rate Register (BRR)).
14.3.6
Serial Control Register 3 (SCR3)
SCR3 is a register that enables or disables SCI3 transfer operations and interrupt requests, and is
also used to select the transfer clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 14.7,
Interrupts.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
0
R/W
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, the TXI interrupt request
is enabled.
6
RIE
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI and ERI interrupt
requests are enabled.
5
4
TE
RE
0
0
R/W
R/W
Transmit Enable
When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled.
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 182 of 400
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
0 R/W
Description
3
MPIE
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only
when the MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous
mode)
When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of
the RDRF, FER, and OER status flags in SSR is
prohibited. On receiving data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically
cleared and normal reception is resumed. For
details, refer to section 14.6, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, the TEI interrupt request
is enabled.
1
0
CKE1
CKE0
0
0
R/W
R/W
Clock Enable 0 and 1
Selects the clock source.
Asynchronous mode:
00: Internal baud rate generator
01: Internal baud rate generator
Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit
rate from the SCK3 pin.
10: External clock
Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit
rate from the SCK3 pin.
11:Reserved
Clocked synchronous mode:
00: Internal clock (SCK3 pin functions as clock
output)
01:Reserved
10: External clock (SCK3 pin functions as clock
input)
11:Reserved
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 183 of 400
14.3.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR is a register containing status flags of the SCI3 and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot
be written to flags TDRE, RDRF, OER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
TDRE
1
R/W
Transmit Data Register Empty
Displays whether TDR contains transmit data.
[Setting conditions]
•
•
When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0
When data is transferred from TDR to TSR
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to TDRE after reading TDRE
= 1
•
When the transmit data is written to TDR
6
RDRF
0
R/W
Receive Data Register Full
Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
When serial reception ends normally and
receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to RDRF after reading RDRF
= 1
•
When data is read from RDR
5
OER
0
R/W
Overrun Error
[Setting condition]
•
When an overrun error occurs in reception
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to OER after reading OER =
1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 184 of 400
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
0 R/W
Description
4
FER
Framing Error
[Setting condition]
•
When a framing error occurs in reception
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to FER after reading FER =
1
3
PER
0
R/W
Parity Error
[Setting condition]
•
When a parity error is generated during
reception
[Clearing condition]
•
When 0 is written to PER after reading PER =
1
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
[Setting conditions]
•
•
When the TE bit in SCR3 is 0
When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit
of a 1-byte serial transmit character
[Clearing conditions]
•
When 0 is written to TEND after reading TEND
= 1
•
When the transmit data is written to TDR
1
0
MPBR
MPBT
0
0
R
Multiprocessor Bit Receive
MPBR stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive
character data. When the RE bit in SCR3 is
cleared to 0, its previous state is retained.
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to
the transmit character data.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 185 of 400
14.3.8
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit register that adjusts the bit rate. The initial value of BRR is H'FF. Table 14.2
shows the relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and CKS0 of
SMR in asynchronous mode. Table 14.3 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in
asynchronous mode. The values shown in both tables 14.2 and 14.3 are values in active (high-
speed) mode. Table 14.4 shows the relationship between the N setting in BRR and the n setting in
bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR in clocked synchronous mode. The values shown in table 14.4 are
values in active (high-speed) mode. The N setting in BRR and error for other operating
frequencies and bit rates can be obtained by the following formulas:
[Asynchronous Mode]
φ
× 106 – 1
N =
64 × 22n–1 × B
φ × 106
(N + 1) × B × 64 × 22n–1
Error (%) =
– 1 × 100
[Clocked Synchronous Mode]
φ
× 106 – 1
N =
8 × 22n–1 × B
Note: B: Bit rate (bit/s)
N: BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
φ: Operating frequency (MHz)
n: CKS1 and CKS0 setting for SMR (0 ≤ N ≤ 3)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 186 of 400
Table 14.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (1)
Operating Frequency ø (MHz)
2
2.097152
Error
(%)
2.4576
Error
(%)
3
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
N
110
141 0.03
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
148 –0.04
108 0.21
217 0.21
108 0.21
174 –0.26
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
212 0.03
155 0.16
150
300
77
0.16
600
155 0.16
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
Legend
51
25
12
6
0.16
54
26
13
6
–0.70
1.14
63
31
15
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
22.88
0.00
77
38
19
9
0.16
0.16
–2.34
–2.34
–2.34
0.00
—
0.16
0.16
–2.48
–2.48
13.78
4.86
–6.99
8.51
2
2
3
4
1
0.00
1
1
2
1
–18.62
1
–14.67
1
—
: A setting is available but error occurs
Operating Frequency ø (MHz)
4.9152
Error
3.6864
4
5
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
N
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
64
0.70
70
0.03
86
0.31
88
64
–0.25
0.16
150
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
255 0.00
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
300
129 0.16
64 0.16
129 0.16
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
95
47
23
11
5
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
—
51
25
12
6
0.16
0.16
0.16
–6.99
0.00
8.51
63
31
15
7
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
64
32
15
7
0.16
–1.36
1.73
1.73
0.00
1.73
—
2
3
4
4
0.00
2
3
3
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 187 of 400
Table 14.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (2)
Operating Frequency ø (MHz)
6
6.144
7.3728
8
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
106 –0.44
77 0.16
155 0.16
77 0.16
155 0.16
108 0.08
79 0.00
159 0.00
79 0.00
159 0.00
130 –0.07
95 0.00
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
141 0.03
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
77
38
19
9
0.16
79
39
19
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.40
0.00
95
47
23
11
6
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.33
0.00
0.16
51
25
12
7
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.00
-6.99
–2.34
–2.34
0.00
5
5
4
–2.34
4
5
6
Operating Frequency ø (MHz)
10 12
9.8304
N
12.888
N
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
110
174 –0.26
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
255 0.00
127 0.00
177 –0.25
129 0.16
212 0.03
155 0.16
217 0.08
159 0.00
150
300
64
129 0.16
64 0.16
129 0.16
0.16
77
155 0.16
77 0.16
155 0.16
0.16
79
159 0.00
79 0.00
159 0.00
0.00
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
63
31
15
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
64
32
15
9
0.16
–1.36
1.73
0.00
1.73
77
38
19
11
9
0.16
79
39
19
11
9
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.40
0.00
0.16
–2.34
0.00
7
7
–2.34
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 188 of 400
Table 14.2 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode) (3)
Operating Frequency ø (MHz)
14
14.7456
16
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
Error
(%)
n
2
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
—
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
110
248 –0.17
181 0.16
64
0.70
70
0.03
150
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
95 0.00
191 0.00
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
207 0.16
103 0.16
300
90
181 0.16
90 0.16
181 0.16
0.16
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
31250
38400
Legend
90
45
22
13
—
0.16
–0.93
–0.93
0.00
—
95
47
23
14
11
0.00
0.00
0.00
–1.70
0.00
51
25
15
12
0.16
0.16
0.00
0.16
—: A setting is available but error occurs.
Table 14.3 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
Maximum Bit
Rate (bit/s)
ø (MHz)
n
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ø (MHz)
7.3728
8
n
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
62500
230400
250000
307200
312500
375000
384000
437500
460800
500000
2.097152 65536
2.4576
76800
9.8304
10
3
93750
3.6864
115200
125000
153600
156250
187500
192000
12
4
12.288
14
4.9152
5
14.7456
16
6
6.144
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 189 of 400
Table 14.4 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency ø (MHz)
2
4
8
10
16
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
3
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
—
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
—
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
N
n
N
n
N
110
250
500
1k
70
124
249
124
199
99
49
19
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
249
124
249
99
199
99
39
19
9
124
249
124
199
99
199
79
39
19
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
0
249
124
249
99
199
99
159
79
39
15
7
—
—
2.5k
5k
249
124
249
99
49
24
9
1
10k
25k
50k
100k
250k
500k
1M
0
0
0
4
0
1
3
0
0*
1
3
0
4
0*
1
—
—
0
—
3
2M
0*
—
1
2.5M
4M
0*
—
0*
Legend
Blank : No setting is available.
—
: A setting is available but error occurs.
: Continuous transfer is not possible.
*
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 190 of 400
14.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Figure 14.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. One frame consists
of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and
finally stop bits (high level). Inside the SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units,
enabling full duplex. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure,
so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
LSB
MSB
1
Serial
data
Parity
bit
Start
bit
Mark state
Transmit/receive data
7 or 8 bits
Stop bit
1 bit
1 bit,
1 or
or none
2 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 14.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
14.4.1
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at
the SCK3 pin can be selected as the SCI3’s serial clock source, according to the setting of the
COM bit in SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When an external clock is input at the
SCK3 pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit rate used.
When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK3 pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is in the middle of the transmit data, as shown in figure 14.3.
Clock
1
1
0
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1
1 character (frame)
Serial data
Figure 14.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 191 of 400
14.4.2
SCI3 Initialization
Follow the flowchart as shown in figure 14.4 to initialize the SCI3. When the TE bit is cleared to
0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of
the RDRF, PER, FER, and OER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in
asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization.
[1] Set the clock selection in SCR3.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.
Start initialization
When the clock output is selected in
asynchronous mode, clock is output
immediately after CKE1 and CKE0
settings are made. When the clock
output is selected at reception in clocked
synchronous mode, clock is output
immediately after CKE1, CKE0, and RE
are set to 1.
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR3 to 0
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR3
Set data transfer format in SMR
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2] Set the data transfer format in SMR.
Set value in BRR
Wait
[3] Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
[4] Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR3 to 1. RE
settings enable the RXD pin to be used.
For transmission, set the TXD bit in
PMR1 to 1 to enable the TXD output pin
to be used. Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits, depending on whether
interrupts are required. In asynchronous
mode, the bits are marked at
Set TE and RE bits in
SCR3 to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits. For transmit (TE=1),
also set the TxD bit in PMR1.
[4]
transmission and idled at reception to
wait for the start bit.
<Initialization completion>
Figure 14.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 192 of 400
14.4.3
Data Transmission
Figure 14.5 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In
transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI3 recognizes that
data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a TXI interrupt request is generated.
Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI interrupt routine writes next transmit data
to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.
3. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
4. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then
serial transmission of the next frame is started.
5. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the “mark
state” is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI
interrupt request is generated.
6. Figure 14.6 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.
Start
bit
Transmit
data
Parity Stop Start
Transmit
data
Parity Stop
Mark
state
bit
bit bit
bit
bit
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7 0/1
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7 0/1
1
1
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
LSI
TXI interrupt
TDRE flag
cleared to 0
TXI interrupt request generated
TEI interrupt request
generated
operation request
generated
User
processing
Data written
to TDR
Figure 14.5 Example SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 193 of 400
Start transmission
[1] Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. When data is
written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automaticaly cleared to 0.
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2] To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR. When data
is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automaticaly cleared to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
[3] To output a break in serial
transmission, after setting PCR to 1
and PDR to 0, clear TxD in PMR1
to 0, then clear the TE bit in SCR3
to 0.
Yes
[2]
All data transmitted?
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
No
TEND = 1
Yes
[3]
Break output?
Yes
Clear PDR to 0 and
set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 14.6 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 194 of 400
14.4.4
Serial Data Reception
Figure 14.7 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial
reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI3 performs
internal synchronization, receives data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.
2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an
ERI interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR.
3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to
RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive
data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an ERI interrupt
request is generated.
5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI interrupt routine reads the receive
data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.
Start
bit
Receive
data
Parity Stop Start
Receive
data
Parity Stop Mark state
bit
bit bit
bit
bit
(idle state)
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7 0/1
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7 0/1
0
1
1 frame
RDRF
FER
LSI
operation
RXI request RDRF
cleared to 0
0 stop bit
detected
ERI request in
response to
framing error
User
processing
RDR data read
Framing error
processing
Figure 14.7 Example SCI3 Operation in Reception in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 195 of 400
Table 14.5 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive error
is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving data.
Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.8 shows a sample flowchart
for serial data reception.
Table 14.5 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling
SSR Status Flag
RDRF*
OER
FER
PER
Receive Data
Lost
Receive Error Type
Overrun error
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Transferred to RDR
Transferred to RDR
Lost
Framing error
Parity error
Overrun error + framing error
Overrun error + parity error
Framing error + parity error
Lost
Transferred to RDR
Lost
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
Note: * The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 196 of 400
[1] Read the OER, PER, and FER flags in
SSR to identify the error. If a receive
error occurs, performs the appropriate
error processing.
[2] Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1,
then read the receive data in RDR.
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
[3] To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is
Start reception
Read OER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR
[1]
Yes
OER+PER+FER = 1
No
[4]
received, read the RDRF flag and read
RDR.
Error processing
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
[4] If a receive error occurs, read the OER,
PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify
the error. After performing the
(Continued on next page)
[2]
Read RDRF flag in SSR
appropriate error processing, ensure
that the OER, PER, and FER flags are
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be
resumed if any of these flags are set to
1. In the case of a framing error, a
break can be detected by reading the
value of the input port corresponding to
the RxD pin.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[3]
(A)
Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 14.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous mode)(1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 197 of 400
[4]
Error processing
No
OER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
No
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
(A)
Clear OER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 198 of 400
14.5
Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Figure 14.9 shows the general format for clocked synchronous communication. In clocked
synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. A single
character in the transmit data consists of the 8-bit data starting from the LSB. In clocked
synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of
the serial clock to the next. In clocked synchronous mode, the SCI3 receives data in synchronous
with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the
MSB state. In clocked synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the
SCI3, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication
through the use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-
buffered structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling
continuous data transfer.
8-bit
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Synchronization
clock
LSB
Bit 0
MSB
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Serial data
Don’t care
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Don’t care
Figure 14.9 Data Format in Clocked Synchronous Communication
14.5.1 Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
synchronization clock input at the SCK3 pin can be selected, according to the setting of the COM
bit in SMR and CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR3. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock,
the serial clock is output from the SCK3 pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of
one character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.
14.5.2
SCI3 Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, the SCI3 should be initialized as described in a sample
flowchart in figure 14.4.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 199 of 400
14.5.3
Serial Data Transmission
Figure 14.10 shows an example of SCI3 operation for transmission in clocked synchronous mode.
In serial transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI recognizes that data has
been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. The SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at
this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
3. 8-bit data is sent from the TxD pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock
mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock
has been specified. Serial data is transmitted sequentially from the LSB (bit 0), from the TXD
pin.
4. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
5. If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission
of the next frame is started.
6. If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains
the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, a TEI interrupt
request is generated.
7. The SCK3 pin is fixed high.
Figure 14.11 shows a sample flowchart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is
cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (OER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.
Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
LSI
TXI interrupt
TDRE flag
cleared
to 0
TXI interrupt request generated
TEI interrupt request
generated
operation request
generated
User
processing
Data written
to TDR
Figure 14.10 Example of SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 200 of 400
Start transmission
[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is
set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag
is automatically cleared to 0 and clocks are
output to start the data transmission.
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[2] To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag
is automatically cleared to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
Yes
All data transmitted?
No
[2]
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 14.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 201 of 400
14.5.4
Serial Data Reception (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Figure 14.12 shows an example of SCI3 operation for reception in clocked synchronous mode. In
serial reception, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronous clock input or
output, starts receiving data.
2. The SCI3 stores the received data in RSR.
3. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
in SSR is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this
time, an ERI interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the
RDRF flag remains to be set to 1.
4. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt request is
generated.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
1 frame
RDRF
OER
LSI
RXI interrupt RDRF flag
RXI interrupt request generated
ERI interrupt request
operation
request
generated
cleared
to 0
generated by
overrun error
User
processing
RDR data read
RDR data has
not been read
(RDRF = 1)
Overrun error
processing
Figure 14.12 Example of SCI3 Reception Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 14.13 shows a sample flowchart
for serial data reception.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 202 of 400
Start reception
[1] Read the OER flag in SSR to determine if
there is an error. If an overrun error has
occurred, execute overrun error processing.
[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR.
When data is read from RDR, the RDRF
flag is automatically cleared to 0.
[1]
Read OER flag in SSR
Yes
OER = 1
No
[4]
[3] To continue serial reception, before the
MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,
reading the RDRF flag and reading RDR
should be finished. When data is read from
RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
Error processing
(Continued below)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[2]
[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the OER
flag in SSR, and after performing the
appropriate error processing, clear the OER
flag to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if
the OER flag is set to 1.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[3]
Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
[4]
Error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear OER flag in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 203 of 400
14.5.5
Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception
Figure 14.14 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after
checking that the SCI3 has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear
TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive
mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI3 has finished
reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (OER, FER,
and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 204 of 400
Start transmission/reception
Read TDRE flag in SSR
[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit
data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the
TDRE flag is automatically cleared to
0.
[1]
No
[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR.
TDRE = 1
Yes
When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
0.
Write transmit data to TDR
Read OER flag in SSR
[3] To continue serial transmission/
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR.
Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is transmitted, read 1
from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible. Then write data to
TDR.
Yes
OER = 1
No
[4]
Error processing
[2]
When data is written to TDR, the
TDRE flag is automatically cleared to
0. When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
0.
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the
OER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the OER flag to 0.
Transmission/reception cannot be
resumed if the OER flag is set to 1.
For overrun error processing, see
figure 14.13.
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[3]
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
(Clocked Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 205 of 400
14.6
Multiprocessor Communication Function
Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of
processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When
multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID
code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle
that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to
differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the
multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the
cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 14.15 shows an example of inter-processor
communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code
of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1
multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not
match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.
The SCI3 uses the MPIE bit in SCR3 to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,
transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,
RDRF, FER, and OER to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On
reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and
the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR3 is
set to 1 at this time, an RXI interrupt is generated.
When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit
settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor
communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 206 of 400
Transmitting
station
Serial transmission line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial
data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
(MPB = 0)
ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle =
receiving station
specification
Data transmission to
receiving station specified by ID
Legend
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
Figure 14.15 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 207 of 400
14.6.1
Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 14.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID
transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission
cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI3 operations are the same
as those in asynchronous mode.
Start transmission
[1] Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, set the MPBT bit in
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
SSR to 0 or 1, then write transmit
data to TDR. When data is written to
TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
[2] To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR. When data is
written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automatically cleared to 0.
Set MPBT bit in SSR
[3] To output a break in serial
transmission, set the port PCR to 1,
clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR3 to 0.
Write transmit data to TDR
Yes
[2]
All data transmitted?
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Break output?
Yes
[3]
Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 14.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 208 of 400
14.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figure 14.17 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in
SCR3 is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On receiving
data with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI interrupt request
is generated at this time. All other SCI3 operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure
14.18 shows an example of SCI3 operation for multiprocessor format reception.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 209 of 400
[1] Set the MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1.
[2] Read OER and FER in SSR to check for
errors. Receive error processing is performed
in cases where a receive error occurs.
[3] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR
and compare it with this station’s ID.
If the data is not this station’s ID, set the MPIE
bit to 1 again.
Start reception
Set MPIE bit in SCR3 to 1
[1]
[2]
Read OER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
FER+OER = 1
When data is read from RDR, the RDRF flag
is automatically cleared to 0.
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[3]
[4] Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the data in RDR.
[5] If a receive error occurs, read the OER and
FER flags in SSR to identify the error. After
performing the appropriate error processing,
ensure that the OER and FER flags are all
cleared to 0.
No
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
Reception cannot be resumed if either of
these flags is set to 1.
This station’s ID?
Yes
In the case of a framing error, a break can be
detected by reading the RxD pin value.
Read OER and FER flags in SSR
Yes
FER+OER = 1
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[4]
No
[5]
RDRF = 1
Error processing
Yes
(Continued on
next page)
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
All data received?
No
[A]
Clear RE bit in SCR3 to 0
<End>
Figure 14.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 210 of 400
[5]
Error processing
OER = 1
No
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
[A]
Framing error processing
Clear OER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
<End>
Figure 14.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 211 of 400
Start
bit
Receive
data (ID1)
Stop Start
bit bit
Receive data
(Data1)
Stop Mark state
bit
(idle state)
MPB
1
MPB
0
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
LSI
operation
RXI interrupt
request
MPIE cleared
to 0
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RXI interrupt request
is not generated, and
RDR retains its state
User
processing
RDR data read
When data is not
this station's ID,
MPIE is set to 1
again
(a) When data does not match this receiver's ID
Start
bit
Receive
data (ID2)
Stop Start
bit bit
Receive data
(Data2)
Stop Mark state
bit
(idle state)
MPB
1
MPB
0
Serial
data
1
0
D0 D1
D7
1
0
D0 D1
1 frame
D7
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
ID2
Data2
LSI
operation
RXI interrupt
request
MPIE cleared
to 0
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RXI interrupt RDRF flag
request
cleared
to 0
User
processing
RDR data read
When data is
this station's
ID, reception
is continued
RDR data read
MPIE set to 1
again
(b) When data matches this receiver's ID
Figure 14.18 Example of SCI3 Operation in Reception Using Multiprocessor Format
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 212 of 400
14.7
Interrupts
The SCI3 creates the following six interrupt requests: transmission end, transmit data empty,
receive data full, and receive errors (overrun error, framing error, and parity error). Table 14.6
shows the interrupt sources.
Table 14.6 SCI3 Interrupt Requests
Interrupt Requests
Receive Data Full
Transmit Data Empty
Transmission End
Receive Error
Abbreviation
Interrupt Sources
RXI
TXI
TEI
ERI
Setting RDRF in SSR
Setting TDRE in SSR
Setting TEND in SSR
Setting OER, FER, and PER in SSR
The initial value of the TDRE flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TIE bit in SCR3 is set to 1 before
transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TXI interrupt request is generated even if the transmit data
is not ready. The initial value of the TEND flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TEIE bit in SCR3 is
set to 1 before transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TEI interrupt request is generated even if
the transmit data has not been sent. It is possible to make use of the most of these interrupt
requests efficiently by transferring the transmit data to TDR in the interrupt routine. To prevent
the generation of these interrupt requests (TXI and TEI), set the enable bits (TIE and TEIE) that
correspond to these interrupt requests to 1, after transferring the transmit data to TDR.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 213 of 400
14.8
Usage Notes
14.8.1 Break Detection and Processing
When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RxD pin value
directly. In a break, the input from the RxD pin becomes all 0, setting the FER flag, and possibly
the PER flag. Note that as the SCI3 continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if
the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
14.8.2 Mark State and Break Sending
When TE is 0, the TxD pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are
determined by PCR and PDR. This can be used to set the TxD pin to mark state (high level) or
send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state
until TE is set to 1, set both PCR and PDR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TxD pin
becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TxD pin. To send a break during serial transmission,
first set PCR to 1 and PDR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the transmitter is
initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TxD pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is
output from the TxD pin.
14.8.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (OER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared
to 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 214 of 400
14.8.4
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI3 operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the
transfer rate. In reception, the SCI3 samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock,
and performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the
8th pulse of the basic clock as shown in figure 14.19.
Thus, the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.
1
D – 0.5
M = (0.5 –
) –
– (L – 0.5) F × 100(%)
2N
N
... Formula (1)
Where N : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
D : Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0)
L : Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F : Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty) = 0.5 in
formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula.
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875%
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in
system design.
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15
0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RxD)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 14.19 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 215 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 216 of 400
Section 15 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I2C bus (inter-IC bus)
interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the
Philips configuration, however.
15.1
Features
•
Selection of I2C format or clocked synchronous serial format
I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation
Clocked synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for
master operation only
•
•
•
•
•
•
I2C bus format
Two ways of setting slave address
Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode
Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving
Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting
Wait function in master mode
A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag.
•
•
Wait function in slave mode
A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible.
Three interrupt sources
Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I2C bus format and address
reception after loss of master arbitration)
Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in
slave receive mode
Stop condition detection
Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode)
Direct bus drive
•
•
Two pins, SCL and SDA pins function as NMOS open-drain outputs when the bus drive
function is selected.
Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface.
Figure 15.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. The I/O pins are NMOS
open drains. Set the upper limit of voltage applied to the power supply (VCC) voltage range +
0.3 V, i.e. 5.8 V.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 217 of 400
IFIIC00A_000020020300
ø
PS
ICCR
ICMR
SCL
Clock
control
Noise
canceler
Bus state
decision
circuit
ICSR
ICDRT
ICDRS
ICDRR
Arbitration
decision
circuit
Output data
control
circuit
SDA
Noise
canceler
Address
comparator
SAR, SARX
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
generator
Legend:
ICCR: I C bus control register
ICMR: I C bus mode register
ICSR: I C bus status register
2
2
2
2
ICDR: I C bus data register
SAR: Slave address register
SARX: Slave address register X
PS:
Prescaler
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 218 of 400
VDD
VCC
SCL
SDA
SCL
SDA
SCL in
out
SDA in
out
(Master)
This LSI
SCL in
SCL in
out
out
SDA in
SDA in
out
out
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
Figure 15.2 I2C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This LSI as Master)
15.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 15.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface.
Table 15.1 I2C Bus Interface Pins
Name
Abbreviation
SCL
I/O
I/O
I/O
Function
Serial clock
Serial data
IIC serial clock input/output
IIC serial data input/output
SDA
15.3 Register Descriptions
The I2C bus interface has the following registers. ICDR, SARX, ICMR, and SAR are allocated to
one address, and registers that can be accessed depend on the ICE bit in ICCR. When ICE = 0.
SAR and SARX can be accessed. When ICE = 1, ICMR and ICDR can be accessed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
I2C bus control register(ICCR)
I2C bus status register(ICSR)
I2C bus data register(ICDR)
I2C bus mode register(ICMR)
Slave address register(SAR)
Second slave address register(SARX)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 219 of 400
•
Timer serial control register(TSCR)
15.3.1 I2C bus data register(ICDR)
ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when
transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift
register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). Data transfers among the
three registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and
affect the status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF. When TDRE is 1 and the transmit
buffer is empty, TDRE shows that the next transmit data can be written from the CPU. When
RDRF is 1, it shows that the valid receive data is stored in the receive buffer.
If I2C is in transmit mode and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0) following
transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred automatically from
ICDRT to ICDRS. If I2C is in receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF
flag is 0) following transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, data is transferred
automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR.
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side
when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB
side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1.
ICDR can be written and read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset.
The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the
TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 220 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
− TDRE − −
Description
Transmit Data Register Empty
[Setting conditions]
•
In transmit mode, when a start condition is detected in
the bus line state after a start condition is issued in
master mode with the I2C bus format or serial format
selected
•
•
•
When transmit mode (TRS = 1) is set without a format
When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS
When a switch is made from receive mode to transmit
mode after detection of a start condition
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
When transmit data is written in ICDR in transmit mode
When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state
after a stop condition is issued with the I2C bus format
or serial format selected
•
•
When a stop condition is detected with the I2C bus
format selected
In receive mode
−
RDRF
−
−
Receive Data Register Full
[Setting condition]
When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR
[Clearing condition]
When ICDR(ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 221 of 400
15.3.2 Slave address register(SAR)
SAR selects the slave address and selects the communication format. SAR can be written and read
only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SVA6
SVA5
SVA4
SVA3
SVA2
SVA1
SVA0
FS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Slave Address 6 to 0
Sets a slave address
Selects the communication format together with the FSX bit
in SARX. Refer to table 15.2.
15.3.3 Second slave address register(SARX)
SARX stores the second slave address and selects the communication format. SARX can be
written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SVAX6
SVAX5
SVAX4
SVAX3
SVAX2
SVAX1
SVAX0
FSX
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Slave Address 6 to 0
Sets the second slave address
Selects the communication format together with the FS bit
in SAR. Refer to table 15.2.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 222 of 400
Table 15.2 Communication Format
SAR
FS
0
SARX
FSX
0
I2C Transfer Format
SAR and SARX are used as the slave addresses with
the I2C bus format.
0
1
1
1
0
1
Only SAR is used as the slave address with the I2C bus
format.
Only SARX is used as the slave address with the I2C
bus format.
Clock synchronous serial format (SAR and SARX are
invalid)
15.3.4 I2C Bus Mode Register(ICMR)
The I2C bus mode register (ICMR) sets the transfer format and transfer rate. It can only be
accessed when the ICE bit in ICCR is 1.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 223 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
MLS
0
R/W
MSB-First/LSB-First Select
0: MSB-first
1: LSB-first
Set this bit to 0 when the I2C bus format is used.
6
WAIT
0
R/W
Wait Insertion Bit
This bit is valid only in master mode with the I2C bus
format.
When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of the clock for the final
data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state
begins(with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is
cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the acknowledge
bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and
acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no wait
inserted. The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of
the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of the WAIT
setting.
5
4
3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Serial Clock Select 2 to 0
This bit is valid only in master mode.
These bits select the required transfer rate, together with
the IICX bit in TSCR. Refer table 15.3.
2
1
0
BC2
BC1
BC0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit Counter 2 to 0
These bits specify the number of bits to be transferred next.
With the I2C bus format, the data is transferred with one
addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should
be made during an interval between transfer frames. If bits
BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000, the setting
should be made while the SCL line is low. The value
returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the
acknowledge bit.
I2C Bus Format
Clocked Synchronous Mode
000: 9
000: 8
001: 1
010: 2
011: 3
100: 4
101: 5
110: 6
111: 7
001: 2
010: 3
011: 4
100: 5
101: 6
110: 7
111: 8
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 224 of 400
Table 15.3 I2C Transfer Rate
TSCR
ICMR
Bit 0
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Transfer Rate
IICX
0
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Clock
φ/28
φ=5 MHz φ=8 MHz φ=10 MHz φ=16 MHz
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
179MHz 286kHz
357kHz
250kHz
208kHz
156kHz
125kHz
571kHz
400kHz
333kHz
250kHz
200kHz
160kHz
0
φ/40
125kHz
104kHz
200kHz
167kHz
0
φ/48
0
φ/64
78.1kHz 125kHz
62.5kHz 100kHz
0
φ/80
0
φ/100
φ/112
φ/128
φ/56
50.0kHz 80.0kHz 100kHz
0
44.6kHz 71.4kHz 89.3kHz 143kHz
39.1kHz 62.5kHz 78.1kHz 125kHz
0
1
89.3kHz 143kHz
62.5kHz 100kHz
179kHz
125kHz
286kHz
200kHz
167kHz
1
φ/80
1
φ/96
52.1kHz 83.3kHz 104kHz
1
φ/128
φ/160
φ/200
φ/224
φ/256
39.1kHz 62.5kHz 78.1kHz 125kHz
31.3kHz 50.0kHz 62.5kHz 100kHz
25.0kHz 40.0kHz 50.0kHz 80.0kHz
22.3kHz 35.7kHz 44.6kHz 71.4kHz
19.5kHz 31.3kHz 39.1kHz 62.5kHz
1
1
1
1
15.3.5 I2C Bus Control Register(ICCR)
I2C bus control register (ICCR) consists of the control bits and interrupt request flags of I2C bus
interface.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
ICE R/W
Description
I2C Bus Interface Enable
7
0
When this bit is set to 1, the I2C bus interface module is
enabled to send/receive data and drive the bus since it is
connected to the SCL and SDA pins. ICMR and ICDR can
be accessed.
When this bit is cleared, the module is halted and
separated from the SCL and SDA pins. SAR and SARX
can be accessed.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 225 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
6
IEIC
0
R/W
I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable
When this bit is 1, Interrupts are enabled by IRIC.
Master/Slave Select
5
4
MST
TRS
0
0
R/W
R/W
Transmit/Receive Select
00: Slave receive mode
01: Slave transmit mode
10: Master receive mode
11: Master transmit mode
Both these bits will be cleared by hardware when they lose
in a bus contention in master mode of the I2C bus format. In
slave receive mode, the R/W bit in the first frame
immediately after the start automatically sets these bits in
receive mode or transmit mode by using hardware. The
settings can be made again for the bits that were
set/cleared by hardware, by reading these bits. When the
TRS bit is intended to change during a transfer, the bit will
not be switched until the frame transfer is completed,
including acknowledgement.
3
2
ACKE
BBSY
0
0
R/W
R/W
Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection
0: The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and
continuous transfer is performed. The value of the received
acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is
always 0.
1: If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is
interrupted.
Bus Busy
In slave mode, reading the BBSY flag enables to confirm
whether the I2C bus is occupied or released. The BBSY flag
is set to 0 when the SDA level changes from high to low
under the condition of SCl = high, assuming that the start
condition has been issued. The BBSY flag is cleared to 0
when the SDA level changes from low to high under the
condition of SCl = high, assuming that the start condition
has been issued. Writing to the BBSY flag in slave mode is
disabled.
In master mode, the BBSY flag is used to issue start and
stop conditions. Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP to issue a
start condition. Follow this procedure when also re-
transmitting a start condition. To issue a start/stop
condition, use the MOV instruction. The I2C bus interface
must be set in master transmit mode before the issue of a
start condition.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 226 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
IRIC R/W
Description
I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag
1
0
Also see table 15.4.
[Setting conditions]
In master mode with I2C bus format
•
•
•
When a start condition is detected in the bus line state
after a start condition is issued
When a wait is inserted between the data and
acknowledge bit when WAIT=1
At the rising edge of the ninth transfer/receive clock,
and at the falling edge of the eighth transfer/receive
clock when a wait is inseted
•
•
When a slave address is received after bus arbitration
is lost(when the AL flag is set to1)
When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the
ACKE bit is 1(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
I2C bus format slave mode
•
When the slave address(SVA, SVAX) matches(when
the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of
data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start
condition or stop condition detection(FS=0 and when
the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
•
When the general call address is detected(when the
ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up
to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop
condition detection(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set
to 1)
•
•
When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the
ACKE bit is 1(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
When a stop condition is detected(when the STOP or
ESTP flag is set to 1)
Clocked synchronous serial format
•
At the end of data transfer(when the TDRE or RDRF
flag is set to 1)
•
When a start condition is detected with serial format
selected
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC=1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 227 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
SCP
Description
0
1
W
Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit
The SCP bit controls the issue of start/stop conditions in
master mode.
To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A
retransmit start condition is issued in the same way. To
issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. This
bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored.
15.3.6 I2C Bus Status Register(ICSR)
The I2C bus status register (ICSR) consists of status flags. Also see table 15.4.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7
6
5
ESTP
STOP
IRTR
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Error Stop Condition Detection Flag
This bit is valid in I2C bus format slave mode.
[Setting condition]
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer.
[Clearing condition]
•
•
When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP=1
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag
This bit is valid in I2C bus format slave mode.
[Setting condition]
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer.
[Clearing condition]
•
•
When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP=1
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
I2C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception
Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting conditions]
In I2C bus interface slave mode
•
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX=1
In I2C bus interface other modes
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
•
When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR=1
When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 228 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
4
AASX
0
R/W
Second Slave Address Recognition Flag
[Setting condition]
When the second slave address is detected in slave
receive mode and FSX=0
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
•
When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX=1
When a start condition is detected
In master mode
3
AL
0
R/W
Arbitration Lost
[Setting condition]
When bus arbitration was lost in master mode.
[Clearing conditions]
•
•
When 0 is written in AL after reading AL=1
When ICDR data is written(transmit mode) or
read(receive mode)
2
AAS
0
R/W
Slave Address Recognition Flag
[Setting condition]
When the slave address or general call address is detected
in slave receive mode and FS=0.
[Clearing conditions]
•
When ICDR data is written(transmit mode) or
read(receive mode)
•
•
When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS=1
In master mode
1
ADZ
0
R/W
General Call Address Recognition Flag
This bit is valid in I2C bus format slave receive mode.
[Setting condition]
When the general call address is detected in slave receive
mode and FSX=0 or FS=0.
[Clearing conditions]
•
When ICDR data is written(transmit mode) or
read(receive mode)
•
•
When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ=1
In master mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 229 of 400
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
ACKB R/W
Description
0
0
Acknowledge Bit
In transmit mode, the acknowledge data that are returned
by the receive device is loaded. In receive mode, the
acknowledge data originally specified to this bit is sent to
the transmit device, after receiving data. When this bit is
read, the loaded value (return value from the receive
device) is read at transmission and the specified value is
read at reception.
15.3.7 Timer Serial Control Register(TSCR)
The timer serial control register (TSCR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the
operating modes.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W
Description
7 to −
2
All 1
−
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
I2C Control Unit Reset
1
IICRST
0
R/W
Resets the control unit except for the I2C registers. When a
hang up occurs due to illegal communication during I2C
operation, setting IICRST to 1 can set a port or reset the
I2C control unit without initializing registers.
0
IICX
0
R/W
I2C Transfer Rate Select
Selects the transfer rate in master mode, together with bits
CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR. Refer to table 15.3.
When, with the I2C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags
must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a
corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer. When the TDRE or RDRF internal
flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set. Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag
are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set. Table 15.4 shows the relationship
between the flags and the transfer states.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 230 of 400
Table 15.4 Flags and Transfer States
MST TRS BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL
AAS ADZ ACKB State
1/0 1/0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Idle state(flag clearing required)
Start condition issuance
Start condition established
Master mode wait
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1/0
1/0
0
0
0/1
0/1
0
0
Master mode transmit/receive end
Arbitration lost
1/0
0
1/0 1/0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
SAR match by first frame in slave mode
General call address match
SARX match
0
0
0
0
1
0
1/0
0
0/1
Slave mode transmit/receive end(except after
SARX match)
0
0
0
1/0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Slave mode transmit/receive end(after SARX
match)
0
0
1
1/0
1/0
1/0
0/1
Stop condition detected
15.4
Operation
The I2C bus interface has serial and I2C bus formats.
15.4.1 I2C Bus Data Format
The I2C bus formats are addressing formats and an acknowledge bit is inserted. These are shown
in figures 15.3. Figure 15.5 shows the I2C bus timing.The first frame following a start condition
always consists of 8 bits.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 231 of 400
(a) I2C bus format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0)
S
1
SLA
7
R/
A
1
DATA
n
A
1
A/
1
P
1
1
n: transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
m: transfer frame count
(m ≥ 1)
1
m
(b) I2C bus format (start condition retransmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0)
S
1
SLA
7
R/
A
1
DATA
n1
A/
S
1
SLA
7
R/
A
1
DATA
n2
A/
1
P
1
1
1
1
1
m1
1
m2
n1 and n2: transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8)
m1 and m2: transfer frame count (m1 and m2 ≥ 1)
Figure 15.3 I2C Bus Data Formats (I2C Bus Formats)
SDA
1-7
8
9
1-7
8
9
1-7
8
9
SCL
S
SLA
R/
A
DATA
A
DATA
A/
P
Figure 15.4 I2C Bus Timing
Legend
S:
Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high
SLA: Slave address
R/W: Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when
R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0
A:
Acknowledge. The receiving device drives SDA
DATA: Transferred data
P:
Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 232 of 400
15.4.2 Master Transmit Operation
When data is set to ICDR during the period between the execution of an instruction to issue a start
condition and the creation of the start condition, the data may not be output normally, because
there will be a contention between a generation of a start condition and an output of data.
Although data H'FF is to be sent to the ICDR register by a dummy write operation before an issue
of a stop condition, the H'FF data may be output by the dummy write operation if the execution of
the instruction to issue a stop condition is delayed. To prevent these problems, follow the
flowchart shown below during the master transmit operation.
In I2C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit
data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and
operations synchronize with the ICDR writing are described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, and bit IICX
in TSCR, according to the operating mode.
2. Read the BBSY flag in ICCR to confirm that the bus is free.
3. Set bits MST and TRS to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode.
4. Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This changes SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and
generates the start condition.
5. Then IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
6. Write the data (slave address + R/W) to ICDR. With the I2C bus format (when the FS bit in
SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates
the 7-bit slave address and transmit/receive direction. As indicating the end of the transfer, and
so the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC continuously not to execute
other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been transmitted before the IRIC
clearing, it can not be determine the end of transmission. The master device sequentially sends
the transmission clock and the data written to ICDR using the timing shown in figure 15.5. The
selected slave device (i.e. the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low at
the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal.
7. When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
8. Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that ACKB is cleared to 0. When the slave device has
not acknowledged (ACKB bit is 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission, and retry the
transmit operation.
9. Write the transmit data to ICDR. As indicating the end of the transfer, and so the IRIC flag is
cleared to 0. Perform the ICDR write and the IRIC flag clearing sequentially, just as in the
step[6]. Transmission of the next frame is performed in synchronization with the internal
clock.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 233 of 400
10. When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
11. Read the ACKB bit in ICSR. Confirm that the slave device has been acknowledged (ACKB bit
is 0). When there is data to be transmitted, go to the step [9] to continue next transmission.
When the slave device has not acknowledged (ACKB bit is set to 1), operate the step [12] to
end transmission.
12. Clear the IRIC flag to 0. And write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from low
to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition.
Start condition generation
SCL
(master output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
Slave address
Bit 4 Bit 3
SDA
(master output)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
R/
Bit 7
Bit 6
[7]
Slave address
Data 1
SDA
(slave output)
[5]
A
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
Data 1
Address + R/
*
[9] IRIC clearance
ICDR writing
prohibited
Normal
operation
[9] ICDR write
[6] IRIC clearance
[6] ICDR write
User processing [4] Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0
(start condition
issuance)
Note: * Data write timing in ICDR
Figure 15.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing Example
(MLS = WAIT = 0)
15.4.3 Master Receive Operation
The data buffer of the I2C module can receive data consecutively since it consists of ICDRR and
ICDRS. However, if the completion of receiving the last data is delayed, there will be a contention
between the instruction to issue a stop condition and the SCl clock output to receive the next data,
and may generate unnecessary clocks or fix the output level of the SDA line as low. The switch
timing of the ACKB bit in the ICSR register should be controlled because the acknowledge bit
does not return acknowledgement after receiving the last data in master mode. These problems can
be avoided by using the WAIT function. Follow the flowchart shown below.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 234 of 400
In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an
acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits data. The reception procedure and operations with
the wait function synchronized with the ICDR read operation to receive data in sequence are
shown below.
1. Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode, and set the
WAIT bit in ICMR to 1. Also clear the bit in ICSR to ACKB 0 (acknowledge data setting).
2. When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output,
and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. In order to detect wait operation,
set the IRIC flag in ICCR must be cleared to 0. After reading ICDR, clear IRIC continuously
not to execute other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been received before
the IRIC clearing, it can not be determine the end of reception.
3. The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has
been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If the first frame is the last
receive data, execute the step [10] to halt reception.
4. Clear the IRIC flag to release from the Wait State. The master device outputs the 9th clock and
drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal.
5. When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag in ICCR and the IRTR flag in ICSR
are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse. The master device outputs SCL clock to
receive next data.
6. Read ICDR.
7. Clear the IRIC flag to detect next wait operation. Data reception process from the step [5] to
[7] should be executed during one byte reception period after IRIC flag clearing in the step [4]
or [9] to release wait status.
8. The IRIC flags set to 1 at the fall of 8th receive clock pulse. SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If this frame is the last
receive data, execute the step [10] to halt reception.
9. Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to cancel wait operation. The master device outputs the 9th clock
and drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an ackowledge signal. Data can be
received continuously by repeating the step [5] to [9].
10. Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 so as to return “No acknowledge” data. Also set the TRS bit in
ICCR to 1 to switch from receive mode to transmit mode.
11. Clear IRIC flag to 0 to release from the Wait State.
12. When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
receive clock pulse.
13. Clear the WAIT bit to 0 to switch from wait mode to no wait mode. Read ICDR and the IRIC
flag to 0. Clearing of the IRIC flag should be after the WAIT = 0. If the WAIT bit is cleared to
0 after clearing the IRIC flag and then an instruction to issue a stop condition is executed, the
stop condition cannot be issued because the output level of the SDA line is fixed as low.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 235 of 400
14. Clear the BBSY bit and SCP bit to 0. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high,
and generates the stop condition.
Master tansmit mode
Master receive mode
SCL
(master output)
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Data 1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3
Data 2
SDA
A
(slave output)
[3]
[5]
SDA
(master output)
A
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
Data 1
User processing
[2] ICDR read
(dummy read)
[1] TRS cleared to 0
WAIT set to 1
ACKB cleared to 0
[2] IRIC clearance
[7] IRIC clearance
[4] IRIC clearance [6] ICDR read
(Data 1)
Figure 15.6 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing Example (1)
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1)
SCL
(master output)
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
SDA
(slave output)
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
[8]
[5]
[8]
[5]
SDA
(master output)
A
A
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
Data 3
Data 1
Data 2
[6] ICDR read
(Data 3)
[7] IRIC clearance
User processing
[6] ICDR read
(Data 2)
[9] IRIC clearance
[9] IRIC clearance
[7] IRIC clearance
Figure 15.6 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing Example (2)
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 236 of 400
15.4.4 Slave Receive Operation
In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The reception procedure and operations in slave
receive mode are described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR
according to the operating mode.
2. When the start condition output by the master device is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is set
to 1.
3. When the slave address matches in the first frame following the start condition, the device
operates as the slave device specified by the master device. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 0, the
TRS bit in ICCR remains cleared to 0, and slave receive operation is performed.
4. At the 9th clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low and returns an
acknowledge signal. At the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in
ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the RDRF internal flag has
been cleared to 0, it is set to 1, and the receive operation continues. If the RDRF internal flag
has been set to 1 and ninth clock is received for the following data receival, the slave device
drives SCL low from the falling edge of the receive clock until data is read into ICDR.
5. Read ICDR and clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to 0. The RDRF flag is cleared to 0.
Receive operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. When SDA is
changed from low to high when SCL is high, and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in
ICCR is cleared to 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 237 of 400
Start condition issuance
SCL
(master output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
High
SCL
(slave output)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
SDA
(master output)
Slave address
R/
Data 1
[4]
SDA
(slave output)
A
RDRF
IRIC
Interrupt
request
generation
ICDRS
ICDRR
Address + R/
Address + R/
User processing
[5] ICDR read
[5] IRIC clearance
Figure 15.7 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1)
(MLS = ACKB = 0)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 238 of 400
SCL
(master output)
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCL
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
[4]
[4]
Data
1
Data 2
SDA
(slave output)
A
RDRF
IRIC
Interrupt
request
generation
Interrupt
request
generation
ICDRS
ICDRR
Data
Data
1
1
Data 2
Data
2
User processing
[5] ICDR read [5] IRIC clearance
Figure 15.8 Example of Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2)
(MLS = ACKB = 0)
15.4.5 Slave Transmit Operation
In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs
the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and operations
in slave transmit mode are described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR to 1. Set the MLS bit in ICMR and the MST and TRS bits in ICCR
according to the operating mode.
2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition,
the slave device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal. At
the same time, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the 8th data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit in ICCR is set to
1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The TDRE internal flag is set
to 1. The slave device drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until ICDR data is
written.
3. After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write data to ICDR. The TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0.
The written data is transferred to ICDRS, and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR
flags are set to 1 again. After clearing the IRIC flag to 0, write the next data to ICDR. The
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 239 of 400
slave device sequentially sends the data written into ICDR in accordance with the clock output
by the master device at the timing shown in figure 15.9.
4. When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 at the rise of
the 9th transmit clock pulse. If the TDRE internal flag has been set to 1, this slave device
drives SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written to ICDR. The master
device drives SDA low at the 9th clock pulse, and returns an acknowledge signal. As this
acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit in ICSR, this bit can be used to determine
whether the transfer operation was performed normally. When the TDRE internal flag is 0, the
data written into ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, transmission is started, and the TDRE internal
flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again.
5. To continue transmission, clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write the next data to be transmitted
into ICDR. The TDRE flag is cleared to 0.
Transmit operations can be performed continuously by repeating steps [4] and [5]. To end
transmission, write H'FF to ICDR. When SDA is changed from low to high when SCL is high,
and the stop condition is detected, the BBSY flag in ICCR is cleared to 0.
Slave receive mode
Slave transmit mode
SCL
(master output)
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
SCL
(slave output)
SDA
(slave output)
Bit
7
Bit
6
Bit
5
Bit
4
Bit
3
Bit
2
Bit
1
Bit
0
Bit
7
Bit
6
A
Data 1
Data 2
[2]
SDA
(master output)
A
R/
TDRE
IRIC
[3]
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
request
Interrupt
request
generation
generation
generation
ICDRT
ICDRS
Data 1
Data 2
Data 1
Data 2
[3] IRIC
clearance
[3] ICDR
write
[3] ICDR
write
[5] IRIC
clearance
[5] ICDR
write
User processing
Figure 15.9 Example of Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = 0)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 240 of 400
FS = 1 and FSX = 1
S
1
DATA
8
DATA
n
P
1
n: transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
1
m
m: transfer frame count
(m ≥ 1)
Figure 15.10 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format)
15.4.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Format
Serial format is a non-addressing format that has no acknowledge bit. Figure 15.10 shows this
format.
15.4.7 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the
FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1, SCL is
automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized with the
internal clock. Figure 15.11 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 241 of 400
(a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, no wait)
SCL
7
8
9
1
1
7
8
A
SDA
IRIC
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
(b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I2C bus format, wait inserted)
SCL
8
9
1
1
SDA
IRIC
8
A
User processing
Clear
IRIC
Clear Write to ICDR (transmit)
IRIC or read ICDR (receive)
(c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format)
SCL
7
8
1
1
SDA
IRIC
7
8
User processing
Clear IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit)
or read ICDR (receive)
Figure 15.11 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 242 of 400
15.4.8 Noise Canceler
The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched
internally. Figure 15.12 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit.
The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA)
input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the
outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held.
Sampling clock
C
C
SCL or
SDA input
signal
Internal
SCL or
SDA
D
Q
D
Q
Match
detector
Latch
Latch
signal
System clock
period
Sampling
clock
Figure 15.12 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler
15.4.9 Sample Flowcharts
Figures 15.13 to 15.16 show sample flowcharts for using the I2C bus interface in each mode.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 243 of 400
Start
Initialize
[1] Initialization
Read BBSY in ICCR
[2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.
No
BBSY = 0?
Yes
Set MST = 1 and
TRS = 1 in ICCR
[3] Select master transmit mode.
[4] Start condition issuance
Write BBSY =1 and
SCP = 0 in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[5] Wait for a start condition
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Write transmit data in ICDR
[6] Set transmit data for the first byte
(slave address + R/ ).
(After writing ICDR, clear IRIC
continuously)
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ACKB in ICSR
[8] Test the acknowledge bit,
transferred from slave device.
No
No
ACKB = 0?
Yes
Transmit mode?
Yes
Master receive mode
[9] Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
Write transmit data in ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
(After writing ICDR, clear IRIC
immediately)
[10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
[11] Test for end of tranfer
No
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ACKB in ICSR
End of transmission?
or ACKB = 1?
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[12] Stop condition issuance
Write BBSY = 0 and
SCP = 0 in ICCR
End
Figure 15.13 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 244 of 400
Master receive operation
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR
[1] Select receive mode.
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
Read ICDR
[2] Start receiving. The first read
is a dummy read. After reading
ICDR, please clear IRIC immediately.
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[3] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Yes
Last receive?
No
[4] Clear IRIC.
Clear IRIC in ICCR
(to end the wait insertion)
Read IRIC in ICCR
[5] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
[6] Read the receive data.
[7] Clear IRIC.
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[8] Wait for the next data to be
received.
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Yes
Last receive?
No
[9] Clear IRIC.
(to end the wait insertion)
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR
Set TRS = 1 in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[10] Set acknowledge data for
the last reception.
[11] Clear IRIC.
(to end the wait insertion)
Read IRIC in ICCR
[12] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Set Wait = 0 in ICMR
Read ICDR
[13] Clear wait mode.
Read receive data.
Clear IRIC.
(Note: After setting WAIT = 0,
IRIC should be cleared to 0.)
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Write BBSY = 0 and
SCP = 0 in ICCR
[14] Stop condition issuance.
End
Figure 15.14 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 245 of 400
Start
Initialize
Set MST = 0
[1]
[2]
and TRS = 0 in ICCR
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read AAS and ADZ in ICSR
No
AAS = 1
and ADZ = 0?
General call address processing
* Description omitted
Yes
Read TRS in ICCR
No
TRS = 0?
Yes
Slave transmit mode
Yes
Last receive?
No
Read ICDR
[3]
[1] Select slave receive mode.
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[2] Wait for the first byte to be received (slave
address).
[3] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy read.
[4] Wait for the transfer to end.
[4]
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
[5] Set acknowledge data for the last reception.
[6] Start the last reception.
[7] Wait for the transfer to end.
[8] Read the last receive data.
[5]
[6]
Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[7]
[8]
No
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
End
Figure 15.15 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 246 of 400
Slave transmit mode
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[1] Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
[2] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
[3] Test for end of transfer.
Write transmit data in ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[1]
[4] Set slave receive mode.
[5] Dummy read (to release the SCL line).
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
[2]
[3]
No
Yes
Read ACKB in ICSR
End
of transmission
(ACKB = 1)?
No
Yes
[4]
[5]
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
End
Figure 15.16 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 247 of 400
15.5
Usage Notes
1. In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an
instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output
consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start
condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the
instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that SCL may not yet have gone low when
BBSY is cleared to 0.
2. Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these
conditions when reading or writing to ICDR.
Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRT to ICDRS)
Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRS to ICDRR)
3. Table 15.5 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal
clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the
bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance.
Table 15.5 I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output)
Item
Symbol
tSCLO
Output Timing
28tcyc to 256tcyc
0.5tSCLO
Unit
ns
Notes
SCL output cycle time
SCL output high pulse width
SCL output low pulse width
SDA output bus free time
Start condition output hold time
tSCLHO
tSCLLO
ns
0.5tSCLO
ns
tBUFO
0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc
0.5tSCLO – 1tcyc
1tSCLO
ns
tSTAHO
tSTASO
ns
Retransmission start condition output
setup time
ns
Stop condition output setup time
Data output setup time (master)
Data output setup time (slave)
Data output hold time
tSTOSO
tSDASO
0.5tSCLO + 2tcyc
1tSCLLO – 3tcyc
1tSCLL – 3tcyc
3tcyc
ns
ns
ns
ns
tSDAHO
4. SCL and SDA inputs are sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing
therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in table 20-4 in section 20, Electrical
Characteristics. Note that the I2C bus interface AC timing specifications will not be met with a
system clock frequency of less than 5 MHz.
5. The I2C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for high-
speed mode). In master mode, the I2C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes
one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 248 of 400
the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the high period of SCL is
extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of
the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance
and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in the table in
table 15.6.
Table 15.6 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tsr) Values
Time Indication
I2C Bus
tcyc
Specification ø =
ø =
ø =
ø =
IICX Indication
(Max.)
5 MHz
8 MHz
10 MHz 16 MHz
0
7.5tcyc
Normal mode
1000 ns
1000 ns 937 ns
750 ns
300 ns
468 ns
300 ns
High-speed mode 300 ns
Normal mode 1000 ns
High-speed mode 300 ns
300 ns
1000 ns 1000 ns
300 ns 300 ns
300 ns
1
17.5tcyc
1000 ns 1000 ns
300 ns 300 ns
6. The I2C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns
and 300 ns. The I2C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tScyc and tcyc, as
shown in table 15.5. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I2C bus interface
specifications may not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 15.7 shows output
timing calculations for different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of
rise and fall times. The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the
IICX bit and bits CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to
achieve the maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I2C bus interface
specifications are met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions.
t
BUFO fails to meet the I2C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either (a)
to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 µs) between issuance of a
stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing
permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I2C bus interface
specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be
investigated include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and
capacitive load, (b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices
whose input timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C
bus.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 249 of 400
Table 15.7 I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf)
Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns]
I2C Bus
Specifi-
tSr/tSf
Influence cation ø =
ø =
ø =
ø =
Item
tcyc Indication
(Max.)
(Min.) 5 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 16 MHz
tSCLHO
0.5tSCLO (–tSr) Standard mode
–1000
4000
600
4700
1300
4700
1300
4000
600
4700
600
4000
600
250
100
250
100
0
4000
950
4000
950
4000
950
4000
950
High-speed mode –300
tSCLLO
0.5tSCLO (–tSf ) Standard mode
–250
4750
4750
4750
4750
High-speed mode –250
1000*1 1000*1 1000*1 1000*1
3800*1 3875*1 3900*1 3938*1
750*1 825*1 850*1 888*1
tBUFO
0.5tSCLO –1tcyc Standard mode
–1000
( –tSr )
High-speed mode –300
tSTAHO
tSTASO
tSTOSO
0.5tSCLO –1tcyc Standard mode
(–tSf )
–250
4550
800
4625
875
4650
900
4688
938
High-speed mode –250
1tSCLO (–tSr )
Standard mode
–1000
9000
2200
4400
1350
3100
400
9000
2200
4250
1200
3325
625
9000
2200
4200
1150
3400
700
9000
2200
4125
1075
3513
813
High-speed mode –300
0.5tSCLO + 2tcyc Standard mode
(–tSr )
–1000
High-speed mode –300
tSDASO
(master) (–tSr )
1tSCLLO*2 –3tcyc Standard mode
–1000
High-speed mode –300
–1000
tSDASO
(slave) (–tSr )
1tSCLL*2 –3tcyc Standard mode
3100
400
3325
625
3400
700
3513
813
High-speed mode –300
tSDAHO
3tcyc
Standard mode
0
0
600
375
300
188
High-speed mode
0
600
375
300
188
Notes: 1. Does not meet the I2C bus interface specification
2. Calculated using the I2C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; high-
speed mode: 1300 ns min.).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 250 of 400
7. Note on ICDR Read at end of Master Reception
To halt reception after completion of a receive operation in master receive mode, set the TRS
bit to 1 and write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes the SDA pin from low to high
when the SCL pin is high, and generates the stop condition. After this, receive data can be read
by means of an ICDR read, but if data remains in the buffer the ICDRS receive data will not be
transferred to ICDR, and so it will not be possible to read the second byte of data. If it is
necessary to read the second byte of data, issue the stop condition in master receive mode (i.e.
with the TRS bit cleared to 0). When reading the receive data, first confirm that the BBSY bit
in ICCR is cleared to 0, the stop condition has been generated, and the bus has been released,
then read ICDR with TRS cleared to 0. Note that if the receive data (ICDR data) is read in the
interval between execution of the instruction for issuance of the stop condition (writing of 0 to
BBSY and SCP in ICCR) and the actual generation of the stop condition, the clock may not be
output correctly in subsequent master transmission.
8. Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission
Depending on the timing combination with the start condition issuance and the subsequently
writing data to ICDR, it may not be possible to issue the retransmission and the data
transmission after retransmission condition issuance.
After start condition issuance is done and determined the start condition, write the transmit
data to ICDR, as shown below. Figure 15.17 shows the timing of start condition issuance for
retransmission, and the timing for subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the
corresponding flowchart.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 251 of 400
[1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer
No
No
[1]
IRIC = 1?
[2] Determine whether SCL is low
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICSR
[3] Issue restart condition instruction for transmission
[4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not
Start condition
issuance?
Other processing
Yes
[5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/
)
Read SCL pin
No
No
[2]
SCL = Low?
Yes
Write BBSY = 1,
SCP = 0 (ICSR)
[3]
[4]
Note: Program so that processing from [3] to [5]
is executed continuously.
IRIC = 1?
Yes
[5]
Write transmit data to ICDR
Start condition
(retransmission)
SCL
SDA
9
Bit 7
Data output
ACK
IRIC
[5] ICDR write (next transmit data)
[4] IRIC determination
[3] (Restart) Start condition instruction issuance
[2] Detemination of SCL = Low
[1] IRIC determination
Figure 15.17 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for
Retransmission
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 252 of 400
Section 16 A/D Converter
This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to eight
analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure
16.1.
16.1
Features
•
•
•
•
10-bit resolution
Eight input channels (four channels for the 42-pin version)
Conversion time: at least 4.4 µs per channel (at 16 MHz operation)
Two operating modes
Single mode: Single-channel A/D conversion
Scan mode: Continuous A/D conversion on 1 to 4 channels
Four data registers
•
Conversion results are held in a 16-bit data register for each channel
Sample and hold function
•
•
Two conversion start methods
Software
External trigger signal
•
Interrupt request
An A/D conversion end interrupt request (ADI) can be generated
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 253 of 400
ADCMS30A_000020020300
Module data bus
Internal data bus
AVCC
A
D
D
R
A
A
D
D
R
B
A
D
D
R
C
A
D
D
R
D
A
D
C
S
R
A
D
C
R
10-bit D/A
*
AN0
+
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
ø/4
ø/8
Control circuit
Comparator
Sample-and-
hold circuit
ADI
interrupt
Legend
ADCR : A/D control register
ADCSR : A/D control/status register
ADDRA : A/D data register A
ADDRB : A/D data register B
ADDRC : A/D data register C
ADDRD : A/D data register D
Note: AN4, AN5, AN6, and AN7 do not exist in the 42-pin version.
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 254 of 400
16.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 16.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter. The eight analog input pins are
divided into two groups; analog input pins 0 to 3 (AN0 to AN3) comprising group 0, analog input
pins 4 to 7 (AN4 to AN7) comprising group 1. The AVcc pin is the power supply pin for the
analog block in the A/D converter.
Table 16.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Symbol
AVCC
AN0
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
Analog input pin 0
Analog input pin 1
Analog input pin 2
Analog input pin 3
Analog input pin 4
Analog input pin 5
Analog input pin 6
Analog input pin 7
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Analog block power supply pin
Group 0 analog input pins
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
Group 1 analog input pins
AN5
AN6
AN7
A/D external trigger input
pin
ADTRG
External trigger input pin for starting A/D
conversion
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 255 of 400
16.3
Register Description
The A/D converter has the following registers.
•
•
•
•
•
•
A/D data register A (ADDRA)
A/D data register B (ADDRB)
A/D data register C (ADDRC)
A/D data register D (ADDRD)
A/D control/status register (ADCSR)
A/D control register (ADCR)
16.3.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD)
There are four 16-bit read-only ADDR registers; ADDRA to ADDRD, used to store the results of
A/D conversion. The ADDR registers, which store a conversion result for each channel, are
shown in table 16.2.
The converted 10-bit data is stored in bits 6 to 15. The lower 6 bits are always read as 0.
The data bus between the CPU and the A/D converter is 8 bits wide. The upper byte can be read
directly from the CPU, however the lower byte should be read via a temporary register. The
temporary register contents are transferred from the ADDR when the upper byte data is read.
When reading ADDR, read the upper bytes only or read in word units. ADDR is initialized to
H'0000.
Table 16.2 Analog Input Channels and Corresponding ADDR Registers
Analog Input Channel
Group 0
AN0
Group 1
AN4
A/D Data Register to be Stored Results of A/D Conversion
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
AN1
AN5
AN2
AN6
AN3
AN7
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 256 of 400
16.3.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
ADCSR consists of the control bits and conversion end status bits of the A/D converter.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
ADF
0
R/W
A/D End Flag
[Setting conditions]
•
•
When A/D conversion ends in single mode
When A/D conversion ends on all the channels
selected in scan mode
[Clearing conditions]
When 0 is written after reading ADF = 1
•
6
5
ADIE
0
0
R/W
R/W
A/D Interrupt Enable
A/D conversion end interrupt (ADI) request enabled
by ADF when 1 is set
ADST
A/D Start
Setting this bit to 1 starts A/D conversion. In single
mode, this bit is cleared to 0 automatically when
conversion on the specified channel is complete. In
scan mode, conversion continues sequentially on
the specified channels until this bit is cleared to 0
by software, a reset, or a transition to standby
mode.
4
3
SCAN
CKS
0
0
R/W
R/W
Scan Mode
Selects single mode or scan mode as the A/D
conversion operating mode.
0: Single mode
1: Scan mode
Clock Select
Selects the A/D conversions time
0: Conversion time = 134 states (max.)
1: Conversion time = 70 states (max.)
Clear the ADST bit to 0 before switching the
conversion time.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 257 of 400
Bit
2
Bit Name
CH2
Initial Value R/W
Description
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Channel Select 0 to 2
Select analog input channels.
1
CH1
0
CH0
When SCAN = 0
000: AN0
001: AN1
010: AN2
011: AN3
100: AN4
101: AN5
110: AN6
111: AN7
When SCAN = 1
000: AN0
001: AN0 to AN1
010: AN0 to AN2
011: AN0 to AN3
100: AN4
101: AN4 to AN5
110: AN4 to AN6
111: AN4 to AN7
AN4, AN5, AN6, and AN7 do not exist in the 42-pin
version.
16.3.3
A/D Control Register (ADCR)
ADCR enables A/D conversion started by an external trigger signal.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial Value R/W
Description
7
TRGE
0
R/W
Trigger Enable
A/D conversion is started at the falling edge and
the rising edge of the external trigger signal
(ADTRG) when this bit is set to 1.
The selection between the falling edge and rising
edge of the external trigger pin (ADTRG)
conforms to the WPEG5 bit in the interrupt edge
select register 2 (IEGR2).
6 to 1
0
—
—
All 1
0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Reserved
R/W
Do not set this bit to 1, though the bit is
readable/writable.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 258 of 400
16.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. It has two
operating modes; single mode and scan mode. When changing the operating mode or analog input
channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the bit ADST to 0 in ADCSR. The
ADST bit can be set at the same time as the operating mode or analog input channel is changed.
16.4.1 Single Mode
In single mode, A/D conversion is performed once for the analog input on the specified single
channel as follows:
1. A/D conversion is started when the ADST bit in ADCSR is set to 1, according to software or
external trigger input.
2. When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the corresponding A/D data
register to the channel.
3. On completion of conversion, the ADF bit in ADCSR is set to 1. If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at
this time, an ADI interrupt request is generated.
4. The ADST bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the ADST
bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state.
16.4.2 Scan Mode
In scan mode, A/D conversion is performed sequentially for the analog input on the specified
channels (four channels maximum) as follows:
1. When the ADST bit is set to 1 by software, or external trigger input, A/D conversion starts on
the first channel in the group (AN0 when CH2 = 0, AN4 when CH2 = 1).
2. When A/D conversion for each channel is completed, the result is sequentially transferred to
the A/D data register corresponding to each channel.
3. When conversion of all the selected channels is completed, the ADF flag in ADCSR is set to 1.
If the ADIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an ADI interrupt is requested. Conversion of the first
channel in the group starts again.
4. The ADST bit is not automatically cleared to 0. Steps [2] to [3] are repeated as long as the
ADST bit remains set to 1. When the ADST bit is cleared to 0, A/D conversion stops.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 259 of 400
16.4.3
Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time
The A/D converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. The A/D converter samples the analog
input when the A/D conversion start delay time (tD) has passed after the ADST bit is set to 1, then
starts conversion. Figure 16.2 shows the A/D conversion timing. Table 16.3 shows the A/D
conversion time.
As indicated in figure 16.2, the A/D conversion time includes tD and the input sampling time. The
length of tD varies depending on the timing of the write access to ADCSR. The total conversion
time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 16.3.
In scan mode, the values given in table 16.3 apply to the first conversion time. In the second and
subsequent conversions, the conversion time is 128 states (fixed) when CKS = 0 and 66 states
(fixed) when CKS = 1.
(1)
ø
Address
(2)
Write signal
Input sampling
timing
ADF
tD
tSPL
tCONV
Legend
(1)
(2)
tD
: ADCSR write cycle
: ADCSR address
: A/D conversion start delay
tSPL : Input sampling time
tCONV : A/D conversion time
Figure 16.2 A/D Conversion Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 260 of 400
Table 16.3 A/D Conversion Time (Single Mode)
CKS = 0
CKS = 1
Typ
—
Item
Symbol
Min
6
Typ
—
Max
9
Min
4
Max
5
A/D conversion start delay tD
Input sampling time
A/D conversion time
tSPL
tCONV
—
31
—
—
—
69
15
—
131
134
—
70
Note: All values represent the number of states.
16.4.4
External Trigger Input Timing
The A/D conversion can also be started by an external trigger input. When the TRGE bit is set to 1
in ADCR, external trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin. A falling edge at the ADTRG
input pin sets the ADST bit to 1 in ADCSR, starting A/D conversion. Other operations, in both
single and scan modes, are the same as when the bit ADST has been set to 1 by software. Figure
16.3 shows the timing.
ø
Internal trigger signal
ADST
A/D conversion
Figure 16.3 External Trigger Input Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 261 of 400
16.5
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions
This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below.
•
•
•
Resolution
The number of A/D converter digital output codes
Quantization error
The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 16.4).
Offset error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001
(see figure 16.5).
•
•
•
Full-scale error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (see figure 16.5).
Nonlinearity error
The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristics between zero voltage and
full-scale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error.
Absolute accuracy
The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, full-
scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
111
110
101
100
011
010
001
000
Quantization error
1
8
2
8
3
8
4
8
5
8
6
8
7
8
FS
Analog
input voltage
Figure 16.4 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 262 of 400
Full-scale error
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
FS
Analog
input voltage
Offset error
Figure 16.5 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2)
16.6 Usage Notes
16.6.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance
This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal
for which the signal source impedance is 5 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable the
A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling time;
if the sensor output impedance exceeds 5 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not be
possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy. However, for A/D conversion in single mode with
a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially comprise only the internal
input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored. However, as a low-pass
filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an analog signal with a large
differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µs or greater) (see figure 16.6). When converting a high-speed
analog signal or converting in scan mode, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.
16.6.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy
Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely
affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND.
Care is also required to ensure that filter circuits do not interfere with digital signals or act as
antennas on the mounting board.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 263 of 400
This LSI
A/D converter
Sensor output
impedance
to 5 k
equivalent circuit
10 k
Sensor input
Cin
15 pF
=
Low-pass
filter
20 pF
C to 0.1
F
Figure 16.6 Analog Input Circuit Example
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 264 of 400
Section 17 EEPROM
This LSI has an on-chip 512-byte EEPROM. The block diagram of the EEPROM is shown in
figure 17.1.
17.1
Features
•
Two writing methods:
1-byte write
Page write: Page size 8 bytes
•
Three reading methods:
Current address read
Random address read
Sequential read
•
•
Acknowledge polling possible
Write cycle time:
10 ms (power supply voltage Vcc = 2.7 V or more)
•
•
•
Write/Erase Endurance:
104 cycles/byte (byte write mode), 105 cycles/page (page write mode)
Data retention:
10 years after the write cycle of 104 cycles (page write mode)
Interface with the CPU
I2C bus interface (complies with the standard of Philips Corporation)
Device code 1010
Sleep address code can be changed (initial value: 000))
The I2C bus is open to the outside, so the EEPROM can be directly accessed from the outside.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 265 of 400
EEPROM Data bus
H'FF10
EEPROM Key
Y-select/
register (EKR)
Sense amp.
Memory
array
Key control circuit
H'0000
H'01FF
User area
(512 bytes)
SDA
SCL
2
I C bus interface
control circuit
Slave address
register
H'FF09
ESAR
Power-on reset
Booster circuit
EEPROM module
Legend: ESAR: Register for referring the slave address
(specifies the slave address of the memory array)
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of EEPROM
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 266 of 400
17.2
Input/Output Pins
Pins used in the EEPROM are listed in table 17.1.
Table 17.1 Pin Configuration
Pin name
Symbol Input/Output
Function
Serial clock pin
SCL
Input
The SCL pin is used to control serial input/output
data timing. The data is input at the rising edge of
the clock and output at the falling edge of the clock.
The SCL pin needs to be pulled up by resistor as
that pin is open-drain driven structure of the I2C pin.
Use proper resistor value for your system by
considering VOL, IOL, and the CIN pin capacitance in
section 19.2.2, DC Characteristics and in section
19.2.3, AC Characteristics. Maximum clock
frequency is 400 kHz.
Serial data pin
SDA
Input/Output
The SDA pin is bidirectional for serial data transfer.
The SDA pin needs to be pulled up by resistor as
that pin is open-drain driven structure. Use proper
resistor value for your system by considering VOL,
IOL, and the CIN pin capacitance in section 19.2.2,
DC Characteristics and in section 19.2.3, AC
Characteristics. Except for a start condition and a
stop condition which will be discussed later, the
high-to-low and low-to-high change of SDA input
should be done during SCL low periods.
17.3
Register Description
The EEPROM has a following register.
EEPROM key register (EKR)
17.3.1 EEPROM Key Register (EKR)
•
EKR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which changes the slave address code written in the
EEPROM. The slave address code is changed by writing H'5F in EKR and then writing either of
H'00 to H'07 as an address code to the H'FF09 address in the EEPROM by the byte write method.
EKR is initialized to H'FF.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 267 of 400
17.4
Operation
17.4.1 EEPROM Interface
This LSI has a multi-chip structure with two internal chips of F-ZTAT™ HD64F3664 and 512-
byte EEPROM.
The EEPROM interface is the I2C bus interface. This I2C bus is open to the outside, so the
communication with the external devices connected to the I2C bus can be made.
17.4.2 Bus Format and Timing
The I2C bus format and the I2C bus timing follow section 15.4.1, I2C Bus Format. The bus formats
specific for the EEPROM are the following two.
1. The EEPROM address is configured of two bytes, the write data is transferred in the order of
upper address and lower address from each MSB side.
2. The write data is transmitted from the MSB side.
The bus format and bus timing of the EEPROM are shown in figure 17.2.
Stop
Start
conditon
condition
Upper memory
address
lower memory
address
Slave address
Data
Data
R/ ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
ACK
SCL
SDA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
A15
A8
A7
A0
D7
D0
D7
D0
Legend: R/ : R/ code (0 is for a write and 1 is for a read),
ACK: acknowledge
Figure 17.2 EEPROM Bus Format and Bus Timing
17.4.3 Start Condition
A high-to-low transition of the SDA input with the SCL input high is needed to generate the start
condition for starting read, write operation.
17.4.4 Stop Condition
A low-to-high transition of the SDA input with the SCL input high is needed to generate the stop
condition for stopping read, write operation.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 268 of 400
The standby operation starts after a read sequence by a stop condition. In the case of write
operation, a stop condition terminates the write data inputs and place the device in an internally-
timed write cycle to the memories. After the internally-timed write cycle (tWC) which is specified
as tWC, the device enters a standby mode.
17.4.5 Acknowledge
All address data and serial data such as read data and write data are transmitted to and from in 8-
bit unit. The acknowledgement is the signal that indicates that this 8-bit data is normally
transmitted to and from.
In the write operation, EEPROM sends "0" to acknowledge in the ninth cycle after receiving the
data. In the read operation, EEPROM sends a read data following the acknowledgement after
receiving the data. After sending read data, the EEPROM enters the bus open state. If the
EEPROM receives "0" as an acknowledgement, it sends read data of the next address. If the
EEPROM does not receive acknowledgement "0" and receives a following stop condition, it stops
the read operation and enters a standby mode. If the EEPROM receives neither acknowledgement
"0" nor a stop condition, the EEPROM keeps bus open without sending read data.
17.4.6 Slave Addressing
The EEPROM device receives a 7-bit slave address and a 1-bit R/W code following the generation
of the start conditions. The EEPROM enables the chip for a read or a write operation with this
operation.
The slave address consists of a former 4-bit device code and latter 3-bit slave address as shown in
table 17.2. The device code is used to distinguish device type and this LSI uses "1010" fixed code
in the same manner as in a general-purpose EEPROM. The slave address code selects one device
out of all devices with device code 1010 (8 devices in maximum) which are connected to the I2C
bus. This means that the device is selected if the inputted slave address code received in the order
of A2, A1, A0 is equal to the corresponding slave address reference register (ESAR).
The slave address code is stored in the address H'FF09 in the EEPROM. It is transferred to ESAR
from the slave address register in the memory array during 10 ms after the reset is released. An
access to the EEPROM is not allowed during transfer.
The initial value of the slave address code written in the EEPROM is H'00. It can be written in the
range of H'00 to H'07. Be sure to write the data by the byte write method.
The next one bit of the slave address is the R/W code. 0 is for a write and 1 is for a read.
The EEPROM turns to a standby state if the device code is not "1010" or slave address code
doesn’t coincide.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 269 of 400
Table 17.2 Slave Addresses
Initial
Value
Setting
Value
Bit
7
Bit name
Remarks
Device code D3
0
1
6
Device code D2
0
5
Device code D1
1
4
Device code D0
0
3
Slave address code A2
Slave address code A1
Slave address code A0
A2
A1
A0
The initial value can be changed
The initial value can be changed
The initial value can be changed
2
0
1
0
17.4.7 Write Operations
There are two types write operations; byte write operation and page write operation. To initiate
the write operation, input 0 to R/W code following the slave address.
1. Byte Write
A write operation requires an 8-bit data of a 7-bit slave address with R/W code = "0". Then
the EEPROM sends acknowledgement "0" at the ninth bit. This enters the write mode. Then,
two bytes of the memory address are received from the MSB side in the order of upper and
lower. Upon receipt of one-byte memory address, the EEPROM sends acknowledgement "0"
and receives a following a one-byte write data. After receipt of write data, the EEPROM sends
acknowledgement "0". If the EEPROM receives a stop condition, the EEPROM enters an
internally controlled write cycle and terminates receipt of SCL and SDA inputs until
completion of the write cycle. The EEPROM returns to a standby mode after completion of
the write cycle.
The byte write operation is shown in figure 17.3.
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
SDA
A15
A8
A7
A0
D7
D0
Upper memory
address
lower memory
address
Slave address
R/ ACK
ACK
ACK
Write Data
ACK
Stop
Start
conditon
condition
Legend: R/ : R/ code (0 is for a write and 1 is for a read)
ACK: acknowledge
Figure 17.3 Byte Write Operation
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 270 of 400
2. Page Write
This LSI is capable of the page write operation which allows any number of bytes up to 8 bytes
to be written in a single write cycle. The write data is input in the same sequence as the byte
write in the order of a start condition, slave address + R/W code, memory address (n), and
write data (Dn) with every ninth bit acknowledgement "0" output. The EEPROM enters the
page write operation if the EEPROM receives more write data (Dn+1) is input instead of
receiving a stop condition after receiving the write data (Dn). LSB 3 bits (A2 to A0) in the
EEPROM address are automatically incremented to be the (n+1) address upon receiving write
data (Dn+1). Thus the write data can be received sequentially.
Addresses in the page are incremented at each receipt of the write data and the write data can
be input up to 8 bytes. If the LSB 3 bits (A2 to A0) in the EEPROM address reach the last
address of the page, the address will roll over to the first address of the same page. When the
address is rolled over, write data is received twice or more to the same address, however, the
last received data is valid. At the receipt of the stop condition, write data reception is
terminated and the write operation is entered.
The page write operation is shown in figure 17.4.
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
SDA
A15
A8
A7
A0
D7
D0
Upper memory
address
lower memory
address
R/ ACK
ACK
ACK Write Data ACK
Write Data ACK
Slave address
Stop
Start
condition
conditon
Legend: R/ : R/ code (0 is for a write and 1 is for a read),
ACK: acknowledge
Figure 17.4 Page Write Operation
17.4.8 Acknowledge Polling
Acknowledge polling feature is used to show if the EEPROM is in an internally-timed write cycle
or not. This feature is initiated by the input of the 8-bit slave address + R/W code following the
start condition during an internally-timed write cycle. Acknowledge polling will operate R/W
code = "0". The ninth acknowledgement judges if the EEPROM is an internally-timed write cycle
or not. Acknowledgement "1" shows the EEPROM is in a internally-timed write cycle and
acknowledgement "0" shows the internally-timed write cycle has been completed. The
acknowledge polling starts to function after a write data is input, i.e., when the stop condition is
input.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 271 of 400
17.4.9 Read Operation
There are three read operations; current address read, random address read, and sequential read.
Read operations are initiated in the same way as write operations with the exception of R/W = 1.
1. Current Address Read
The internal address counter maintains the (n+1) address that is made by the last address (n)
accessed during the last read or write operation, with incremented by one. Current address
read accesses the (n+1) address kept by the internal address counter.
After receiving in the order of a start condition and the slave address + R/W code (R/W = 1),
the EEPROM outputs the 1-byte data of the (n+1) address from the most significant bit
following acknowledgement "0". If the EEPROM receives in the order of acknowledgement
"1" (release of a bus without inputting the acknowledgement is possible) and a following stop
condition, the EEPROM stops the read operation and is turned to a standby state.
In case the EEPROM has accessed the last address H'01FF at previous read operation, the
current address will roll over and returns to zero address. In case the EEPROM has accessed
the last address of the page at previous write operation, the current address will roll over within
page addressing and returns to the first address in the same page.
The current address is valid while power is on. The current address after power on will be
undefined. After power is turned on, define the address by the random address read operation
described below is necessary.
The current address read operation is shown in figure 17.5.
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
D7
D0
SDA
Read Data
R/ ACK
ACK
Slave address
Stop
Start
conditon
condition
Legend: R/ : R/ code (0 is for a write and 1 is for a read)
ACK: acknowledge
Figure 17.5 Current Address Read Operation
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 272 of 400
2. Random Address Read
This is a read operation with defined read address. A random address read requires a dummy
write to set read address. The EEPROM receives a start condition, slave address + R/W code
(R/W = 0), memory address (upper) and memory address (lower) sequentially. The EEPROM
outputs acknowledgement "0" after receiving memory address (lower) then enters a current
address read with receiving a start condition again. The EEPROM outputs the read data of the
address which was defined in the dummy write operation. After receiving acknowledgement
"1" (release of a bus is allowed without receiving acknowledgement) and a following stop
condition, the EEPROM stops the random read operation and returns to a standby state.
The random address read operation is shown in figure 17.6.
SCL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
SDA
A15
A8
A7
A0
D7
D0
Upper memory
address
lower memory
address
lower memory
address
R/ ACK
ACK
ACK
R
ACK
ACK
Slave address
Slave address
Start
condition
Start
Stop
conditon
condition
Legend: R/ : R/ code (0 is for a write and 1 is for a read),
ACK: acknowledge
Figure 17.6 Random Address Read Operation
3. Sequential Read
This is a mode to read the data sequentially. Data is sequential read by either a current address
read or a random address read. If the EEPROM receives acknowledgement "0" after 1-byte
read data is output, the read address is incremented and the next 1-byte read data are coming
out. Data is output sequentially by incrementing addresses as long as the EEPROM receives
acknowledgement "0" after the data is output. The address will roll over and returns address
zero if it reaches the last address H'01FF. The sequential read can be continued after roll over.
The sequential read is terminated if the EEPROM receives acknowledgement "1" (release of a
bus without acknowledgement is allowed) and a following stop condition as the same manner
as in the random address read.
The condition of a sequential read when the current address read is used is shown in figure
17.7.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 273 of 400
SCL
SDA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
8
9
1
8
9
D7
D0
D7
D0
R/ ACK
ACK
ACK
Slave address
Read Data
Read Data
Start
Stop
conditon
condition
Legend:R/ : R/ code (0 is for a write and 1 is for a read)
ACK: acknowledge
Figure 17.7 Sequential Read Operation (when current address read is used)
17.5
Usage Notes
17.5.1 Data Protection at VCC On/Off
When VCC is turned on or off, the data might be destroyed by malfunction. Be careful of the
notices described below to prevent the data to be destroyed.
1. SCL and SDA should be fixed to VCC or VSS during VCC on/off.
2. VCC should be turned off after the EEPROM is placed in a standby state.
3. When VCC is turned on from the intermediate level, malfunction is caused, so VCC should be
turned on from the ground level (VSS).
4. VCC turn on speed should be longer than 10 us.
17.5.2 Write/Erase Endurance
The endurance is 105 cycles/page (1% cumulative failure rate) in case of page programming and
104 cycles/byte in case of byte programming. The data retention time is more than 10 years when a
device is page-programmed less than 104 cycles.
17.5.3 Noise Suppression Time
This EEPROM has a noise suppression function at SCL and SDA inputs, that cuts noise of width
less than 50 ns. Be careful not to allow noise of width more than 50 ns because the noise of with
more than 50 ms is recognized as an active pulse.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 274 of 400
Section 18 Power Supply Circuit
This LSI incorporates an internal power supply step-down circuit. Use of this circuit enables the
internal power supply to be fixed at a constant level of approximately 3.0 V, independently of the
voltage of the power supply connected to the external VCC pin. As a result, the current consumed
when an external power supply is used at 3.0 V or above can be held down to virtually the same
low level as when used at approximately 3.0 V. If the external power supply is 3.0 V or below, the
internal voltage will be practically the same as the external voltage. It is, of course, also possible
to use the same level of external power supply voltage and internal power supply voltage without
using the internal power supply step-down circuit.
18.1
When Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit
Connect the external power supply to the VCC pin, and connect a capacitance of approximately 0.1
µF between VCL and VSS, as shown in figure 18.1. The internal step-down circuit is made effective
simply by adding this external circuit. In the external circuit interface, the external power supply
voltage connected to VCC and the GND potential connected to VSS are the reference levels. For
example, for port input/output levels, the VCC level is the reference for the high level, and the VSS
level is that for the low level. The A/D converter analog power supply is not affected by the
internal step-down circuit.
VCC
VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V
Step-down circuit
VCL
Stabilization
capacitance
(approx. 0.1 µF)
Internal
power
supply
Internal
logic
VSS
Figure 18.1 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Used
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 275 of 400
PSCKT00A_000020020300
18.2
When Not Using Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit
When the internal power supply step-down circuit is not used, connect the external power supply
to the VCL pin and VCC pin, as shown in figure 18.2. The external power supply is then input directly
to the internal power supply. The permissible range for the power supply voltage is 3.0 V to 3.6 V.
Operation cannot be guaranteed if a voltage outside this range (less than 3.0 V or more than 3.6 V)
is input.
VCC
VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V
Step-down circuit
Internal
VCL
Internal
logic
power
supply
VSS
Figure 18.2 Power Supply Connection when Internal Step-Down Circuit is Not Used
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 276 of 400
Section 19 List of Registers
The register list gives information on the on-chip I/O register addresses, how the register bits are
configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown
below.
1. Register addresses (address order)
•
•
•
•
Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses.
Registers are classified by functional modules.
The data bus width is indicated.
The number of access states is indicated.
2. Register bits
•
•
•
Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the register addresses.
Reserved bits are indicated by in the bit name column.
When registers consist of 16 bits, bits are described from the MSB side.
3. Register states in each operating mode
•
•
Register states are described in the same order as the register addresses.
The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset
for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 277 of 400
19.1
Register Addresses (Address Order)
The data bus width indicates the numbers of bits by which the register is accessed.
The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock.
Data
Abbre-
viation
Module
Bit No Address Name
Bus
Width State
Access
Register Name
Timer mode register W
Timer control register W
Timer interrupt enable register W
Timer status register W
Timer I/O control register 0
Timer I/O control register 1
Timer counter
TMRW
TCRW
TIERW
TSRW
TIOR0
TIOR1
TCNT
GRA
8
H'FF80
H'FF81
H'FF82
H'FF83
H'FF84
H'FF85
H'FF86
H'FF88
H'FF8A
H'FF8C
H'FF8E
H'FF90
H'FF91
H'FF92
H'FF93
H'FF9B
H'FFA0
H'FFA1
H'FFA2
H'FFA3
H'FFA4
H'FFA5
H'FFA6
H'FFA7
H'FFA8
H'FFA9
H'FFAA
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
Timer W
ROM
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16*1
16*1
16*1
16*1
16*1
8
16
16
16
16
16
8
General register A
General register B
GRB
General register C
GRC
General register D
GRD
Flash memory control register 1
Flash memory control register 2
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
8
ROM
8
Flash memory power control register FLPWCR 8
ROM
8
Erase block register 1
Flash memory enable register
Timer control register V0
Timer control/status register V
Timer constant register A
Timer constant register B
Timer counter V
EBR1
FENR
TCRV0
TCSRV
TCORA
TCORB
TCNTV
TCRV1
TMA
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
ROM
8
ROM
8
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer V
Timer A
Timer A
SCI3
8
8
8
8
8
Timer control register V1
Timer mode register A
Timer counter A
8
8
TCA
8
Serial mode register
SMR
8
Bit rate register
BRR
SCI3
8
Serial control register 3
SCR3
SCI3
8
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 278 of 400
Data
Bus
Width State
Abbre-
viation
Module
Bit No Address Name
Access
Register Name
Transmit data register
Serial status register
Receive data register
A/D data register A
TDR
SSR
RDR
8
8
8
H'FFAB
H'FFAC
H'FFAD
H'FFB0
H'FFB2
H'FFB4
H'FFB6
H'FFB8
H'FFB9
H'FFC0
H'FFC1
H'FFC2
H'FFC4
H'FFC5
H'FFC6
H'FFC6
H'FFC7
H'FFC7
H'FFC8
H'FFC9
H'FFCA
H'FFCB
SCI3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SCI3
SCI3
ADDRA 16
ADDRB 16
ADDRC 16
ADDRD 16
A/D converter
A/D converter
A/D converter
A/D converter
A/D converter
A/D converter
WDT*2
WDT*2
WDT*2
IIC
A/D data register B
A/D data register C
A/D data register D
A/D control/status register
A/D control register
ADCSR
ADCR
8
8
Timer control/status register WD
Timer counter WD
TCSRWD 8
TCWD
TMWD
ICCR
ICSR
ICDR
SARX
ICMR
SAR
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Timer mode register WD
I2C bus control register
I2C bus status register
I2C bus data register
IIC
IIC
Second slave address register
I2C bus mode register
Slave address register
Address break control register
Address break status register
Break address register H
Break address register L
Break data register H
Break data register L
Port pull-up control register 1
Port pull-up control register 5
Port data register 1
IIC
IIC
IIC
ABRKCR 8
ABRKSR 8
Address break 8
Address break 8
Address break 8
Address break 8
BARH
BARL
BDRH
BDRL
PUCR1
PUCR5
PDR1
PDR2
PDR5
PDR7
PDR8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
H'FFCC Address break 8
H'FFCD Address break 8
H'FFD0
H'FFD1
H'FFD4
H'FFD5
H'FFD8
H'FFDA
H'FFDB
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
I/O port
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Port data register 2
Port data register 5
Port data register 7
Port data register 8
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 279 of 400
Data
Bus
Width State
Abbre-
viation
Module
Bit No Address Name
Access
Register Name
Port data register B
PDRB
PMR1
PMR5
PCR1
PCR2
PCR5
PCR7
PCR8
SYSCR1
SYSCR2
IEGR1
IEGR2
IENR1
IRR1
8
8
8
8
8
8*3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
H'FFDD I/O port
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Port mode register 1
H'FFE0
H'FFE1
H'FFE4
H'FFE5
H'FFE8
H'FFEA
H'FFEB
H'FFF0
H'FFF1
H'FFF2
H'FFF3
H'FFF4
H'FFF6
H'FFF8
H'FFF9
H'FFFC
I/O port
Port mode register 5
I/O port
Port control register 1
I/O port
Port control register 2
I/O port
Port control register 5
I/O port
Port control register 7
I/O port
Port control register 8
I/O port
System control register 1
System control register 2
Interrupt edge select register 1
Interrupt edge select register 2
Interrupt enable register 1
Interrupt flag register 1
Wake-up interrupt flag register
Module standby control register 1
Timer serial control register
Power-down
Power-down
Interrupts
Interrupts
Interrupts
Interrupts
Interrupts
Power-down
IIC
IWPR
MSTCR1 8
TSCR
8
Notes: 1. Only word access can be used.
2. WDT: Watchdog timer.
3. The number of bits is six for H8/3664N.
•
EEPROM
Data
Bus
Width State
Abbre-
viation
Module
Bit No Address Name
Access
Register Name
EEPROM key register
EKR
8
H'FF10 IEEPROM
8
2
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 280 of 400
19.2
Register Bits
Register bit names of the on-chip peripheral modules are described below.
Each line covers eight bits, and 16-bit registers are shown as 2 lines.
Register
Name
TMRW
TCRW
TIERW
TSRW
TIOR0
TIOR1
TCNT
Bit 7
CTS
CCLR
OVIE
OVF
—
Bit 6
—
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
—
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
PWMB
TOA
Module Name
BUFEB BUFEA
PWMD
TOC
PWMC
TOB
Timer W
CKS2
—
CKS1
—
CKS0
—
TOD
IMIED
IMFD
—
IMIEC
IMFC
IOA2
IOC2
IMIEB
IMFB
IOA1
IOC1
IMIEA
IMFA
IOA0
IOC0
TCNT8
TCNT0
GRA8
GRA0
GRB8
GRB0
GRC8
GRC0
GRD8
GRD0
P
—
—
—
IOB2
IOD2
IOB1
IOD1
IOB0
IOD0
—
—
TCNT15 TCNT14 TCNT13 TCNT12 TCNT11 TCNT10 TCNT9
TCNT7 TCNT6 TCNT5 TCNT4 TCNT3 TCNT2 TCNT1
GRA15 GRA14 GRA13 GRA12 GRA11 GRA10 GRA9
GRA7 GRA6 GRA5 GRA4 GRA3 GRA2 GRA1
GRB15 GRB14 GRB13 GRB12 GRB11 GRB10 GRB9
GRB7 GRB6 GRB5 GRB4 GRB3 GRB2 GRB1
GRC15 GRC14 GRC13 GRC12 GRC11 GRC10 GRC9
GRC7 GRC6 GRC5 GRC4 GRC3 GRC2 GRC1
GRD15 GRD14 GRD13 GRD12 GRD11 GRD10 GRD9
GRA
GRB
GRC
GRD
GRD7
—
GRD6
SWE
—
GRD5
ESU
—
GRD4
PSU
—
GRD3
EV
GRD2
PV
GRD1
E
FLMCR1
ROM
FLMCR2 FLER
—
—
—
—
FLPWCR PDWND
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EBR1
—
—
—
EB4
—
EB3
—
EB2
—
EB1
—
EB0
FENR
TCRV0
TCSRV
TCORA
TCORB
TCNTV
TCRV1
TMA
FLSHE
CMIEB
CMFB
—
—
—
CMIEA
CFMA
OVIE
OVF
CCLR1 CCLR0 CKS2
OS3 OS2
CKS1
OS1
CKS0
OS0
Timer V
—
TCORA7 TCORA6 TCORA5 TCORA4 TCORA3 TCORA2 TCORA1 TCORA0
TCORB7 TCORB6 TCORB5 TCORB4 TCORB3 TCORB2 TCORB1 TCORB0
TCNTV7 TCNTV6 TCNTV5 TCNTV4 TCNTV3 TCNTV2 TCNTV1 TCNTV0
—
—
—
TVEG1 TVEG0 TRGE
—
ICKS0
TMA0
TCA0
TMA7
TCA7
TMA6
TCA6
TMA5
TCA5
—
TMA3
TCA3
TMA2
TCA2
TMA1
TCA1
Timer A
TCA
TCA4
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 281 of 400
Register
Name
Bit 7
COM
BRR7
TIE
Bit 6
CHR
BRR6
RIE
Bit 5
PE
Bit 4
PM
Bit 3
STOP
BRR3
MPIE
TDR3
PER
RDR3
AD5
—
Bit 2
MP
Bit 1
CKS1
BRR1
CKE1
TDR1
MPBR
RDR1
AD3
—
Bit 0
CKS0
BRR0
CKE0
TDR0
MPBT
RDR0
AD2
—
Module Name
SMR
BRR
SCI3
BRR5
TE
BRR4
RE
BRR2
TEIE
TDR2
TEND
RDR2
AD4
—
SCR3
TDR
TDR7
TDRE
RDR7
AD9
TDR6
RDRF
RDR6
AD8
TDR5
OER
RDR5
AD7
—
TDR4
FER
RDR4
AD6
—
SSR
RDR
ADDRA
A/D converter
AD1
AD0
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
AD9
AD8
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
AD1
AD0
AD9
AD8
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
AD1
AD0
AD9
AD8
AD7
—
AD6
—
AD5
—
AD4
—
AD3
—
AD2
—
AD1
AD0
ADCSR
ADCR
ADF
TRGE
ADIE
—
ADST
—
SCAN
—
CKS
—
CH2
—
CH1
—
CH0
—
TCSRWD B6WI
TCWE
B4WI
TCSRWE B2WI
WDON
B0WI
WRST
WDT*1
TCWD
TMWD
ICCR
ICSR
ICDR
SARX
ICMR
SAR
TCWD7 TCWD6 TCWD5 TCWD4 TCWD3 TCWD2 TCWD1 TCWD0
—
—
—
—
CKS3
ACKE
AL
CKS2
BBSY
AAS
CKS1
IRIC
CKS0
SCP
ACKB
ICDR0
FSX
ICE
IEIC
MST
IRTR
ICDR5
TRS
IIC
ESTP
ICDR7
SVAX6
MLS
STOP
ICDR6
AASX
ICDR4
SVAX3
CKS1
SVA3
ADZ
ICDR3
ICDR2
ICDR1
SVAX0
BC1
SVAX5 SVAX4
SVAX2 SVAX1
WAIT
SVA5
CKS2
SVA4
CSEL0
—
CKS0
SVA2
BC2
BC0
SVA6
SVA1
SVA0
FS
ABRKCR RTINTE CSEL1
ABRKSR ABIF ABIE
ACMP2 ACMP1 ACMP0 DCMP1 DCMP0 Address break
—
—
—
—
—
BARH
BARL
BDRH
BDRL
PUCR1
PUCR5
PDR1
PDR2
PDR5
BARH7 BARH6 BARH5 BARH4 BARH3 BARH2 BARH1 BARH0
BARL7 BARL6 BARL5 BARL4 BARL3 BARL2 BARL1 BARL0
BDRH7 BDRH6 BDRH5 BDRH4 BDRH3 BDRH2 BDRH1 BDRH0
BDRL7
BDRL6
BDRL5
BDRL4
BDRL3
—
BDRL2
BDRL1
BDRL0
PUCR17 PUCR16 PUCR15 PUCR14
PUCR12 PUCR11 PUCR10 I/O port
—
—
PUCR55 PUCR54 PUCR53 PUCR52 PUCR51 PUCR50
P17
—
P16
—
P15
—
P14
—
—
P12
P22
P52
P11
P21
P51
P10
P20
P50
—
P57*2
P56*2
P55
P54
P53
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 282 of 400
Register
Name
Bit 7
—
Bit 6
P76
P86
PB6
IRQ2
—
Bit 5
P75
Bit 4
P74
Bit 3
—
Bit 2
—
Bit 1
—
Bit 0
—
Module Name
PDR7
PDR8
PDRB
PMR1
PMR5
PCR1
PCR2
PCR5
PCR7
PCR8
I/O port
P87
PB7
IRQ3
—
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
PB5
PB4
PB3
—
PB2
PB1
PB0
IRQ1
WKP5
PCR15
—
IRQ0
WKP4
PCR14
—
—
TXD
WKP1
PCR11
PCR21
PCR51
—
TMOW
WKP0
PCR10
PCR20
PCR50
—
WKP3
—
WKP2
PCR12
PCR22
PCR52
—
PCR17
—
PCR16
—
—
PCR57*2 PCR56*2 PCR55
PCR54
PCR74
PCR84
STS0
MA2
PCR53
—
—
PCR76
PCR86
STS2
PCR75
PCR85
STS1
DTON
—
PCR87
PCR83
NESEL
MA1
IEG3
PCR82
—
PCR81
—
PCR80
—
SYSCR1 SSBY
Power-down
Interrupts
SYSCR2 SMSEL LSON
MA0
IEG2
SA1
SA0
IEGR1
IEGR2
IENR1
IRR1
NMIEG
—
—
—
IEG1
IEG0
—
WPEG5 WPEG4 WPEG3 WPEG2 WPEG1 WPEG0
IENDT
IRRDT
—
IENTA
IRRTA
—
IENWP
—
—
IEN3
IEN2
IEN1
IEN0
—
IRRI3
IWPF3
IRRI2
IWPF2
IRRI1
IWPF1
IRRI0
IWPF0
IWPR
IWPF5
IWPF4
MSTCR1
TSCR
—
MSTIIC MSTS3 MSTAD MSTWD MSTTW MSTTV MSTTA Power-down
—
—
—
—
—
—
IICRST IICX
IIC
Notes: 1. WDT: Watchdog timer
2. This bit is not included in H8/3664N.
•
EEPROM
Register
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module Name
EKR
EKR7
EKR6
EKR5
EKR4
EKR3
EKR2
EKR1
EKR0
EEPROM
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 283 of 400
19.3
Register States in Each Operating Mode
Register
Name
Reset
Active
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Sleep
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Subactive Subsleep Standby
Module
TMRW
TCRW
TIERW
TSRW
TIOR0
TIOR1
TCNT
GRA
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
Timer W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
GRB
—
—
—
GRC
—
—
—
GRD
—
—
—
FLMCR1 Initialized
FLMCR2 Initialized
FLPWCR Initialized
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
ROM
—
—
—
—
EBR1
FENR
TCRV0
TCSRV
TCORA
TCORB
TCNTV
TCRV1
TMA
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
Timer V
Timer A
SCI3
TCA
—
—
—
SMR
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
BRR
SCR3
TDR
SSR
RDR
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 284 of 400
Register
Name
Reset
Active
—
Sleep
—
Subactive Subsleep Standby
Module
ADDRA
ADDRB
ADDRC
ADDRD
ADCSR
ADCR
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
A/D converter
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
Initialized
—
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
TCSRWD Initialized
—
—
WDT*
TCWD
TMWD
ICCR
ICSR
ICDR
SARX
ICMR
SAR
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
IIC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ABRKCR Initialized
ABRKSR Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
Address Break
—
—
—
—
—
BARH
BARL
BDRH
BDRL
PUCR1
PUCR5
PDR1
PDR2
PDR5
PDR7
PDR8
PDRB
PMR1
PMR5
PCR1
PCR2
PCR5
PCR7
PCR8
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
I/O port
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 285 of 400
Register
Name
Reset
Active
—
Sleep
—
Subactive Subsleep Standby
Module
SYSCR1 Initialized
SYSCR2 Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Power-down
Power-down
Interrupts
Interrupts
Interrupts
Interrupts
Interrupts
Power-down
IIC
—
—
IEGR1
IEGR2
IENR1
IRR1
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
IWPR
—
—
MSTCR1 Initialized
TSCR Initialized
—
Note : is not initialized
*
WDT: Watchdog timer
•
EEPROM
Register
Name
Reset
Active
Sleep
Subactive Subsleep Standby
Module
EKR
Initialized
—
—
—
—
—
EEPROM
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 286 of 400
Section 20 Electrical Characteristics
20.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 20.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
VCC
Value
Unit
V
Note
Power supply voltage
Analog power supply voltage
–0.3 to +7.0
–0.3 to +7.0
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
*
AVCC
V
Input voltage
Ports other than Port B and VIN
V
X1
Port B
X1
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
–0.3 to 4.3
V
V
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Topr
Tstg
–20 to +75
°C
°C
–55 to +125
Note: * Permanent damage may result if maximum ratings are exceeded. Normal operation should
be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics. Exceeding these values can
result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
20.2
Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTAT™ Version, F-ZTAT™ Version
with EEPROM)
20.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges
Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range
øOSC (MHz)
16.0
øW (kHz)
32.768
10.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
3.0
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• All operating modes
• Sleep mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 287 of 400
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range
ø (MHz)
øSUB (kHz)
16.0
16.384
10.0
1.0
8.192
4.096
3.0
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
3.0
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode
(When MA2 = 0 in SYSCR2)
ø (kHz)
2000
1250
78.125
3.0
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(When MA2 = 1 in SYSCR2)
Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Accuracy Guarantee Range
ø (MHz)
16.0
10.0
2.0
3.3
4.0
5.5 AVCC (V)
• VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 288 of 400
20.2.2 DC Characteristics
Table 20.2 DC Characteristics (1)
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Notes
Input high VIH
voltage
RES, NMI,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.8
—
VCC + 0.3 V
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, TRGV
VCC × 0.9
—
—
VCC + 0.3
RXD, SCL, SDA, VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
VCC + 0.3 V
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57*,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87
VCC × 0.8
—
VCC + 0.3
PB0 to PB7
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7
VCC × 0.8
—
—
AVCC
0.3
+
+
V
AVCC
0.3
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC – 0.5
VCC – 0.3
—
—
—
VCC + 0.3 V
VCC + 0.3
Input low VIL
voltage
RES, NMI,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
VCC × 0.2 V
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, TRGV
–0.3
—
—
VCC × 0.1
RXD, SCL, SDA,
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57*,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87,
PB0 to PB7
V
CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
VCC × 0.3 V
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.2
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
–0.3
—
—
0.5
0.3
V
Note: * P50 to P55 for H8/3664N
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 289 of 400
Values
Typ
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit
Notes
Output
high
voltage
VOH
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P55,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
–IOH = 1.5 mA
V
CC – 1.0
—
—
V
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.5
—
—
P56, P57*
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
–IOH = 0.1 mA
V
CC – 2.5
—
—
—
—
V
VCC = 3.0 V to 4.0 V VCC – 2.0
–IOH = 0.1 mA
—
Output
low
VOL
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57*,
P74 to P76,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
—
0.6
V
V
voltage
I
OL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
1.5
P80 to P87
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
OL = 20.0 mA
I
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 10.0 mA
—
—
—
—
1.0
0.4
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
I
OL = 1.6 mA
IOL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
0.6
SCL, SDA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 6.0 mA
V
IOL = 3.0 mA
—
—
0.4
Note: * P50 to P55 for H8/3664N
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 290 of 400
Values
Typ
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit Notes
Input/
| IIL
|
OSC1, RES, NMI, VIN = 0.5 V or higher —
—
1.0
µA
output
leakage
current
WKP0 to WKP5, (VCC – 0.5 V)
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
ADTRG, TRGV,
TMRIV, TMCIV,
FTCI, FTIOA to
FTIOD, RXD,
SCK3, SCL, SDA
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57*1,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87,
V
IN = 0.5 V or higher —
—
1.0
µA
(VCC – 0.5 V)
PB0 to PB7
VIN = 0.5 V or higher —
(AVCC – 0.5 V)
—
1.0
µA
µA
Pull-up
MOS
current
–Ip
Cin
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P50 to P55
VCC = 5.0 V,
IN = 0.0 V
50.0
—
300.0
—
V
VCC = 3.0 V,
VIN = 0.0 V
—
—
60.0
—
Reference
value
Input
All input pins
except power
supply pins
f = 1 MHz,
15.0
pF
H8/3664N
capaci-
tance
VIN = 0.0 V,
Ta = 25°C
SCL, SDA
VCC
—
—
—
25.0
22.5
2
Active
mode
IOPE1
Active mode 1
VCC = 5.0 V,
15.0
mA
*
current
consump-
tion
f
OSC = 16 MHz
Active mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
Active mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 16 MHz
Active mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
2
—
—
—
8.0
1.8
1.2
—
*
V
f
Reference
value
2
IOPE2
VCC
2.7
—
mA
*
V
f
2
*
V
f
Reference
value
Notes: 1. P50 to P55 for H8/3664N
2. Pin states during current consumption measurement are given below (excluding current
in the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 291 of 400
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ Max
11.5 17.0
Unit Notes
Sleep
mode
current
consump-
tion
ISLEEP1
VCC
VCC
VCC
Sleep mode 1
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 16 MHz
—
mA
mA
µA
*
V
f
Sleep mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
—
—
—
—
6.5
1.7
1.1
—
*
V
Reference
value
f
ISLEEP2
Sleep mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 16 MHz
2.5
—
*
V
f
Sleep mode 2
VCC = 3.0 V,
*
Reference
value
f
OSC = 10 MHz
Subactive ISUB
mode
current
VCC = 3.0 V
32-kHz crystal
resonator
35.0 70.0
*
consump-
tion
(øSUB = øW/2)
V
CC = 3.0 V
—
—
25.0
—
*
32-kHz crystal
resonator
(øSUB = øW/8)
Reference
value
Subsleep ISUBSP
mode
current
consump-
tion
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC = 3.0 V
32-kHz crystal
resonator
25.0 50.0
µA
µA
V
*
*
(øSUB = øW/2)
Standby
mode
current
consump-
tion
ISTBY
32-kHz crystal
resonator not
used
—
—
—
5.0
—
RAM data VRAM
retaining
2.0
voltage
Note: * Pin states during current consumption measurement are given below (excluding current in
the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 292 of 400
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
Active mode 1
Active mode 2
VCC
Operates
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Operates
(ø/64)
Subclock:
Pin X1 = VSS
Sleep mode 1
Sleep mode 2
VCC
Only timers operate
VCC
Only timers operate
(ø/64)
Subactive mode
Subsleep mode
VCC
VCC
Operates
VCC
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Only timers operate
Subclock:
crystal resonator
Standby mode
VCC
CPU and timers
both stop
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Subclock:
Pin X1 = VSS
Table 20.2 DC Characteristics (2)
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min Typ Max
Unit Notes
EEPROM IEEW
current
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC = 5.0 V, tSCL = 2.5
µs (when writing)
—
—
—
—
—
—
2.0
0.3
3.0
mA
mA
µA
*
consump-
tion
IEER
VCC = 5.0 V, tSCL = 2.5
µs (when reading)
IEESTBY
VCC = 5.0 V, tSCL = 2.5
µs (at standby)
Note: * The current consumption of the EEPROM chip is shown.
For the current consumption of H8/3664N, add the above current values to the current
consumption of H8/3664F.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 293 of 400
Table 20.2 DC Characteristics (3)
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Applicable
Item
Symbol
Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Allowable output low IOL
current (per pin)
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
2.0
mA
Port 8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20.0
10.0
6.0
mA
mA
mA
mA
Port 8
SCL and SDA
Output pins
0.5
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
Allowable output low ∑IOL
current (total)
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
40.0
mA
Port 8,
SCL, and SDA
—
—
—
—
80.0
20.0
mA
mA
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
Port 8,
SCL, and SDA
—
—
—
—
40.0
2.0
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –IOH
current (per pin)
I
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
—
—
—
—
0.2
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –∑IOH
current (total)
I
All output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
5.5 V
30.0
—
—
8.0
mA
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 294 of 400
20.2.3 AC Characteristics
Table 20.3 AC Characteristics
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
1
System clock
oscillation
fOSC OSC1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 2.0
—
16.0
MHz
*
OSC2
frequency
2.0
1
—
—
—
10.0
64
MHz
tOSC
µs
2
System clock (ø)
cycle time
tcyc
*
—
—
12.8
Subclock oscillation fW
frequency
X1, X2
X1, X2
32.768 —
kHz
Watch clock (øW)
cycle time
tW
—
2
30.5
—
—
µs
tW
2
Subclock (øSUB
)
tsubcyc
8
*
cycle time
Instruction cycle
time
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
Oscillation
stabilization time
(crystal resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
10.0
ms
Oscillation
stabilization time
(ceramic resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
—
—
5.0
2.0
ms
Oscillation
stabilization time
trcx
X1, X2
OSC1
s
External clock
high width
tCPH
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 25.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ns
Figure 20.1
40.0
—
External clock
low width
tCPL
tCPr
tCPf
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 25.0
—
ns
ns
ns
40.0
—
External clock
rise time
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V —
10.0
15.0
10.0
15.0
—
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V —
—
External clock
fall time
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 295 of 400
Values
Typ
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Max
RES pin low
tREL
RES
At power-on and in trc
modes other than
those below
—
—
ms
Figure 20.2
width
In active mode and 10
sleep mode
operation
—
—
—
—
tcyc
Input pin high
width
tIH
NMI,
2
tcyc
Figure 20.3
IRQ0 to
IRQ3,
tsubcyc
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Input pin low
width
tIL
NMI,
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
IRQ0 to
IRQ3,
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Notes: 1. When an external clock is input, the minimum system clock oscillator frequency is
1.0 MHz.
2. Determined by MA2, MA1, MA0, SA1, and SA0 of system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 296 of 400
Table 20.4 I2C Bus Interface Timing
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Test
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Symbol Condition Min
Typ
Max
—
SCL input cycle time tSCL
SCL input high width tSCLH
12tcyc + 600 —
ns
ns
ns
ns
Figure 20.4
3tcyc + 300
5tcyc + 300
—
—
—
—
—
SCL input low width
tSCLL
tSf
—
Input fall time of
SCL and SDA
300
SCL and SDA input
spike pulse removal
time
tSP
—
—
1tcyc
ns
SDA input bus-free
time
tBUF
5tcyc
3tcyc
3tcyc
—
—
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
ns
Start condition input
hold time
tSTAH
Retransmission start tSTAS
condition input setup
time
Setup time for stop
condition input
tSTOS
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Data-input setup time tSDAS
1tcyc+20
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
pF
Data-input hold time
tSDAH
cb
0
0
—
Capacitive load of
SCL and SDA
400
SCL and SDA output tSf
fall time
VCC = 4.0 V —
to 5.5 V
—
—
250
300
ns
—
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 297 of 400
Table 20.5 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Reference
Figure
Item
Symbol Pins
Test Condition
Min Typ Max Unit
Input
clock
cycle
Asynchro- tScyc
nous
SCK3
4
—
—
tcyc
Figure 20.5
Clocked
synchro-
nous
6
—
—
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW
tTXD
SCK3
TXD
0.4
—
0.6 tScyc
Transmit data delay
time (clocked
synchronous)
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
—
—
1
1
tcyc
tcyc
Figure 20.6
Receive data setup
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXS
RXD
RXD
62.5
—
—
—
ns
ns
100.0 —
Receive data hold
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXH
62.5
—
—
—
ns
ns
100.0 —
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 298 of 400
20.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 20.6 A/D Converter Characteristics
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Symbol Pins
Condition
Min
Typ Max
1
Analog power supply AVCC
voltage
AVCC
3.3
VCC 5.5
V
*
Analog input voltage AVIN
AN0 to
AN7
VSS – 0.3
—
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
Analog power supply AIOPE
current
AVCC
AVCC = 5.0 V —
fOSC
16 MHz
2.0
—
mA
=
2
AISTOP1
AVCC
AVCC
—
50
µA
*
Reference
value
3
AISTOP2
—
—
—
—
5.0
µA
pF
*
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN0 to
AN7
30.0
Allowable signal
source impedance
RAIN
AN0 to
AN7
—
—
10
—
5.0
10
—
kΩ
bit
tcyc
Resolution (data
length)
10
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 3.3 V 134
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
—
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
tcyc
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 70
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 299 of 400
Values
Applicable Test
Symbol Pins Condition
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Min
Typ Max
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 134
to 5.5 V
—
—
tcyc
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.5
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
3.5
3.5
0.5
4.0
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used.
2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.
3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, subactive, and subsleep modes while the
A/D converter is idle.
20.2.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
Table 20.7 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
V
CC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Symbol
Pins
Condition
Min
Typ
Max
On-chip
oscillator
overflow
time
tOVF
0.2
0.4
—
s
*
Note: * Shows the time to count from 0 to 255, at which point an internal reset is generated, when
the internal oscillator is selected.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 300 of 400
20.2.6 Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 20.8 Flash Memory Characteristics
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Test
Item
Symbol Condition
Min
—
—
—
1
Typ
Max
—
Unit
ms
Programming time (per 128 bytes)*1*2*4
Erase time (per block) *1*3*6
Reprogramming count
tP
7
tE
100
—
—
ms
NWEC
x
1000
—
Times
µs
Programming Wait time after SWE
—
bit setting*1
Wait time after PSU
y
50
—
—
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after P bit setting z1
1 ≤ n ≤ 6
28
198
8
30
32
µs
µs
µs
*1*4
z2
z3
7 ≤ n ≤ 1000
200
10
202
12
Additional-
programming
Wait time after P bit clear*1
Wait time after PSU bit clear*1 β
α
5
5
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
µs
Wait time after PV
γ
bit setting*1
Wait time after dummy write*1 ε
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
µs
Wait time after PV bit clear*1
η
2
Wait time after SWE
θ
100
bit clear*1
Maximum
N
—
—
1000
Times
programming count*1*4*5
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 301 of 400
Values
Typ
Test
Item
Symbol Condition
Min
Max
Unit
Erase
Wait time after SWE
x
y
z
α
1
—
—
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after ESU
100
10
—
—
—
µs
bit setting*1
Wait time after E bit
100
ms
setting*1*6
Wait time after E bit clear*1
Wait time after ESU bit clear*1 β
10
10
20
—
—
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
µs
Wait time after EV
γ
bit setting*1
Wait time after dummy write*1 ε
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
µs
µs
µs
Wait time after EV bit clear*1
η
4
Wait time after SWE
θ
100
bit clear*1
Maximum erase count*1*6*7
N
—
—
120
Times
Notes: 1. Make the time settings in accordance with the program/erase algorithms.
2. The programming time for 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time for which the P bit in flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The program-verify time is not included.)
3. The time required to erase one block. (Indicates the time for which the E bit in flash
memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The erase-verify time is not included.)
4. Programming time maximum value (tP(MAX)) = wait time after P bit setting (z) ×
maximum programming count (N)
5. Set the maximum programming count (N) according to the actual set values of z1, z2,
and z3, so that it does not exceed the programming time maximum value (tP(MAX)).
The wait time after P bit setting (z1, z2) should be changed as follows according to the
value of the programming count (n).
Programming count (n)
1 ≤ n ≤ 6
z1 = 30 µs
7 ≤ n ≤ 1000 z2 = 200 µs
6. Erase time maximum value (tE(max)) = wait time after E bit setting (z) × maximum erase
count (N)
7. Set the maximum maximum erase count (N) according to the actual set value of (z), so
that it does not exceed the erase time maximum value (tE(max)).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 302 of 400
20.2.7 EEPROM Characteristics (Preliminary)
Table 20.9 EEPROM Characteristics
VCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Test
Reference
Item
Symbol
tSCL
Condition Min
Typ Max Unit Figure
SCL input cycle time
SCL input high pulse width
SCL input low pulse width
2500
600
1200
ns
µs
ns
ns
Figure 20.7
tSCLH
50
tSCLL
SCL, SDA input spike pulse
removal time
tSP
SDA input bus-free time
tBUF
1200
600
ns
ns
ns
Start condition input hold time
tSTAH
Retransmit start condition input tSTAS
setup time
600
Stop condition input setup time tSTOS
600
160
0
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
pF
ns
ms
ms
Data input setup time
Data input hold time
SCL, SDA input fall time
SDA input rise time
Data output hold time
SCL, SDA capacitive load
Access time
tSDAS
tSDAH
tSf
300
300
tSr
tDH
50
0
Cb
400
900
10
tAA
100
Cycle time at writing*
Reset release time
tWC
tRES
13
Note: * Cycle time at writing is a time from the stop condition to write completion (internal control).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 303 of 400
20.3
Electrical Characteristics (Mask ROM Version)
20.3.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Ranges
Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range
øOSC (MHz)
øW (kHz)
16.0
32.768
10.0
2.0
2.7
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
2.7
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• All operating modes
• Sleep mode
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range
ø (MHz)
øSUB (kHz)
16.0
16.384
10.0
1.0
8.192
4.096
2.7
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
2.7
4.0
5.5 VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode
(When MA2 = 0 in SYSCR2)
ø (kHz)
2000
1250
78.125
2.7
4.0
5.5
VCC (V)
• AVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
(When MA2 = 1 in SYSCR2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 304 of 400
Analog Power Supply Voltage and A/D Converter Accuracy Guarantee Range
ø (MHz)
16.0
10.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.5 AVCC (V)
• VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
• Active mode
• Sleep mode
20.3.2 DC Characteristics
Table 20.10 DC Characteristics (1)
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit Notes
Input high VIH
voltage
RES, NMI,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.8 —
VCC + 0.3
V
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, TRGV
VCC × 0.9 —
VCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
V
V
RXD, SCL, SDA, VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7 —
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87
VCC × 0.8 —
VCC + 0.3
V
PB0 to PB7
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC × 0.7 —
VCC × 0.8 —
AVCC + 0.3
AVCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
VCC + 0.3
V
V
V
V
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC – 0.5 —
VCC – 0.3 —
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 305 of 400
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ Max
Unit
Notes
Input low VIL
voltage
RES, NMI,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
—
VCC × 0.2
V
WKP0 to WKP5,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
ADTRG,TMRIV,
TMCIV, FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD,
SCK3, TRGV
–0.3
—
—
VCC × 0.1
VCC × 0.3
V
V
RXD, SCL, SDA, VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87,
PB0 to PB7
–0.3
—
VCC × 0.2
V
OSC1
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V –0.3
–0.3
—
—
—
0.5
0.3
—
V
V
V
Output
high
VOH
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P55,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC –
1.0
–IOH = 1.5 mA
voltage
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC
0.5
–
—
—
V
P56, P57
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V VCC
–
–
—
—
—
—
V
V
2.5
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC =2.7 V to 4.0 V VCC
2.0
–IOH = 0.1 mA
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 306 of 400
Values
Typ
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit Notes
Output
low
voltage
VOL
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57,
P74 to P76
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 1.6 mA
—
—
0.6
V
I
OL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
1.5
V
V
P80 to P87
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
OL = 20.0 mA
I
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 10.0 mA
—
—
—
—
1.0
0.4
V
V
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
I
OL = 1.6 mA
IOL = 0.4 mA
—
—
—
—
0.4
0.6
V
V
SCL, SDA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
IOL = 6.0 mA
IOL = 3.0 mA
—
—
—
0.4
1.0
V
Input/
| IIL
|
OSC1, RES, NMI, VIN = 0.5 V or higher —
WKP0 to WKP5, (VCC – 0.5 V)
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
µA
output
leakage
current
ADTRG, TRGV,
TMRIV, TMCIV,
FTCI, FTIOA to
FTIOD, RXD,
SCK3, SCL, SDA
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P20 to P22,
P50 to P57,
P74 to P76,
P80 to P87
V
IN = 0.5 V or higher —
—
—
1.0
1.0
µA
(VCC – 0.5 V)
PB0 to PB7
VIN = 0.5 V or higher —
(AVCC – 0.5 V)
µA
µA
Pull-up
MOS
–Ip
P10 to P12,
P14 to P17,
P50 to P55
VCC = 5.0 V,
50.0
—
300.0
—
V
IN = 0.0 V
current
V
V
CC = 3.0 V,
IN = 0.0 V
—
60.0
µA
Reference
value
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 307 of 400
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Typ Max
Unit Notes
Input
capaci-
tance
Cin
All input pins
except power
supply pins
f = 1 MHz,
VIN = 0.0 V,
Ta = 25°C
—
—
15.0
pF
Active
mode
current
consump-
tion
IOPE1
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
Active mode 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
15.0 22.5
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
µA
*
V
CC = 5.0 V,
fOSC = 16 MHz
Active mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
8.0
1.8
1.2
7.1
4.0
1.1
0.5
—
*
V
Reference
value
f
IOPE2
Active mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 16 MHz
2.7
—
*
V
f
Active mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
*
V
Reference
value
f
OSC = 10 MHz
Sleep
mode
current
consump-
tion
ISLEEP1
Sleep mode 1
13.0
—
*
V
CC = 5.0 V,
fOSC = 16 MHz
Sleep mode 1
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
*
V
Reference
value
f
ISLEEP2
Sleep mode 2
CC = 5.0 V,
OSC = 16 MHz
2.0
—
*
V
f
Sleep mode 2
CC = 3.0 V,
OSC = 10 MHz
*
V
Reference
value
f
Subactive ISUB
mode
current
VCC = 3.0 V
32-kHz crystal
resonator
35.0 70.0
*
consump-
tion
(øSUB = øW/2)
V
CC = 3.0 V
—
—
25.0
—
µA
µA
*
32-kHz crystal
resonator
(øSUB = øW/8)
Reference
value
Subsleep ISUBSP
mode
current
consump-
tion
VCC
VCC = 3.0 V
32-kHz crystal
resonator
25.0 50.0
*
*
(øSUB = øW/2)
Standby
mode
ISTBY
VCC
32-kHz crystal
resonator not used
—
—
5.0
µA
current
consump-
tion
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 308 of 400
Values
Typ
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
Min
Max
Unit Notes
RAM data VRAM
retaining
VCC
2.0
—
—
V
voltage
Note: * Pin states during current consumption measurement are given below (excluding current in
the pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers).
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
Active mode 1
Active mode 2
VCC
Operates
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Operates
(ø/64)
Subclock:
Pin X1 = VSS
Sleep mode 1
Sleep mode 2
VCC
Only timers operate
VCC
Only timers operate
(ø/64)
Subactive mode
VCC
Operates
VCC
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Subsleep mode
Standby mode
VCC
VCC
Only timers operate
VCC
VCC
Subclock:
crystal resonator
CPU and timers
both stop
Main clock:
ceramic or crystal
resonator
Subclock:
Pin X1 = VSS
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 309 of 400
Table 20.10 DC Characteristics (2)
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise indicated.
Values
Applicable
Item
Symbol Pins
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
Test Condition
Allowable output low IOL
current (per pin)
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
2.0
mA
Port 8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20.0
10.0
6.0
mA
mA
mA
mA
Port 8
SCL and SDA
Output pins
0.5
except port 8,
SCL,, and SDA
Allowable output low ∑IOL
current (total)
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL and SDA
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
40.0
mA
Port 8,
SCL, and SDA
—
—
—
—
80.0
20.0
mA
mA
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
Port 8,
—
—
40.0
mA
SCL, and SDA
Allowable output high I –IOH
current (per pin)
I
All output pins VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
All output pins VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2.0
0.2
30.0
8.0
mA
mA
mA
mA
Allowable output high I –∑IOH
current (total)
I
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 310 of 400
20.3.3 AC Characteristics
Table 20.11 AC Characteristics
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min Typ
Max
1
System clock
oscillation
fOSC OSC1,
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 2.0
—
16.0
MHz
*
OSC2
frequency
2.0
1
10.0
64
2
System clock (ø)
cycle time
tcyc
—
—
tOSC
µs
*
—
—
12.8
Subclock oscillation fW
frequency
X1, X2
X1, X2
32.768 —
kHz
Watch clock (øW)
cycle time
tW
—
2
30.5
—
—
µs
tW
2
Subclock (øSUB
)
tsubcyc
8
*
cycle time
Instruction cycle
time
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
Oscillation
stabilization time
(crystal resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
10.0
ms
ms
s
Oscillation
stabilization time
(ceramic resonator)
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
—
—
5.0
2.0
Oscillation
stabilization time
trcx
X1, X2
OSC1
External clock
high width
tCPH
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 25.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Figure 20.1
40.0
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 25.0
40.0
—
External clock
low width
tCPL
tCPr
tCPf
OSC1
OSC1
OSC1
—
—
External clock
rise time
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
—
—
10.0
15.0
10.0
15.0
External clock
fall time
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 311 of 400
Values
Typ
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Test Condition
Min
Max
RES pin low
tREL
RES
At power-on and in trc
modes other than
those below
—
—
ms
Figure 20.2
width
In active mode and 10
sleep mode
operation
—
—
—
—
tcyc
Input pin high
width
tIH
NMI,
2
tcyc
Figure 20.3
IRQ0 to
IRQ3,
tsubcyc
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Input pin low
width
tIL
NMI,
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
IRQ0 to
IRQ3,
WKP0 to
WKP5,
TMCIV,
TMRIV,
TRGV,
ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Notes: 1. When an external clock is input, the minimum system clock oscillator frequency is
1.0 MHz.
2. Determined by MA2, MA1, MA0, SA1, and SA0 of system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 312 of 400
Table 20.12 I2C Bus Interface Timing
Values
Typ
Test
Reference
Item
Symbol Min
Max
—
Unit Condition Figure
SCL input cycle time tSCL
SCL input high width tSCLH
12tcyc + 600 —
ns
ns
ns
ns
Figure 20.4
3tcyc + 300
5tcyc + 300
—
—
—
—
—
SCL input low width
tSCLL
tSf
—
Input fall time of
SCL and SDA
300
SCL and SDA input
spike pulse removal
time
tSP
—
—
1tcyc
ns
SDA input bus-free
time
tBUF
5tcyc
3tcyc
3tcyc
—
—
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
ns
Start condition input
hold time
tSTAH
Retransmission start tSTAS
condition input setup
time
Setup time for stop
condition input
tSTOS
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Data-input setup time tSDAS
1tcyc+20
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
pF
Data-input hold time
tSDAH
cb
0
0
—
Capacitive load of
SCL and SDA
400
SCL and SDA output tSf
fall time
—
—
—
—
250
300
ns
ns
VCC = 4.0 V
to 5.5 V
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 313 of 400
Table 20.13 Serial Interface (SCI3) Timing
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Reference
Item
Symbol Pins
Test Condition
Min
Typ Max Unit Figure
Input
clock
cycle
Asynchro-
nous
tScyc
SCK3
4
—
—
—
—
tcyc
Figure 20.5
Clocked
synchronous
6
—
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW
tTXD
SCK3
TXD
0.4
0.6 tScyc
Transmit data delay
time (clocked
synchronous)
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
—
—
—
—
1
1
tcyc
tcyc
Figure 20.6
Receive data setup
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXS
RXD
RXD
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 62.5
100.0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Receive data hold
time (clocked
synchronous)
tRXH
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V 62.5
100.0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 314 of 400
20.3.4 A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 20.14 A/D Converter Characteristics
VCC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable Test
Reference
Figure
Item
Symbol Pins
Condition
Min
Typ
Max
Unit
1
Analog power supply AVCC
voltage
AVCC
3.3
VCC
5.5
V
*
Analog input voltage AVIN
AN0 to
AN7
VSS – 0.3 —
AVCC + 0.3 V
Analog power supply AIOPE
current
AVCC
AVCC = 5.0 V
—
—
—
2.0
—
mA
fOSC
=
16 MHz
2
AISTOP1
AVCC
AVCC
50
µA
*
Reference
value
3
AISTOP2
—
—
—
—
5.0
µA
pF
*
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN0 to
AN7
30.0
Allowable signal
source impedance
RAIN
AN0 to
AN7
—
—
10
—
5.0
10
—
kΩ
bit
tcyc
Resolution (data
length)
10
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 3.0 V 134
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
—
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
tcyc
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V 70
to 5.5 V
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.5
7.5
7.5
0.5
8.0
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 315 of 400
Values
Typ
Applicable Test
Symbol Pins Condition
Reference
Figure
Item
Min
Max
Unit
Conversion time
(single mode)
AVCC = 4.0 V to 134
5.5 V
—
—
tcyc
Nonlinearity error
Offset error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.5
3.5
3.5
0.5
4.0
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
LSB
Full-scale error
Quantization error
Absolute accuracy
Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used.
2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.
3. AISTOP2 is the current at reset and in standby, subactive, and subsleep modes while the
A/D converter is idle.
20.3.5 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
Table 20.15 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
V
CC = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20°C to +75°C, unless otherwise specified.
Applicable Test
Pins Condition
Values
Typ
Reference
Unit Figure
Item
Symbol
Min
Max
On-chip
oscillator
overflow
time
tOVF
0.2
0.4
—
s
*
Note: * Shows the time to count from 0 to 255, at which point an internal reset is generated, when
the internal oscillator is selected.
20.4
Operation Timing
tOSC
V
IH
OSC1
V
IL
tCPH
tCPL
tCPf
tCPr
Figure 20.1 System Clock Input Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 316 of 400
VCC × 0.7
VCC
OSC1
tREL
VIL
VIL
tREL
Figure 20.2 RES Low Width Timing
V
IH
to
to
V
IL
TMCI
FTIOA to FTIOD
TMCIV, TMRIV
TRGV
tIL
tIH
Figure 20.3 Input Timing
VIH
VIL
SDA
SCL
tBUF
tSTAH
tSP
tSTOS
tSCLH
tSTAS
P*
S*
Sr*
P*
tSCLL
tSDAS
tSf
tSr
tSCL
tSDAH
Note: * S, P, and Sr represent the following:
S: Start condition
P: Stop condition
Sr: Retransmission start condition
Figure 20.4 I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 317 of 400
tSCKW
SCK3
tScyc
Figure 20.5 SCK3 Input Clock Timing
tScyc
*
*
VIH or VOH
VIL or VOL
SCK3
tTXD
*
VOH
TXD
(transmit data)
*
VOL
tRXS
tRXH
RXD
(receive data)
Note: * Output timing reference levels
Output high:
Output low:
V
V
= 2.0 V
OH
= 0.8 V
OL
Load conditions are shown in figure 19.8.
Figure 20.6 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clocked Synchronous Mode
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 318 of 400
1/fSCL
t
sf
tsp
t
SCLH
tSCLL
SCL
t
STAS
t
SDAH
t
STOS
t
STAH
t
SDAS
t
sr
SDA
(in)
t
BUF
t
AA
t
DH
SDA
(out)
Figure 20.7 EEPROM Bus Timing
20.5
Output Load Condition
VCC
2.4 kΩ
LSI output pin
30 pF
12 kΩ
Figure 20.8 Output Load Circuit
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 319 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 320 of 400
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.1
Instruction List
Operand Notation
Symbol
Rd
Description
General (destination*) register
Rs
General (source*) register
General register*
Rn
ERd
ERs
ERn
(EAd)
(EAs)
PC
General destination register (address register or 32-bit register)
General source register (address register or 32-bit register)
General register (32-bit register)
Destination operand
Source operand
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
CCR
N
Condition-code register
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z (zero) flag in CCR
Z
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C (carry) flag in CCR
C
disp
→
Displacement
Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from
the state on the left to the state on the right
+
Addition of the operands on both sides
–
Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left
Multiplication of the operands on both sides
Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right
Logical AND of the operands on both sides
Logical OR of the operands on both sides
Logical exclusive OR of the operands on both sides
NOT (logical complement)
×
÷
∧
∨
⊕
¬
( ), < >
Contents of operand
Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers
(R0 to R7 and E0 to E7).
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 321 of 400
Condition Code Notation
Symbol
Description
Changed according to execution result
Undetermined (no guaranteed value)
Cleared to 0
*
0
1
Set to 1
—
∆
Not affected by execution of the instruction
Varies depending on conditions, described in notes
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 322 of 400
Table A.1 Instruction Set
1. Data transfer instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
#xx:8 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
MOV
MOV.B Rs, Rd
2
2
4
8
2
Rs8 → Rd8
MOV.B @ERs, Rd
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd
@ERs → Rd8
4
@(d:16, ERs) → Rd8
@(d:24, ERs) → Rd8
6
10
6
@ERs → Rd8
ERs32+1 → ERs32
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
@aa:8 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd
MOV.B Rs, @ERd
4
@aa:16 → Rd8
@aa:24 → Rd8
Rs8 → @ERd
6
8
2
4
8
2
4
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @–ERd
Rs8 → @(d:16, ERd)
Rs8 → @(d:24, ERd)
6
10
6
ERd32–1 → ERd32
Rs8 → @ERd
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
B
B
2
4
6
Rs8 → @aa:8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
MOV.W Rs, Rd
Rs8 → @aa:16
Rs8 → @aa:24
#xx:16 → Rd16
Rs16 → Rd16
B
8
W
W
W
W
W
W
4
4
2
2
4
8
2
2
MOV.W @ERs, Rd
MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd
MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd
@ERs → Rd16
@(d:16, ERs) → Rd16
@(d:24, ERs) → Rd16
4
6
10
6
@ERs → Rd16
ERs32+2 → @ERd32
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd
MOV.W Rs, @ERd
W
W
W
W
W
4
@aa:16 → Rd16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
6
8
6
@aa:24 → Rd16
2
4
8
Rs16 → @ERd
4
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
Rs16 → @(d:16, ERd)
Rs16 → @(d:24, ERd)
6
10
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 323 of 400
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
MOV.W Rs, @–ERd
W
2
ERd32–2 → ERd32
Rs16 → @ERd
—
—
0
—
6
MOV
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24
MOV.L #xx:32, Rd
W
W
L
4
6
Rs16 → @aa:16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
8
Rs16 → @aa:24
6
#xx:32 → Rd32
6
MOV.L ERs, ERd
L
2
ERs32 → ERd32
@ERs → ERd32
2
MOV.L @ERs, ERd
MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd
MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd
L
4
8
L
6
@(d:16, ERs) → ERd32
@(d:24, ERs) → ERd32
10
14
10
L
10
4
L
@ERs → ERd32
ERs32+4 → ERs32
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd
MOV.L ERs, @ERd
L
L
L
L
L
L
6
@aa:16 → ERd32
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
12
8
8
@aa:24 → ERd32
4
ERs32 → @ERd
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @–ERd
6
ERs32 → @(d:16, ERd)
ERs32 → @(d:24, ERd)
10
14
10
10
4
ERd32–4 → ERd32
ERs32 → @ERd
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24
POP.W Rn
L
L
6
8
ERs32 → @aa:16
ERs32 → @aa:24
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
—
—
10
12
6
W
2
4
2
4
@SP → Rn16
SP+2 → SP
POP
POP.L ERn
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
L
W
L
@SP → ERn32
SP+4 → SP
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
—
—
—
10
6
SP–2 → SP
Rn16 → @SP
PUSH
SP–4 → SP
10
ERn32 → @SP
Cannot be used in
this LSI
MOVFPE MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd
MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16
B
B
Cannot be used in
this LSI
4
4
Cannot be used in
this LSI
Cannot be used in
this LSI
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 324 of 400
2. Arithmetic instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
ADD.B Rs, Rd
B
B
2
4
6
Rd8+#xx:8 → Rd8
Rd8+Rs8 → Rd8
—
—
2
2
4
2
6
ADD
2
2
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd
ADD.W Rs, Rd
W
W
L
Rd16+#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16+Rs16 → Rd16
— (1)
— (1)
— (2)
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd
ERd32+#xx:32 →
ERd32
ADD.L ERs, ERd
L
2
ERd32+ERs32 →
— (2)
2
ERd32
ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
ADDS.L #1, ERd
ADDS.L #2, ERd
ADDS.L #4, ERd
INC.B Rd
B
B
L
2
Rd8+#xx:8 +C → Rd8
Rd8+Rs8 +C → Rd8
ERd32+1 → ERd32
ERd32+2 → ERd32
ERd32+4 → ERd32
Rd8+1 → Rd8
—
—
(3)
(3)
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADDX
ADDS
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
L
B
W
W
L
INC
INC.W #1, Rd
INC.W #2, Rd
INC.L #1, ERd
INC.L #2, ERd
DAA Rd
Rd16+1 → Rd16
Rd16+2 → Rd16
ERd32+1 → ERd32
ERd32+2 → ERd32
L
B
Rd8 decimal adjust
*
DAA
SUB
→ Rd8
SUB.B Rs, Rd
B
W
W
L
2
2
2
Rd8–Rs8 → Rd8
—
2
4
2
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd
SUB.W Rs, Rd
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd
SUB.L ERs, ERd
SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
SUBS.L #1, ERd
SUBS.L #2, ERd
SUBS.L #4, ERd
DEC.B Rd
4
6
2
Rd16–#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16–Rs16 → Rd16
— (1)
— (1)
ERd32–#xx:32 → ERd32 — (2)
ERd32–ERs32 → ERd32 — (2)
L
SUBX
SUBS
B
B
L
Rd8–#xx:8–C → Rd8
Rd8–Rs8–C → Rd8
ERd32–1 → ERd32
ERd32–2 → ERd32
ERd32–4 → ERd32
Rd8–1 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
(3)
(3)
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L
L
DEC
B
W
W
DEC.W #1, Rd
DEC.W #2, Rd
Rd16–1 → Rd16
Rd16–2 → Rd16
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 325 of 400
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
DEC.L #1, ERd
DEC.L #2, ERd
L
L
B
2
2
2
ERd32–1 → ERd32
ERd32–2 → ERd32
—
—
—
—
—
*
—
—
—
2
2
2
DEC
DAS DAS.Rd
Rd8 decimal adjust
*
→ Rd8
MULXU MULXU. B Rs, Rd
MULXU. W Rs, ERd
MULXS MULXS. B Rs, Rd
MULXS. W Rs, ERd
B
W
B
2
2
4
4
2
Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
(unsigned multiplication)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
22
16
24
14
Rd16 × Rs16 → ERd32
(unsigned multiplication)
Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
(signed multiplication)
W
B
Rd16 × Rs16 → ERd32
(signed multiplication)
DIVXU DIVXU. B Rs, Rd
Rd16 ÷ Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
— (6) (7) —
— (6) (7) —
— (8) (7) —
— (8) (7) —
(unsigned division)
DIVXU. W Rs, ERd
DIVXS DIVXS. B Rs, Rd
DIVXS. W Rs, ERd
W
B
2
4
4
ERd32 ÷ Rs16 → ERd32
(Ed: remainder,
—
—
—
—
—
—
22
16
24
Rd: quotient)
(unsigned division)
Rd16 ÷ Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
(signed division)
W
ERd32 ÷ Rs16 → ERd32
(Ed: remainder,
Rd: quotient)
(signed division)
CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
CMP.B Rs, Rd
B
B
2
4
6
Rd8–#xx:8
—
—
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
Rd8–Rs8
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd
CMP.W Rs, Rd
W
W
L
Rd16–#xx:16
Rd16–Rs16
ERd32–#xx:32
ERd32–ERs32
— (1)
— (1)
— (2)
— (2)
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd
CMP.L ERs, ERd
L
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 326 of 400
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
NEG.B Rd
B
0–Rd8 → Rd8
W 0–Rd16 → Rd16
0–ERd32 → ERd32
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
NEG
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
L
EXTU EXTU.W Rd
W 0 → (<bits 15 to 8>
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
of Rd16)
EXTU.L ERd
L
0 → (<bits 31 to 16>
of ERd32)
2
2
2
—
—
—
2
2
2
EXTS EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
W (<bit 7> of Rd16) →
(<bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
L
(<bit 15> of ERd32) →
(<bits 31 to 16> of
ERd32)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 327 of 400
3. Logic instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
AND.B Rs, Rd
B
B
W
W
L
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
Rd8∧#xx:8 → Rd8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
4
2
6
4
2
2
4
2
6
4
2
2
4
2
6
4
2
2
2
AND
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
Rd8∧Rs8 → Rd8
AND.W #xx:16, Rd
AND.W Rs, Rd
AND.L #xx:32, ERd
AND.L ERs, ERd
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
OR.B Rs, Rd
Rd16∧#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16∧Rs16 → Rd16
ERd32∧#xx:32 → ERd32
ERd32∧ERs32 → ERd32
Rd8⁄#xx:8 → Rd8
L
B
B
W
W
L
OR
Rd8⁄Rs8 → Rd8
OR.W #xx:16, Rd
OR.W Rs, Rd
Rd16⁄#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16⁄Rs16 → Rd16
ERd32⁄#xx:32 → ERd32
ERd32⁄ERs32 → ERd32
Rd8⊕#xx:8 → Rd8
Rd8⊕Rs8 → Rd8
OR.L #xx:32, ERd
OR.L ERs, ERd
L
XOR XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
XOR.B Rs, Rd
B
B
W
W
L
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd
XOR.W Rs, Rd
Rd16⊕#xx:16 → Rd16
Rd16⊕Rs16 → Rd16
ERd32⊕#xx:32 → ERd32
ERd32⊕ERs32 → ERd32
¬ Rd8 → Rd8
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd
XOR.L ERs, ERd
NOT NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
L
4
2
2
2
B
W
L
¬ Rd16 → Rd16
NOT.L ERd
¬ Rd32 → Rd32
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 328 of 400
4. Shift instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
SHAL.B Rd
B
W
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
C
0
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHLL.B Rd
MSB
LSB
B
W
L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
MSB
LSB
B
W
L
C
0
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.L ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
B
W
L
SHLR
ROTXL
0
C
B
W
L
C
MSB
LSB
B
W
L
ROTXR
C
MSB
LSB
ROTL ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.W Rd
B
W
L
C
MSB
LSB
ROTL.L ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.L ERd
B
W
L
ROTR
C
MSB
LSB
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 329 of 400
5. Bit manipulation instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
BSET #xx:3, Rd
BSET #xx:3, @ERd
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
BSET Rn, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 1
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ← 1
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 1
(Rn8 of Rd8) ← 1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
BSET
BCLR
BNOT
BSET Rn, @ERd
BSET Rn, @aa:8
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
BCLR Rn, Rd
(Rn8 of @ERd) ← 1
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 1
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 0
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ← 0
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 0
(Rn8 of Rd8) ← 0
BCLR Rn, @ERd
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
(Rn8 of @ERd) ← 0
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 0
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
BNOT Rn, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
4
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
8
2
8
8
4
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
2
4
4
(Rn8 of Rd8) ←
¬ (Rn8 of Rd8)
BNOT Rn, @ERd
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
(Rn8 of @ERd) ←
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd)
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ←
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8)
BTST #xx:3, Rd
BTST #xx:3, @ERd
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
BTST Rn, Rd
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd) → Z
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → Z
¬ (Rn8 of @Rd8) → Z
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd) → Z
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8) → Z
(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
BTST
BTST Rn, @ERd
BTST Rn, @aa:8
BLD #xx:3, Rd
—
BLD
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 330 of 400
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
BLD #xx:3, @ERd
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
4
(#xx:3 of @ERd) → C
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
6
2
6
6
2
8
8
2
8
8
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
BLD
4
BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd
BILD #xx:3, @ERd
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
4
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd) → C
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
4
BST #xx:3, Rd
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
BST
BST #xx:3, @ERd
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
BIST #xx:3, Rd
4
C → (#xx:3 of @ERd24)
C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
¬ C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
4
2
BIST
BIST #xx:3, @ERd
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
BAND #xx:3, Rd
4
¬ C → (#xx:3 of @ERd24)
¬ C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C∧(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
4
2
BAND
BIAND
BOR
BAND #xx:3, @ERd
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BOR #xx:3, Rd
4
4
2
4
4
2
BOR #xx:3, @ERd
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
4
4
2
C
C
C
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BIOR #xx:3, @ERd
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
4
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
4
2
C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
4
C⊕(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
4
2
4
4
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 331 of 400
6. Branching instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
Branch
I
H
N
Z
V
C
Condition
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
BHI d:8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
Always
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
4
6
If condition
is true then
PC ← PC+d
else next;
Bcc
Never
C
C
Z = 0
Z = 1
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
C = 0
C = 1
Z = 0
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
Z = 1
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
V = 0
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
V = 1
BVS d:16
BPL d:8
N = 0
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
N = 1
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
N⊕V = 0
N⊕V = 1
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
BGT d:8
Z
Z
(N⊕V) = 0
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
(N⊕V) = 1
BLE d:16
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 332 of 400
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
JMP @ERn
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
BSR d:8
—
—
—
—
2
4
2
2
PC ← ERn
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
6
JMP
BSR
PC ← aa:24
PC ← @aa:8
8
6
10
8
PC → @–SP
PC ← PC+d:8
BSR d:16
—
—
—
—
—
4
PC → @–SP
PC ← PC+d:16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
6
8
8
8
10
8
JSR
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
2
4
2
PC → @–SP
PC ← ERn
PC → @–SP
PC ← aa:24
10
12
10
PC → @–SP
PC ← @aa:8
RTS RTS
2
PC ← @SP+
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 333 of 400
7. System control instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
1
TRAPA #x:2
—
2
PC → @–SP
CCR → @–SP
<vector> → PC
—
—
—
—
—
14 16
TRAPA
RTE
RTE
—
—
CCR ← @SP+
PC ← @SP+
10
2
—
SLEEP SLEEP
Transition to power-
down state
—
—
—
—
—
LDC #xx:8, CCR
B
B
2
#xx:8 → CCR
2
2
LDC
LDC Rs, CCR
2
Rs8 → CCR
LDC @ERs, CCR
W
W
W
W
4
@ERs → CCR
6
LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR
LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR
LDC @ERs+, CCR
6
@(d:16, ERs) → CCR
@(d:24, ERs) → CCR
8
10
4
12
8
@ERs → CCR
ERs32+2 → ERs32
LDC @aa:16, CCR
LDC @aa:24, CCR
STC CCR, Rd
W
W
B
6
@aa:16 → CCR
@aa:24 → CCR
CCR → Rd8
8
10
2
8
—
—
—
—
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
STC
STC CCR, @ERd
W
W
W
W
4
CCR → @ERd
6
STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd)
STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd)
STC CCR, @–ERd
6
CCR → @(d:16, ERd)
CCR → @(d:24, ERd)
8
10
4
12
8
ERd32–2 → ERd32
CCR → @ERd
—
—
STC CCR, @aa:16
STC CCR, @aa:24
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
ORC #xx:8, CCR
XORC #xx:8, CCR
W
W
B
6
8
CCR → @aa:16
CCR → @aa:24
CCR∧#xx:8 → CCR
CCR #xx:8 → CCR
CCR⊕#xx:8 → CCR
PC ← PC+2
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
10
2
2
2
2
ANDC
ORC
B
2
XORC
B
2
—
NOP NOP
—
2
—
—
—
—
—
2
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 334 of 400
8. Block transfer instructions
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Mnemonic
Operation
I
H
N
Z
V
C
EEPMOV
EEPMOV. B
—
—
4
4
if R4L ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
—
—
—
—
—
—
8+
4n*2
R6+1 → R6
R4L–1 → R4L
until
else next
R4L=0
EEPMOV. W
if R4 ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
—
—
—
—
—
—
8+
4n*2
R6+1 → R6
R4–1 → R4
until
R4=0
else next
Notes: 1. The number of states in cases where the instruction code and its operands are located
in on-chip memory is shown here. For other cases see section A.3, Number of
Execution States.
2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4.
(1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
(2) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0.
(3) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(4) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value.
(5) The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in
synchronization with the E clock is variable.
(6) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
(7) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(8) Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 335 of 400
A.2
Operation Code Map
Table A.2 Operation Code Map (1)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 336 of 400
Table A.2 Operation Code Map (2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 337 of 400
Table A.2 Operation Code Map (3)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 338 of 400
A.3
Number of Execution States
The status of execution for each instruction of the H8/300H CPU and the method of calculating
the number of states required for instruction execution are shown below. Table A.4 shows the
number of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction, such as instruction fetch and data
read/write. Table A.3 shows the number of states required for each cycle. The total number of
states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated by the following expression:
Execution states = I × SI + J × SJ + K × SK + L × SL + M × SM + N × SN
Examples: When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, and an on-chip RAM is accessed.
BSET #0, @FF00
From table A.4:
I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0
From table A.3:
SI = 2, SL = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 2 × 2 = 8
When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, branch address is read from on-chip ROM, and
on-chip RAM is used for stack area.
JSR @@ 30
From table A.4:
I = 2, J = K = 1, L = M = N = 0
From table A.3:
SI = SJ = SK = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 1 × 2+ 1 × 2 = 8
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 339 of 400
Table A.3 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Access Location
On-Chip Peripheral Module
Execution Status
(Instruction Cycle)
On-Chip Memory
Instruction fetch
SI
2
—
Branch address read
Stack operation
SJ
SK
SL
SM
SN
Byte data access
Word data access
Internal operation
2 or 3*
—
1
Note: * Depends on which on-chip peripheral module is accessed. See section 19.1, Register
Addresses.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 340 of 400
Table A.4 Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
ADD
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADD.B Rs, Rd
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd
ADD.W Rs, Rd
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd
ADD.L ERs, ERd
ADDS #1/2/4, ERd
ADDX #xx:8, Rd
ADDX Rs, Rd
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
AND.B Rs, Rd
AND.W #xx:16, Rd
AND.W Rs, Rd
AND.L #xx:32, ERd
AND.L ERs, ERd
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
BAND #xx:3, Rd
BAND #xx:3, @ERd
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BHI d:8
ADDS
ADDX
AND
ANDC
BAND
1
1
Bcc
BLS d:8
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BNE d:8
BEQ d:8
BVC d:8
BVS d:8
BPL d:8
BMI d:8
BGE d:8
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 341 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
Bcc
BLT d:8
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
BGT d:8
BLE d:8
BRA d:16(BT d:16)
BRN d:16(BF d:16)
BHI d:16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BLS d:16
BCC d:16(BHS d:16)
BCS d:16(BLO d:16)
BNE d:16
BEQ d:16
BVC d:16
BVS d:16
BPL d:16
BMI d:16
BGE d:16
BLT d:16
BGT d:16
BLE d:16
BCLR
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
BCLR Rn, Rd
BCLR Rn, @ERd
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
BILD #xx:3, Rd
BILD #xx:3, @ERd
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
2
2
BIAND
BILD
1
1
1
1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 342 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
BIOR
BIOR #xx:8, Rd
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
BIOR #xx:8, @ERd
BIOR #xx:8, @aa:8
BIST #xx:3, Rd
1
1
BIST
BIST #xx:3, @ERd
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BLD #xx:3, Rd
2
2
BIXOR
BLD
1
1
BLD #xx:3, @ERd
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
BNOT Rn, Rd
1
1
BNOT
2
2
BNOT Rn, @ERd
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
BOR #xx:3, Rd
2
2
BOR
BOR #xx:3, @ERd
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
BSET #xx:3, Rd
BSET #xx:3, @ERd
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
BSET Rn, Rd
1
1
BSET
2
2
BSET Rn, @ERd
BSET Rn, @aa:8
BSR d:8
2
2
BSR
BST
1
1
BSR d:16
2
BST #xx:3, Rd
BST #xx:3, @ERd
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 343 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
BTST
BTST #xx:3, Rd
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
BTST #xx:3, @ERd
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
BTST Rn, Rd
1
1
BTST Rn, @ERd
BTST Rn, @aa:8
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
CMP.B Rs, Rd
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd
CMP.W Rs, Rd
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd
CMP.L ERs, ERd
DAA Rd
1
1
BXOR
CMP
1
1
DAA
DAS
DEC
DAS Rd
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1/2, Rd
DEC.L #1/2, ERd
DIVXS.B Rs, Rd
DIVXS.W Rs, ERd
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
DIVXU.W Rs, ERd
EEPMOV.B
DUVXS
DIVXU
EEPMOV
EXTS
12
20
12
20
2n+2*1
2n+2*1
EEPMOV.W
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
EXTU
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 344 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
INC
INC.B Rd
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
1
INC.W #1/2, Rd
INC.L #1/2, ERd
JMP @ERn
JMP
JSR
LDC
JMP @aa:24
2
2
JMP @@aa:8
1
1
JSR @ERn
1
1
1
JSR @aa:24
2
JSR @@aa:8
LDC #xx:8, CCR
LDC Rs, CCR
LDC@ERs, CCR
LDC@(d:16, ERs), CCR
LDC@(d:24,ERs), CCR
LDC@ERs+, CCR
LDC@aa:16, CCR
LDC@aa:24, CCR
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
MOV.B Rs, Rd
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
MOV
MOV.B @ERs, Rd
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd
MOV.B Rs, @Erd
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
MOV.B Rs, @-ERd
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 345 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
MOV MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
J
K
L
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
4
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
2
3
5
2
3
4
2
2
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
MOV.W Rs, Rd
MOV.W @ERs, Rd
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs), Rd
MOV.W @(d:24,ERs), Rd
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd
MOV.W Rs, @ERd
2
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24,ERd)
MOV.W Rs, @-ERd
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24
MOV.L #xx:32, ERd
MOV.L ERs, ERd
MOV
2
MOV.L @ERs, ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs), ERd
MOV.L @(d:24,ERs), ERd
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24,ERd)
MOV.L ERs, @-ERd
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24
MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd*2
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16*2
2
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
1
1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 346 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
MULXS
MULXU
NEG
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
20
12
20
MULXS.W Rs, ERd
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
MULXU.W Rs, ERd
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
NOP
NOT
NOP
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
OR
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
OR.B Rs, Rd
OR.W #xx:16, Rd
OR.W Rs, Rd
OR.L #xx:32, ERd
OR.L ERs, ERd
ORC #xx:8, CCR
POP.W Rn
ORC
POP
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
POP.L ERn
PUSH
ROTL
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 347 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
ROTXR
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
RTE
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
2
1
3
1
1
RTE
2
1
2
2
RTS
RTS
SHAL
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SLEEP
STC
SLEEP
STC CCR, Rd
STC CCR, @ERd
STC CCR, @(d:16,ERd)
STC CCR, @(d:24,ERd)
STC CCR,@-ERd
STC CCR, @aa:16
STC CCR, @aa:24
SUB.B Rs, Rd
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd
SUB.W Rs, Rd
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd
SUB.L ERs, ERd
SUBS #1/2/4, ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
SUB
SUBS
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 348 of 400
Instruction Branch
Stack
Byte Data
Word Data Internal
Fetch
I
Addr. Read Operation Access
Access
M
Operation
N
Instruction Mnemonic
J
K
L
SUBX
SUBX #xx:8, Rd
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
SUBX. Rs, Rd
TRAPA
XOR
TRAPA #xx:2
1
2
4
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
XOR.B Rs, Rd
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd
XOR.W Rs, Rd
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd
XOR.L ERs, ERd
XORC #xx:8, CCR
XORC
Note: 1. n:specified value in R4L and R4. The source and destination operands are accessed
n+1 times respectively.
2. Cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 349 of 400
A.4
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table A.5 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Addressing Mode
Functions
Instructions
Data
transfer
instructions
MOV
BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL
B
BWL BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WL
—
POP, PUSH
MOVFPE,
MOVTPE
ADD, CMP
SUB
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Arithmetic
operations
BWL BWL
WL BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ADDX, SUBX
ADDS, SUBS
INC, DEC
DAA, DAS
MULXU,
B
B
L
—
—
—
—
BWL
B
BW
MULXS,
DIVXU,
DIVXS
NEG
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
BWL
WL
BWL
BWL
BWL
B
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
EXTU, EXTS
AND, OR, XOR
NOT
Logical
operations
Shift operations
Bit manipulations
Branching
instructions
BCC, BSR
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
JMP, JSR
RTS
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
System
control
instructions
TRAPA
RTE
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SLEEP
LDC
—
B
STC
—
B
B
—
—
ANDC, ORC,
XORC
NOP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Block data transfer instructions
BW
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 350 of 400
Appendix B I/O Port Block Diagrams
B.1
I/O Port Block
RES goes low in a reset, and SBY goes low in a reset and in standby mode.
Internal data bus
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
TRGV
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.1 Port 1 Block Diagram (P17)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 351 of 400
Internal data bus
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.2 Port 1 Block Diagram (P16 to P14)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 352 of 400
Internal data bus
PUCR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.3 Port 1 Block Diagram (P12, P11)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 353 of 400
Internal data bus
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Timer A
TMOW
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.4 Port 1 Block Diagram (P10)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 354 of 400
Internal data bus
PMR
PDR
PCR
SCI3
TxD
Legend
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.5 Port 2 Block Diagram (P22)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 355 of 400
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
SCI3
RE
RxD
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.6 Port 2 Block Diagram (P21)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 356 of 400
SCI3
SCKIE
SCKOE
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
SCKO
SCKI
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.7 Port 2 Block Diagram (P20)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 357 of 400
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
IIC
ICE
SDAO/SCLO
SDAI/SCLI
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.8 Port 5 Block Diagram (P57, P56)*
Note: * Not included in H8/3664N.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 358 of 400
Internal data bus
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.9 Port 5 Block Diagram (P55)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 359 of 400
Internal data bus
PUCR
PMR
Pull-up MOS
PDR
PCR
Legend
PUCR: Port pull-up control register
PMR: Port mode register
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.10 Port 5 Block Diagram (P54 to P50)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 360 of 400
Internal data bus
Timer V
OS3
OS2
OS1
OS0
PDR
PCR
TMOV
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.11 Port 7 Block Diagram (P76)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 361 of 400
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
Timer V
TMCIV
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.12 Port 7 Block Diagram (P75)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 362 of 400
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
Timer V
TMRIV
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.13 Port 7 Block Diagram (P74)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 363 of 400
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.14 Port 8 Block Diagram (P87 to P85)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 364 of 400
Internal data bus
Timer W
Output
control
signals
A to D
PDR
PCR
FTIOA
FTIOB
FTIOC
FTIOD
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.15 Port 8 Block Diagram (P84 to P81)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 365 of 400
Internal data bus
PDR
PCR
Timer W
FTCI
Legend
PDR: Port data register
PCR: Port control register
Figure B.16 Port 8 Block Diagram (P80)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 366 of 400
Internal data bus
A/D converter
DEC
CH3 to CH0
VIN
Figure B.17 Port B Block Diagram (PB7 to PB0)
B.2
Port States in Each Operating State
Port
Reset
Sleep
Subsleep
Standby
Subactive Active
P17 to P14, High
Retained
Retained
High
Functioning Functioning
P12 to P10
impedance
impedance*
P22 to P20
High
impedance
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
High
impedance*
Functioning Functioning
Functioning Functioning
P57 to P50
High
High
(P55 to P50 impedance
for H8/3664N)
impedance
P76 to P74
High
impedance
Retained
Retained
High
Retained
Retained
High
High
impedance
Functioning Functioning
Functioning Functioning
P87 to P80
High
impedance
High
impedance
PB7 to PB0 High
High
High
High
impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance impedance
Note: * High level output when the pull-up MOS is in on state.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 367 of 400
Appendix C Product Code Lineup
Package
(Hitachi Package
Code)
Product Type
Product Code Model Marking
H8/3664
Flash memory Standard HD64N3664FP
HD64N3664FP
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
version with
EEPROM
product
Flash memory Standard HD64F3664FP
HD64F3664FP
HD64F3664H
HD64F3664FX
HD64F3664FY
HD64F3664BP
LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
QFP-64 (FP-64A)
LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
SDIP-42 (DP-42S)
version
product
HD64F3664H
HD64F3664FX
HD64F3664FY
HD64F3664BP
Mask ROM
version
Standard HD6433664FP
HD6433664 (***) FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD6433664 (***) H QFP-64 (FP-64A)
product
HD6433664H
HD6433664FX
HD6433664FY
HD6433664 (***) FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD6433664 (***) FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD6433664 (***) BP SDIP-42 (DP-42S)
HD6433663 (***) FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD6433664BP
H8/3663
H8/3662
H8/3661
Mask ROM
version
Standard HD6433663FP
product
HD6433663H
HD6433663 (***) H
QFP-64 (FP-64A)
HD6433663FX
HD6433663FY
HD6433663 (***) FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD6433663 (***) FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD6433663 (***) BP SDIP-42 (DP-42S)
HD6433662 (***) FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD6433663BP
Mask ROM
version
Standard HD6433662FP
product
HD6433662H
HD6433662 (***) H
QFP-64 (FP-64A)
HD6433662FX
HD6433662FY
HD6433662 (***) FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD6433662 (***) FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD6433662 (***) BP SDIP-42 (DP-42S)
HD6433661 (***) FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD6433662BP
Mask ROM
version
Standard HD6433661FP
product
HD6433661H
HD6433661 (***) H
QFP-64 (FP-64A)
HD6433661FX
HD6433661FY
HD6433661BP
HD6433661 (***) FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD6433661 (***) FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD6433661 (***) BP SDIP-42 (DP-42S)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 368 of 400
Package
(Hitachi Package
Code)
Product Type
Product Code Model Marking
H8/3660
Mask ROM
version
Standard HD6433660FP
HD6433660 (***) FP LQFP-64 (FP-64E)
HD6433660 (***) H QFP-64 (FP-64A)
product
HD6433660H
HD6433660FX
HD6433660FY
HD6433660BP
HD6433660 (***) FX LQFP-48 (FP-48F)
HD6433660 (***) FY LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
HD6433660 (***) BP SDIP-42 (DP-42S)
Legend
(***): ROM code
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 369 of 400
Appendix D Package Dimensions
The package dimensions that are shows in the Hitachi Semiconductor Packages Data Book have
priority.
Unit: mm
12.0 0.2
10
48
33
49
64
32
17
1
16
0.08 M
*0.22 0.0ꢀ
0.20 0.04
1.2ꢀ
1.0
0
8
0.ꢀ 0.2
0.10
Hitachi Code
FP-64E
JEDEC
EIAJ
Conforms
0.4 g
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
Mass (reference value)
Figure D.1 FP-64E Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 370 of 400
Unit: mm
17.2 0.3
14
33
48
32
17
49
64
1
16
M
*0.37 0.08
0.3ꢀ 0.06
0.1ꢀ
1.6
1.0
0
8
0.8 0.3
0.10
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
EIAJ
FP-64A
Conforms
1.2 g
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
Mass (reference value)
Figure D.2 FP-64A Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 371 of 400
Unit: mm
12.0 0.2
10
36
2ꢀ
37
48
24
13
12
1
1.42ꢀ
*0.32 0.0ꢀ
0.30 0.04
M
0.13
1.0
0 – 8
0.ꢀ0 0.1
0.10
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
FP-48F
—
EIAJ
—
*Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
Mass (reference value)
0.4 g
Figure D.3 FP-48F Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 372 of 400
As of January, 2002
Unit: mm
9.0 0.2
7
36
2ꢀ
37
48
24
13
1
12
*0.22 0.0ꢀ
0.20 0.04
M
0.08
0.7ꢀ
1.0
0˚ – 8˚
0.ꢀ 0.1
0.08
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
FP-48B
—
JEITA
Mass (reference value)
—
0.2 g
*
Dimension including the plating thickness
Base material dimension
Figure D.4 FP-48B Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 373 of 400
Unit: mm
37.3
38.6 Max
42
1
22
21
1.0
1.38 Max
15.24
0.25-+ 0.10
0.05
1.78 0.25
0.48 0.10
0
15
Hitachi Code
JEDEC
EIAJ
DP-42S
Conforms
4.8 g
Mass (reference value)
Figure D.5 DP-42S Package Dimensions
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 374 of 400
Appendix E Laminated-Structure Cross Section
Figure E.1 Laminated-Structure Cross Section of H8/3664N
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 375 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 376 of 400
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
Added.
General Precautions on
Handling of Product
iii
iv
v
4.0
Configuration of This
Manual
Added.
4.0
4.0
Preface
Notes added.
Restrictions 1 to 6 when using an on-chip emulator
(E10T) for H8/3664 program development and
debugging
1.1 Features
1
3.0
Product
Model EEPROM ROM RAM
On-chip memory
Classification
Flash memory H8/3664N HD64N 512
32
2,048
version
(F-ZTATTM
3664
bytes
kbytes bytes
H8/3664F HD64F
32 2,048
kbytes bytes
version)
3664
1.1 Features
1
1
2
Description of general I/O ports added.
3.0
3.0
4.0
General I/O ports
1.1 Features
I/O pins: 29 I/O pins (H8/3664N has 27 I/O pins)
Description of EEPROM interface added.
EEPROM interface
1.1 Features
Package added.
Compact package
LQFP-48 (FP-48F) and LQFP-48 (FP-48B)
TEST → TEST
1.2 Internal Block Diagram 2
2.0
2.0
Figure 1.1 Internal Block
Diagram of H8/3664 of F-
ZTATTM and Mask-ROM
Versions
RAM
2
I
C bus
interface
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 377 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
1.2 Internal Block Diagram 3
Added.
3.0
Figure 1.2 Internal Block
Diagram of H8/3664N of F-
ZTATTM Version with
EEPROM
1.3 Pin Arrangement
4
4.0
4.0
3.0
4.0
Figure 1.3 Pin
Note: Do not connect NC pins (these pins are not connected to the internal circuitry).
Arrangement of H8/3664
of F-ZTATTM and Mask-
ROM Versions
(FP-64E, FP-64A)
1.3 Pin Arrangement
5
7
Added.
Figure 1.4 Pin
Arrangement of H8/3664
of F-ZTATTM and Mask-
ROM Versions
(FP-48F, FP-48B)
1.3 Pin Arrangement
Added.
Figure 1.6 Pin
Arrangement of H8/3664N
of F-ZTATTM Version with
EEPROM
(FP-64E)
51
52
53
54
55
P14/
P15/
P16/
P75/TMCIV
P74/TMRIV
SCL*
29
28
27
26
25
P17/
/TRGV
SDA*
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
P12
* These pins are only available for the I2C bus interface in the F-ZATTM version with EEPROM.
1.4 Pin Functions
8
9
FP-48F and FP-48B added.
4.0
3.0
3.0
Table 1.1 Pin Functions
Description of I2C bus interface added.
SCL: I/O (EEPROM: input)
Description of I/O ports added.
P57 to P50 (P55 to P50 for H8/3664N)
8-bit I/O port. (6-bit I/O port for H8/3664N)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 378 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
1.4 Pin Functions
Table 1.1 Pin Functions
10
1.5 Comparison between H8/3664N and H8/3664
(deleted)
4.0
The description is moved to note in table 1.1.
1. These pins are only available for the I2C bus
interface in the F-ZTATTM version with EEPROM.
Since the I2C bus is disabled after canceling a
reset, the ICE bit in ICCR must be set to 1 by using
the program.
2.1 Address Space and
Memory Map
14
Memory map for on-chip EEPROM module added.
3.0
Figure 2.1 Memory Map
(3)
2.5.1 Addressing Modes
34
41
Absolute address: 16 bits
2.0
2.0
Table 2.11 Absolute
Address Access Ranges
H'FF00 to H'FFFF → H'0000 to H'FFFF
2.8 Usage Notes
Description added.
2.8.3 Bit Manipulation
Instruction
Bit manipulation for two registers assigned to the
same address
Bit Manipulation in a Register Containing a Write-Only
Bit
3.2.2 Interrupt Edge Select 50
Register 2 (IEGR2)
Description of bit 5 amended.
2.0
4.0
0: Falling edge of WKP5 (ADTRG) pin input is
detected
1: Rising edge of WKP5 (ADTRG) pin input is
detected
4.1.1 Address Break
Control Register
(ABRKCR)
62
Bit Bit Name Description
4
3
2
ACMP2
ACMP1
ACMP0
Address Compare Condition Select 2 to 0
These bits comparison condition between the
address set in BAR and the internal address
bus.
000: Compares 16-bit addresses
001: Compares upper 12-bit addresses
010: Compares upper 8-bit addresses
011: Compares upper 4-bit addresses
1XX: Reserved (setting prohibited)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 379 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
4.2 Operation
64
Description amended.
4.0
When the ABIF and ABIE bits in ABRKSR are set to
1, the address break function generates an interrupt
request to the CPU. The ABIF bit in ABRKSR is set to
1 by the combination of the address set in BAR, the
data set in BDR, and the conditions set in ABRKCR.
4.2 Operation
65
Deleted.
4.0
Figure 4.2 Address Break
Interrupt Operation
Example (3)
4.3 Usage Notes
65
67
Added.
4.0
3.0
Section 5 Clock Pulse
Generators
Description of subclock pulse generator amended.
System clock divider → Subclock divider
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram
of Clock Pulse Generators
5.1 System Clock
Generator
68
4.0
OSC
OSC
2
1
Figure 5.2 Block Diagram
of System Clock Generator
LPM
(standby mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode)
5.2 Subclock Generator
70
Added.
3.0
2.0
Figure 5.7 Block Diagram
of Subclock Generator
5.2.2 Pin Connection when 71
Not Using Subclock
VCL or VSS
X1
Figure 5.10 Pin
Connection when not
Using Subclock
X2
Open
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 380 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
5.3.1 Prescaler S
71
Description amended: watch mode deleted.
4.0
In standby mode, subactive mode, and subsleep
mode, the system clock pulse generator stops.
Prescaler S also stops and is initialized to H'0000.
Description amended: active (medium-speed) mode
→ active mode
In active mode and sleep mode, the clock input to
prescaler S is determined by the division factor
designated by MA2 to MA0 in SYSCR2.
5.3.2 Prescaler W
71
77
Description amended: watch mode deleted.
4.0
4.0
Prescaler W is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and starts
counting on exit from the reset state. Even in standby
mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode, prescaler
W continues functioning so long as clock signals are
supplied to pins X1 and X2.
6.1.1 System control
register 1 (SYSCR1)
Bit Bit Name Description
6
5
4
0
0
0
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0
These bits designate the time the CPU
and peripheral modules wait for stable
clock operation after exiting from standby
mode, subactive mode, or subsleep
mode to active mode or sleep mode due
to an interrupt. The designation should
be made according to the clock
frequency so that the waiting time is at
least 6.5 ms. The relationship between
the specified value and the number of
wait states is shown in table 6.1. When
an external clock is to be used, the
minimum value (STS2 = STS1 = STS0 =
1) is recommended.
3
0
Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency
Select
The subclock pulse generator generates
the watch clock signal (φW) and the
system clock pulse generator generates
the oscillator clock (φOSC). This bit selects
the sampling frequency of the oscillator
clock when the watch clock signal (φW) is
sampled. When φOSC = 2 to 10 MHz, clear
NESEL to 0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 381 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
6.1.1 System control
register 1 (SYSCR1)
78
Operating frequency of 16 MHz added.
2.0
Table 6.1 Operating
Frequency and Waiting
Time
6.2 Mode Transitions and 82
States of LSI
In active mode after sleep instruction execution:
SMSEL = X → 0*
2.0
4.0
Table 6.2 Transition Mode
after SLEEP Instruction
Execution and Interrupt
Handling
*When a state transition is performed while SMSEL is
1, timer V, SCI3, and the A/D converter are reset, and
all registers are set to their initial values. To use these
functions after entering active mode, reset the
registers.
6.2.4 Subactive Mode
85
Description amended.
The operating frequency of subactive mode is
selected from øW/2, øW/4, and øW/8 by the SA1 and
SA0 bits in SYSCR2. After the SLEEP instruction is
executed, the operating frequency changes to the
frequency which is set before the execution.
6.6 Usage Note
Section 7 ROM
86
87
Added.
4.0
4.0
Description amended.
•
Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 1,000
times.
•
Power-down mode
Operation of the power supply circuit can be partly
halted in subactive mode. As a result, flash memory
can be read with low power consumption.
7.2.1 Flash Memory
Control Register 1
(FLMCR1)
89
Description of bit 5 added.
2.0
Set this bit to 1 before setting the E bit to 1 in
FLMCR1.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 382 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
7.2.4 Flash Memory Power 91
Control Register
(FLPWCR)
Description of bit 7 amended.
2.0
R → R/W
Description amended.
4.0
FLPWCR enables or disables a transition to the flash
memory power-down mode when the LSI switches to
subactive mode. There are two modes: mode in which
operation of the power supply circuit of flash memory
is partly halted in power-down mode and flash
memory can be read, and mode in which even if a
transition is made to subactive mode, operation of the
power supply circuit of flash memory is retained and
flash memory can be read.
7.2.5 Flash Memory
Enable Register (FENR)
91
94
Description of bit 7 amended.
R → R/W
2.0
4.0
Description amended.
Bit 7 (FLSHE) in FENR enables or disables the CPU
access to the flash memory control registers,
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and FLPWCR.
7.3.1 Boot Mode
Changed.
4.0
Table 7.2 Boot Mode
Operation
Host Operation
Communication Contents
LSI Operation
Processing Contents
Processing Contents
Branches to boot program at reset-start.
Boot program initiation
. . .
H'00
Continuously transmits data H'00
at specified bit rate.
H'00, H'00
• Measures low-level period of receive data
H'00.
• Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI3.
• Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment
end indication.
H'00
Transmits data H'55 when data H'00
is received error-free.
H'55
H'FF
H'AA
Boot program
erase error
Checks flash memory data, erases all flash
memory blocks in case of written data
existing, and transmits data H'AA to host.
(If erase could not be done, transmits data
H'FF to host and aborts operation.)
H'AA reception
Upper bytes, lower bytes
Echoback
Transmits number of bytes (N) of
programming control program to be
transferred as 2-byte data
(low-order byte following high-order
byte)
Echobacks the 2-byte data
received to host.
Echobacks received data to host and also
transfers it to RAM.
(repeated for N times)
H'XX
Transmits 1-byte of programming
control program (repeated for N times)
Echoback
H'AA
Transmits data H'AA to host when data H'55
is received.
H'AA reception
Branches to programming control program
transferred to on-chip RAM and starts
execution.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 383 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
7.4.1 Program/Program-
Verify
96
Description amended.
4.0
7. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-
byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2 bits
are B'00. Verify data can be read in words or in
longwords from the address to which a dummy
write was performed.
Write pulse application subroutine
7.4.1 Program/Program-
Verify
97
4.0
Apply Write Pulse
WDT enable
START
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait
1 µs
Set PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait 50 µs
Store 128-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
Figure 7.3
Program/Program-Verify
Flowchart
*
n=
1
0
Set
Wait (Wait time=programming time)
Clear bit in FLMCR1
Wait µs
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait µs
P bit in FLMCR1
m=
Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram
data area consecutively to flash memory
P
5
Apply Write pulse
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
Wait
4 µs
5
Set block start address as
verify address
Disable WDT
End Sub
n
← n + 1
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait
2 µs
*
Read verify data
Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during the following 1. and 2. periods.
1.
2.
A
A
period between 128-byte data programming to flash memory and the P bit clearing
period between dummy writing of H'FF to
a
verify address and verify data reading
7.4.3
100
4.0
Interrupt Handling when
Programming/Erasing
Flash Memory
EV bit ← 1
Wait 20 µs
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
Figure 7.4 Erase/Erase-
Verify Flowchart
*
n ← n + 1
Read verify data
Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during a period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading.
Following sections deleted. 4.0
7.6 Programmer Mode
102
7.6.1 Socket Adapter
7.6.2 Programmer Mode Commands
7.6.3 Memory Read Mode
7.6.4 Auto-Program Mode
7.6.5 Auto-Erase Mode
7.6.6 Status Read Mode
7.6.7 Status Polling
7.6.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time
7.6.9 Notes on Memory Programming
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 384 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
7.7 Power-Down States for 102
Flash Memory
Bit name amended.
4.0
In subactive mode, the flash memory can be set to
operate in power-down mode with the PDWND bit in
FLPWCR.
Bit name amended.
SYSCR → SYSCR1
Description amended.
3.0
4.0
•
Power-down operating mode
The power supply circuit of flash memory can be
partly halted. As a result, flash memory can be read
with low power consumption.
7.7 Power-Down States for 102
Flash Memory
Description amended.
4.0
When the flash memory returns to its normal
operating state from power-down mode or standby
mode, a period to stabilize operation of the power
supply circuits that were stopped is needed.
Section 8 RAM
103
105
RAM list added.
4.0
3.0
Section 9 I/O Ports
Description changed.
9.3 Port 5
113
Description amended.
4.0
Port 5 is a general I/O port also functioning as an I2C
bus interface I/O pin, an A/D trigger input pin, wakeup
interrupt input pin. Each pin of the port 5 is shown in
figure 9.3. The register setting of the I2C bus interface
register has priority for functions of the pins P57/SCL
and P56/SDA. Since the output buffer for pins P56
and P57 has the NMOS push-pull structure, it differs
from an output buffer with the CMOS structure in the
high-level output characteristics (see section 20,
Electrical Characteristics). The H8/3664N does not
have P57 and P56.
Description added.
3.0
The H8/3664N does not have P57 and P56.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 385 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
9.3 Port 5
113
3.0
H8/3664
H8/3664N
Figure 9.3 Port 5 Pin
Configuration
P57/SCL
SCL
SDA
P55/
P54/
P53/
P52/
P51/
P50/
P56/SDA
P55/
/
/
P54/
Port 5
Port 5
P53/
P52/
P51/
P50/
9.3.1 Port Mode Register 5 114
(PMR5)
Description of bit 5 amended.
3.0
2.0
Selects whether pin P55/WKP5/ADTRG is used as
P55 or as WKP5/ADTRG input.
Bit names amended.
Bit 7: PCR55 → PCR57
Bit 6: PCR55 → PCR56
Note added.
9.3.2 Port Control Register 115
5 (PCR5)
3.0
3.0
9.3.3 Port Data Register 5 115
(PDR5)
Note added.
11.3.2 Time Constant
Registers A and B
(TCORA, TCORB)
135
4.0
3.0
Initial value added.
TCORA and TCORB are initialized to H'FF.
11.3.5 Timer Control
Register V1 (TCRV1)
139
Description of bit 2 added.
TCNTV starts counting up by the input of the edge
which is selected by TVEG1 and TVEG0.
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 386 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
12.3.2 Timer Control
Register W (TCRW)
152
Amended.
4.0
TCRW selects the timer counter clock source, selects
a clearing condition, and specifies the timer output
levels.
Bit Bit Name Initial Value R/W Description
3
2
1
0
TOD
TOC
TOB
TOA
0
0
0
0
R/W Timer Output Level Setting D
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
R/W Timer Output Level Setting C
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
R/W Timer Output Level Setting B
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
R/W Timer Output Level Setting A
0: Output value is 0*
1: Output value is 1*
Note: * The change of the setting is immediately reflected in the
output value.
12.3.5 Timer I/O Control
Register 0 (TIOR0)
155
156
Description of bits 5 and 4 amended.
When IOB2 = 1,
2.0
2.0
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOB pin
Description of bits 1 and 0 amended.
When IOA2 = 1,
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOA pin
12.3.6 Timer I/O Control
Register 1 (TIOR1)
Description of bits 5 and 4 amended.
When IOD2 = 1,
01: Input capture at falling edge at the FTIOD pin
Description of bits 1 and 0 amended.
When IOC2 = 1,
01: Input capture to GRC at falling edge of the FTIOC
pin
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 387 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
12.4.1 Normal Operation 160
4.0
TCNT value
Figure 12.6 Toggle Output
Example (TOA = 0, TOB =
1)
H'FFFF
GRA
GRB
H'0000
13.2.1 Timer
174
Description amended.
4.0
Control/Status Register
WD (TCSRWD)
TCSRWD performs the TCSRWD and TCWD write
control. TCSRWD also controls the watchdog timer
operation and indicates the operating state. TCSRWD
must be rewritten by using the MOV instruction. The
bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to change
the setting value.
Bit
7
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
5
3
1
14.3.4 Transmit Data
Register (TDR)
180
183
4.0
2.0
Initial value added.
TDR is initialized to H'FF.
14.3.6 Serial Control
Register 3 (SCR3)
Description of bit 2 amended.
When this bit is set to 1, the TEI interrupt request is
enabled.
Initial value of bit 2 amended.
14.3.7 Serial Status
Register (SSR)
185
186
4.0
2.0
0 → 1
14.3.8 Bit Rate Register
(BRR)
Note amended.
n: CKS1 and CKS0 setting for SMR (0 ≤ N ≤ 3)
Register name amended.
PMR7 → PMR1
14.4.2 SCI3 Initialization
192
3.0
3.0
Figure 14.4 Sample SCI3
Initialization Flowchart
14.4.3 Data Transmission 194
Register name amended.
Figure 14.6 Sample Serial
Transmission Flowchart
(Asynchronous Mode)
PMR7 → PMR1
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 388 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
14.4.4 Serial Data
Reception
197
Description amended.
3.0
In the case of a framing error, a break can be
detected by reading the value of the input port
corresponding to the RxD pin.
Figure 14.8 Sample Serial
Data Reception Flowchart
(Asynchronous mode)(1)
14.7 Interrupts
213
2.0
Interrutpt Requests Abbreviation
Table 14.6 SCI3 Interrupt
Requests
Receive Data Full
RXI
Transmit Data Empty TXI
Transmission End
Receive Error
TEI
ERI
15.3.4 I2C Bus Mode
Register (ICMR)
Table 15.3 I2C Transfer
225
225
Transfer rate amended.
3.0
2.0
517 kHz → 571 kHz
Rate
15.3.5 I2C Bus Control
Register (ICCR)
Description of bit 7 amended.
When this bit is set to 1, the I2C bus interface module
is enabled to send/receive data and drive the bus
since it is connected to the SCL and SDA pins. ICMR
and ICDR can be accessed.
When this bit is cleared, the module is halted and
separated from the SCL and SDA pins. SAR and
SARX can be accessed.
15.3.5 I2C Bus Control
Register (ICCR)
226
Description of bit 6 amended.
IRRC → IRIC
3.0
3.0
Description of bit 1 added.
•
At the rising edge of the ninth transfer/receive
clock, and at the falling edge of the eighth
transfer/receive clock when a wait is inserted
15.4.2 Master Transmit
Operation
233
234
237
Description changed.
2.0
2.0
3.0
15.4.3 Master Receive
Operation
Description changed.
15.4.4 Slave Receive
Operation
Description amended.
R/W → R/W
15.4.5 Slave Transmit
Operation
239
Description amended.
3.0
R/W → R/W
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 389 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
15.4.9 Sample Flowcharts 244,
Changed.
2.0
245
Figure 15.13 Sample
Flowchart for Master
Transmit Mode
Figure 15.14 Sample
Flowchart for Master
Receive Mode
15.5 Usage Notes
251
258
2.0
2.0
Note added.
8. Notes on Start Condition Issuance for
Retransmission
16.3.3 A/D Control
Register (ADCR)
Description of bit 7 added.
The selection between the falling edge and rising
edge of the external trigger pin (ADTRG) conforms to
the WPEG5 bit in the interrupt edge select register 2
(IEGR2).
Section 17 EEPROM
265
Added.
3.0
4.0
18.1 When Using Internal 275
Power Supply Step-Down
Circuit
Description amended.
Connect the external power supply to the VCC pin, and
connect a capacitance of approximately 0.1 µF
between VCL and VSS, as shown in figure 18.1.
18.2 When Not Using
Internal Power Supply
Step-Down Circuit
276
Description amended.
4.0
When the internal power supply step-down circuit is
not used, connect the external power supply to the VCL
pin and VCC pin, as shown in figure 18.2.
19.1 Register Addresses 280
19.2 Register Bits 282
EEPROM key register (EKR) added.
3.0
3.0
Register
Name
Module
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Name
SARX
SVAX SVAX SVAX SVAX SVAX SVAX SVAX FSX
IIC
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ICMR
SAR
MLS WAIT CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 BC2
BC1
BC0
SVA6 SVA5 SVA4 SVA3 SVA2 SVA1 SVA0 FS
2.0
Register
Name
Module
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Name
ABRKSR ABIF ABIE
—
—
—
—
—
—
Address
break
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 390 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
20.2.1 Power Supply
Voltage and Operating
Ranges
287
288
288
Description in figure added.
AVcc = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
2.0
Power Supply Voltage and
Oscillation Frequency
Range
20.2.1 Power Supply
Voltage and Operating
Ranges
Description in figure added.
AVcc = 3.3 V to 5.5 V
2.0
Power Supply Voltage and
Operating Frequency
Range
20.2.1 Power Supply
Voltage and Operating
Ranges
Description in figure added.
Vcc = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
2.0
3.0
Analog Power Supply
Voltage and A/D Converter
Accuracy Guarantee
Range
20.2.2 DC Characteristics 291
Value
Table 20.2 DC
Characteristics (1)
Item
Symbol Applicable
Pins
Test
Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Condition
Input
Cin
All input pins
except power
supply pins
f = 1 MHz,
VIN = 0.0 V,
Ta = 25°C
—
—
—
—
15.0 pF
25.0
H8/
capaci-
tance
3664N
SCL, SDA
20.2.2 DC Characteristics 293
Added.
3.0
Table 20.2 DC
Characteristics (2)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 391 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
20.2.2 DC Characteristics 294
2.0
Value
Table 20.2 DC
Characteristics (3)
Item
Symbol Applicable
Pins
Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Allowable
output low
current (per
pin)
IOL
Output pins
VCC = 4.0 V to
—
—
2.0 mA
except port 8, 5.5 V
SCL, and SDA
Port 8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20.0 mA
10.0 mA
6.0 mA
0.5 mA
Port 8
SCL and SDA
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
Allowable
output low
current
∑IOL
Output pins
V
CC = 4.0 V to
—
—
40.0 mA
except port 8, 5.5 V
SCL, and SDA
(total)
Port 8,
—
—
—
—
80.0 mA
20.0 mA
SCL, and SDA
Output pins
except port 8,
SCL, and SDA
Port 8,
—
—
40.0 mA
SCL, and SDA
20.2.3 AC Characteristics 295
2.0
Value
Table 20.3 AC
Characteristics
Item
Symbol Applicable
Pins
Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Oscillation
stabilization
time
trc
OSC1,
OSC2
—
—
5.0 ms
(ceramic
resonator)
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 392 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
20.2.3 AC Characteristics 296
4.0
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins
Table 20.3 AC
Characteristics
Input pin high tIH
width
NMI,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
WKP0 to WKP5,
TMCIV, TMRIV,
TRGV, ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Input pin low tIL
width
NMI,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
WKP0 to WKP5,
TMCIV, TMRIV,
TRGV, ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD
20.2.3 AC Characteristics 297
Table 20.4 I2C Bus
Interface Timing
3.0
Values
Item
Symbol Test
Condition
Min
Typ Max Unit
Data-input
setup time
tSDAS
1tcyc+20
0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Data-input
hold time
tSDAH
20.2.4 A/D Converter
Characteristics
299
2.0
Value
Item
Symbol Applicable Test
Min Typ Max Unit Reference
Table 20.6 A/D Converter
Characteristics
Pins
Concition Figure
1
Analog
power
supply
voltage
AVCC
AVCC
3.3 VCC 5.5
V
*
20.2.5 Watchdog Timer
Characteristics
300
Unit of on-chip oscillator overflow time amended.
2.0
ms → s
Table 20.7 Watchdog
Timer Characteristics
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 393 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
20.2.6 Flash Memory
Characteristics
301
4.0
Values
Min Typ Max Unit
Item
Symbol Test
Condition
Table 20.8 Flash Memory
Characteristics
Reprogramming NWEC
count
—
—
1000 Times
20.2.7 EEPROM
Characteristics
(Preliminary)
303
Added.
3.0
Table 20.9 EEPROM
Characteristics
20.3 Electrical
Characteristics (Mask
ROM Version)
304
304
Added.
2.0
2.0
20.3.1 Power Supply
Voltage and Operating
Ranges
Description in figure added.
AVcc = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
Power Supply Voltage and
Oscillation Frequency
Range
20.3.1 Power Supply
Voltage and Operating
Ranges
304
305
Description in figure added.
AVcc = 3.0 V to 5.5 V
2.0
2.0
Power Supply Voltage and
Operating Frequency
Range
20.3.1 Power Supply
Voltage and Operating
Ranges
Description in figure added.
Vcc = 2.7 V to 5.5 V
Analog Power Supply
Voltage and A/D Converter
Accuracy Guarantee
Range
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 394 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
20.3.3 AC Characteristics 311
4.0
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins
Table 20.11 AC
Characteristics
Input pin high tIH
width
NMI,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
WKP0 to WKP5,
TMCIV, TMRIV,
TRGV, ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to
FTIOD
Input pin low tIL
width
NMI,
IRQ0 to IRQ3,
WKP0 to WKP5,
TMCIV, TMRIV,
TRGV, ADTRG,
FTCI,
FTIOA to FTIOD
20.3.3 AC Characteristics 313
Table 20.12 I2C Bus
Interface Timing
3.0
Values
Item
Symbol Test
Condition
Min
Typ Max Unit
Data-input
setup time
tSDAS
1tcyc+20
0
—
—
—
—
ns
ns
Data-input
hold time
tSDAH
20.3.4 A/D Converter
Characteristics
315
2.0
Value
Item
Symbol Applicable Test
Min Typ Max Unit Reference
Table 20.14 A/D Converter
Characteristics
Pins
Concition Figure
1
Analog
power
supply
voltage
AVCC
AVCC
3.3 VCC 5.5
V
*
20.4 Operation Timing
317
319
Description of tof deleted.
2.0
3.0
Figure 20.4 I2C Bus
Interface Input/Output
Timing
20.4 Operation Timing
Added.
Figure 20.7 EEPROM Bus
Timing
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 395 of 400
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Rev.
A.1 Instruction List
333
2.0
Table A.1 Instruction Set
6. Branching instructions
Mnemonic
Operation
JSR
JSR @ERn
PC → @–SP
PC ← ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
PC → @–SP
PC ← aa:24
PC → @–SP
PC ← @aa:8
RTS RTS
PC ← @SP+
A.3 Number of Execution 339
States
Added.
2.0
3.0
B.1 I/O Port Block
351
Internal data bus
Figure B.10 Port 5 Block
Diagram (P54 to P50)
PUCR
PMR
PDR
PCR
Appendix E Laminated-
Structure Cross Section
375
Added.
3.0
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 396 of 400
Index
A/D Converter ........................................ 253
sample-and-hold circuit ...................... 260
Scan Mode .......................................... 259
Single Mode........................................ 259
Absolute Maximum Ratings ................... 287
Address Break........................................... 61
Addressing Modes .................................... 33
Absolute Address.................................. 34
Immediate ............................................. 35
Memory Indirect ................................... 35
Program-Counter Relative .................... 35
Register Direct...................................... 33
Register Indirect.................................... 33
Register Indirect with Displacement..... 34
Register Indirect with Post-Increment .. 34
Register Indirect with Pre-Decrement... 34
Electrical Characteristics (F-ZTAT™
Version, F-ZTAT™ Version with
EEPROM)...........................................287
AC Characteristics ..............................295
DC Characteristics ..............................289
Electrical Characteristics (Mask ROM
Version)...............................................304
AC Characteristics ..............................311
DC Characteristics ..............................305
Exception Handling...................................47
Reset Exception Handling.....................54
Trap Instruction.....................................47
flash memory.............................................87
Boot Mode ............................................92
boot program.........................................92
Erase/Erase-Verify................................98
Error Protection...................................101
Hardware Protection............................101
Power-Down State ..............................102
Program/Program-Verify ......................96
Programmer Mode ..............................102
Software Protection.............................101
Clock
Clock Pulse Generators......................... 67
Subclock Generator............................... 70
System Clock Generator ....................... 68
Condition-Code Register (CCR)............... 17
CPU .......................................................... 11
EEPROM................................................ 265
Acknowledge ...................................... 269
Acknowledge Polling.......................... 271
Byte Write........................................... 270
Current Address Read......................... 272
EEPROM Interface............................. 268
EEPROM Key Register (EKR)........... 267
Page Write .......................................... 271
Random Address Read........................ 273
Sequential Read .................................. 273
Slave Addressing ................................ 269
Start Condition.................................... 268
Stop Condition.................................... 268
the corresponding slave address reference
address (ESAR)............................... 269
Effective Address...................................... 36
General Registers ......................................16
I/O Ports..................................................105
I/O Port Block Diagrams.....................351
I2C Bus Data Formats..............................232
I2C Bus Interface (IIC)............................217
acknowledge........................................232
Clock Synchronous Serial Format.......241
general call address .............................229
I2C Transfer Rate.................................225
Slave address.......................................232
Start condition.....................................232
Stop condition .....................................232
Instruction Set ...........................................22
Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit
............................................................275
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 397 of 400
Interrupt
Internal Interrupts ................................. 55
BDRL............................ 63, 279, 282, 285
BRR ............................ 186, 278, 282, 284
EBR1............................. 90, 278, 281, 284
EKR ............................ 267, 280, 283, 286
FENR ............................ 91, 278, 281, 284
FLMCR1....................... 89, 278, 281, 284
FLMCR2....................... 90, 278, 281, 284
FLPWCR....................... 91, 278, 281, 284
GRA............................ 157, 278, 281, 284
GRB ............................ 157, 278, 281, 284
GRC ............................ 157, 278, 281, 284
GRD............................ 157, 278, 281, 284
ICCR ........................... 225, 279, 282, 285
ICDR........................... 220, 279, 282, 285
ICMR .......................... 223, 279, 282, 285
ICSR............................ 228, 279, 282, 285
IEGR1 ........................... 49, 280, 283, 286
IEGR2 ........................... 50, 280, 283, 286
IENR1 ........................... 51, 280, 283, 286
IRR1.............................. 52, 280, 283, 286
IWPR ............................ 53, 280, 283, 286
MSTCR1....................... 80, 280, 283, 286
PCR1........................... 107, 280, 283, 285
PCR2........................... 111, 280, 283, 285
PCR5........................... 115, 280, 283, 285
PCR7........................... 119, 280, 283, 285
PCR8........................... 121, 280, 283, 285
PDR1........................... 107, 279, 282, 285
PDR2........................... 111, 279, 282, 285
PDR5........................... 115, 279, 282, 285
PDR7........................... 119, 279, 283, 285
PDR8........................... 122, 279, 283, 285
PDRB.......................... 125, 280, 283, 285
PMR1.......................... 106, 280, 283, 285
PMR5.......................... 114, 280, 283, 285
PUCR1........................ 108, 279, 282, 285
PUCR5........................ 116, 279, 282, 285
RDR ............................ 180, 279, 282, 284
RSR.....................................................180
SAR............................. 222, 279, 282, 285
SARX.......................... 222, 279, 282, 285
SCR3........................... 182, 278, 282, 284
SMR............................ 181, 278, 282, 284
Interrupt Response Time....................... 57
IRQ3 to IRQ0 Interrupts....................... 54
NMI Interrupt........................................ 54
WKP5 to WKP0 Interrupts................... 55
interrupt mask bit (I)................................. 17
Laminated-Structure Cross Section of
H8/3664N ........................................... 375
large current ports....................................... 1
Memory Map ............................................ 12
Module Standby Function......................... 86
On-Board Programming Modes................ 91
Package....................................................... 2
Package Dimensions............................... 370
Pin Arrangement......................................... 4
Power-down Modes.................................. 75
Sleep Mode........................................... 83
Standby Mode....................................... 84
Subactive Mode .................................... 85
Subsleep Mode...................................... 84
Prescaler S ................................................ 71
Prescaler W............................................... 71
Product Code Lineup .............................. 368
Program Counter (PC).............................. 17
PWM Operation...................................... 162
Register
ABRKCR...................... 62, 279, 282, 285
ABRKSR ...................... 63, 279, 282, 285
ADCR......................... 258, 279, 282, 285
ADCSR....................... 257, 279, 282, 285
ADDRA...................... 256, 279, 282, 285
ADDRB ...................... 256, 279, 282, 285
ADDRC ...................... 256, 279, 282, 285
ADDRD...................... 256, 279, 282, 285
BARH........................... 63, 279, 282, 285
BARL............................ 63, 279, 282, 285
BDRH........................... 63, 279, 282, 285
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 398 of 400
SSR ............................. 184, 279, 282, 284
SYSCR1........................ 76, 280, 283, 286
SYSCR2........................ 79, 280, 283, 286
TCA ............................ 130, 278, 281, 284
TCNT.......................... 157, 278, 281, 284
TCNTV....................... 135, 278, 281, 284
TCORA....................... 135, 278, 281, 284
TCORB....................... 135, 278, 281, 284
TCRV0........................ 136, 278, 281, 284
TCRV1........................ 139, 278, 281, 284
TCRW......................... 151, 278, 281, 284
TCSRV ....................... 138, 278, 281, 284
TCSRWD.................... 174, 279, 282, 285
TCWD ........................ 175, 279, 282, 285
TDR ............................ 180, 279, 282, 284
TIERW........................ 153, 278, 281, 284
TIOR0......................... 155, 278, 281, 284
TIOR1......................... 156, 278, 281, 284
TMA ........................... 129, 278, 281, 284
TMRW........................ 151, 278, 281, 284
TMWD........................ 175, 279, 282, 285
TSCR .......................... 230, 280, 283, 286
TSR..................................................... 180
TSRW .........................153, 278, 281, 284
Serial Communication Interface 3(SCI3)177
Asynchronous Mode ...........................191
bit rate .................................................186
Break Detection...................................214
Clocked Synchronous Mode ...............199
framing error .......................................195
Mark State...........................................214
Multiprocessor Communication Function
........................................................206
overrun error .......................................195
parity error...........................................195
Stack Pointer (SP).....................................17
Timer A...................................................127
Timer V...................................................133
Timer W..................................................147
Vector Address..........................................48
Watchdog Timer .....................................173
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 399 of 400
Rev. 4.0, 03/02, page 400 of 400
H8/3664 Series Hardware Manual
Publication Date: 1st Edition, March 2000
4th Edition, March 2002
Published by:
Business Planning Division
Semiconductor & Integrated Circuits
Hitachi, Ltd.
Edited by:
Technical Documentation Group
Hitachi Kodaira Semiconductor Co., Ltd.
Copyright © Hitachi, Ltd., 2000. All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
相关型号：
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明